Home

Thor VM2 User`s Guide (Windows CE 6.0 OS)

1. Power cable with straight connector Power cable with right angle connector e MOQ QR gt GG CA SAO O eo SV i e 8 W E o S e E E S o pe a W H les Ey o da p Es l zl gt O d la E y M Yous Jf Bl e N 3 8 Woe 16 0 O Avoid sharp bends in this area of the power cable 12 48 VDC Vehicles 10 60 VDC Direct Connection A CAUTION For installation by trained service personnel only d Use caution when routing the power cable See Power Cable Cautions page 4 33 Fuse Requirements WARNING For proper and safe installation the input power cable must be connected to a fused circuit on the vehicle If the supply connection is made directly to the battery the fuse should be installed in the positive lead within 5 inches of the battery s positive terminal The fused circuit requires a maximum time delay
2. lis Se S SN fo e e O e O e e e e S o e e ef A eben o Pf b 9 ol o o THH P H Z Wiring Connector Wiring Connector on Thor VM2 on Front Panel 7 Position the replacement front panel so wiring connector on the back of the front panel lines up with the connector on the Thor VM2 8 Gently press the front panel into place 9 Tighten the twelve 12 captive M3 screws In the order shown in the top figure above use a 2 Phillips bit and torque the screws to 6 7 inch pounds 10 Reinstall the Thor VM2 in the Quick Mount Smart Dock 11 When the Thor VM2 is placed in the powered dock the UPS battery automatically reconnects 12 Restart the Thor VM2 Software Introduction There are several different aspects to the setup configuration and operation of the Thor VM2 Many of the setup and configura tion settings are dependent upon the optional features such as hardware and software installed on the unit The examples found in this section are to be used as examples only the configuration of your specific Thor VM2 computer may vary The fol lowing sections provide a general reference for the configuration of the Thor VM2 and some of its optional features Operating System Your Thor VM2 ope
3. Locate the small push button located just below the SIM card installation slot Press the push button to disconnect the UPS The UPS battery maintains its charge but is disconnected from the power circuitry of the Thor VM2 Reattach the access panel torquing the M3 screws to 4 5 inch pounds using a 2 Phillips bit When the Thor VM2 is attached to external power the UPS battery is automatically reconnected 10 Restart the Thor VM2 Install SD Card An SD card slot is provided for storage expansion Equipment Required The following equipment is user supplied e Torquing tool capable of measuring inch pounds SD card The following commercially available SD cards are recommended ATP 2GB Industrial Grade SDHC card AF2GSDI 5ADXX ATP 4GB Industrial Grade SDHC card AF4GSDI 5ACXX SanDisk 2GB SDHC card SDSDB 2048 SanDisk 4GB SDHC card SDSDB 004G e 2 Phillips screwdriver bit Installation Procedure 1 For convenience the Thor VM2 can be removed NT 7 from the Quick Mount Smart Dock though it is not pi necessary A 2 Ifthe Thor VM2 remains in the dock disconnect the power cable from the dock 3 Place the Thor V
4. Red White if present Red Black White if present ici ircular Black Power Connector Green Blue not connected See Caution statement below CAUTION For battery powered vehicles e Red wire is connected to battery positive If there is a red wire and a red white wire twist them together and connect to battery positive e Black wire must be connected to battery negative If there is a black wire and a black white wire twist them together and connect to battery negative e Green wire must be connected to the vehicle chassis ground For internal combustion engine powered vehicles e Red wire is connected to battery positive If there is a red wire and a red white wire twist them together and connect to battery positive e Black wire is connected to battery negative If there is a black wire and a black white wire twist them together and connect to battery negative e Green wire is connected to the vehicle chassis ground which can also be battery negative WARNING AN For proper and safe installation the input power cable must be connected to a fused circuit on the ve hicle If the supply connection is made directly to the battery the fuse should be installed in the positive lead within 5 inches of the battery s positive terminal The fused circuit requires a maximum time delay slow blow fuse with a current rating as noted below e F
5. 6 Locate the SIM card installation slot 7 Slide the SIM card into the slot 8 Reattach the access panel torquing the screws to 4 5 inch pounds 9 If removed reinstall the Thor VM2 in the dock 10 Resume the Thor VM2 from suspend Replace Front Panel Equipment Required The following equipment is user supplied e Torquing tool capable of measuring inch pounds e 2 Phillips screwdriver bit Replacement Procedure A CAUTION Before replacing the Thor VM2 front panel Disconnect UPS Battery page 4 61 1 Place the Thor VM2 on a clean well lit surface before perform ing the front panel replacement 2 Place the Thor VM2 in Suspend by pressing the Power button 3 Remove the Thor VM2 from the Quick Mount Smart Dock a 11 4 Disconnect UPS Battery page 4 61 5 Loosen the twelve 12 captive M3 screws holding the front panel Use a 2 Phillips bit 3 Bue 2 o 0 2 Soo 6 Carefully lift the front panel away from the device
6. Input Panel Properties Input Panel Current input method E To quickly switch input methods tap the Input Panel arrow and then tap the desired method from the menu that appears M Allow applications to change the input panel state Use this panel to make the Input Panel on screen keyboard or the physical keypad primarily available when entering data on any screen Selecting Keyboard enables both Tap the Options button to set the size of the keys displayed on screen and whether Transcriber gestures are enabled or dis abled Transcriber When choosing Transcriber as the Current Input Method first tap the Keyboard icon in the status bar Select Tran scriber from the pop up menu Then open the Input control panel and tap the Options button Transcriber Options Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Input Panel are available only when Transcriber is selected as the active input method Tap the button or the Help button to access Transcriber Help Internet Options Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Internet Options Set options for Thor VM2 Internet connectivity Select a tab Tap the button for help using Windows CE Help installed in your mobile device Adjust the settings and tap the OK button The changes take effect immediately Factory Default Settings General Start Page http www msn com Search Page http search msn com User Agent Windows CE Cache Size 512 KB
7. Note Your Thor VM2 screen display may not be exactly as shown above Contact Technical Assistance page 11 1 for upgrade availability and version information Sync Clock Reset the time on the Thor VM2 based on the time on the Mobile Device Server host Contact On Startup Connect to the Mobile Device Server when the Enabler is accessed On Resume Connect to the Mobile Device Server when resuming from Suspend mode On IP Change Connect to the Mobile Device Server when the IP address of the Thor VM2 changes On Ext Power Initiate connection to the Mobile Device Server when the device is connected to an external power source such as based on a docking event Contact Periodically Period Allows the administrator to configure the Enabler to contact the Mobile Device Server ic Update and query for updates at a regular interval beginning at a specific time Wakeup device if suspended If the time interval for periodic contact with the Mobile Device Server occurs a mobile device that is in Suspend Mode can wakeup and process updates Reboot before attempt Reboot mobile device before attempting to contact Mobile Device Server Require external power Only connect when the mobile device has external power Use relative offset Dimmed Data Avalanche Update Settings ok E Data Preferences Display Taskbar Set Alt _ Transfer Data When Device is Idle Idle Timeout F Jus ES M Real time
8. 2 To select an individual certificate click on the Browse button 3 Uncheck the Use full trusted store checkbox 4 Select the desired certificate and click Select You are returned to the Credentials screen 5 Click OK then click Commit If using the Certs Path option 1 Leave the Use MS store box unchecked 2 Enter the certificate filename in the CA Cert text box 3 Click OK then click Commit The device should be authenticating the server certificate and using PEAP GTC for the user authentication Ensure the correct Active Profile is selected on the Main tab and warmboot The SCU Main tab shows the device is asso ciated after the radio connects to the network Note The date must be properly set on the device to authenticate a certificate WPA LEAP To use WPA LEAP make sure the following profile options are used 1 Enter the SSID of the Access Point assigned to this profile Set EAP Type to LEAP Set Encryption to WPA TKIP 2 3 4 Set Auth Type as follows 5 If the Cisco CCX certified AP is configured for open authentication set the Auth Type radio parameter to Open 6 If the AP is configured to use shared key or passphrase set the Auth Type radio parameter to Shared 7 Ifthe AP is configured for network EAP only set the Auth Type radio parameter to LEAP To use another encryption type select WPA CCKM WPA2 AES or WPA2 CCKM for encryption and complete other entries as detailed in this section Sum
9. 63 5 mm wide and approximately 2 50 8 mm thick The clamp may be attached to a thicker beam by substituting longer bolts not included Be sure to position the RAM clamp mount to allow access to the switches and ports on the bottom of the Thor VM2 E pas NW Bolts a Upper clamp piece 2 Position the upper clamp piece with ball on the beam Place the bolts through the holes in the upper clamp piece 3 Position the lower clamp piece below the beam Align the bolts with the holes in the lower clamp piece 4 Place the nylon locking nuts on the bolts and tighten the bolts Mounting Dimensions Note Drawing not to scale 2 56 G5 02mm 1 84 46 74mm J Step 1c Attach RAM Plate to Vehicle and Attach RAM Ball Note If you are using the RAM ball mount please go to Step 1a Attach RAM Ball to Vehicle page 4 22 If you are 3 using the RAM clamp mount please go to Step 1b Mount RAM Clamp to Vehicle page 4 23 Determine the position for mounting the RAM ball plate Be sure to position the RAM plate to allow access to the switches and ports on the bottom of the Thor VM2 Attach the RAM ball plate to the vehicle mounting surface using four 1 4 bolts not included or equivalent fasten ers If not already attached attach the RAM ball to the RAM ball plate using three M6 nuts and washers IMPORTANT Mount to the most rigid surface available Mounting D
10. Mouse Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Mouse Use this option to set the double tap sensitivity for stylus taps on the Thor VM2 touch screen Mouse Properties Double Ciick Double click this grid to set the double click sensitivity for both the speed and physical distance between clicks Double click this icon to test your double click settings If this icon doesn t change adjust your settings using the grid above Network and Dialup Connections Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Network and Dialup Connections Set Thor VM2 network driver properties and network access properties Select a connection to use or create a new con nection File Edit View Advanced gt E IER Es BI E e Make New USB Client SDCSD30 Conmection Create a New Connection 1 On the mobile device select Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Network and Dialup Connections A window is displayed showing the existing connections 2 Assuming the connection you want does not exist double tap Make New Connection 3 Give the new connection an appropriate name My Connection 9600 etc Tap the Direct Connection radio button Tap the Next button 4 From the popup menu choose the port you want to connect to Only the available ports are shown 5 Tap the Configure button 6 Under the Port Settings tab choose the appropriate baud rate Data bits parity and stop bits r
11. File management program e Ifinstalled RFTerm runs automatically at the conclusion of each reboot e If installed and enabled AppLock runs automatically at the conclusion of each reboot e The wireless client connects automatically during each reboot e Bluetooth re connects to nearby paired devices automatically at the conclusion of each reboot e If installed and pre configured Wavelink Avalanche connects remotely and downloads updates automatically during each reboot Communication Start gt Programs gt Communication Connect ActiveSync page 6 1 is pre loaded on the Thor VM2 Tap the Conenct to initiate an ActiveSync connection Note By default ActiveSync is configured to connect automatically when the USB cable is conencted to a PC SeePC Connection page 5 77 Using Microsoft ActiveSync you can copy files from your Thor VM2 to your desktop computer and vice versa Once an ActiveSync relationship partnership has been established with Connect on a desktop computer ActiveSync will synchronize using USB on the Thor VM2 Start FTP Server Stop FTP Server Start gt Programs gt Communication gt Start or Stop FTP Server These shortcuts call the Services Manager to start and stop the FTP server The server defaults to Off for security unless it is explicitly turned on from the menu Summit Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Wi Fi Use this option to set up radio client profiles with t
12. table The devices are removed from the Device table after any reboot sequence or after closing and reopening the Bluetooth panels Tap the No button to make no changes See Clear Pairing Table on Boot on the Reconnect page 5 33 tab Bluetooth Device Menu Pre requisite The Discover button has been clicked and there are Bluetooth devices listed Click on a device in the list to highlight it Double click the highlighted device to display the Bluetooth Device right click menu The Bluetooth device does not need to be active Pair as Scanner Pair as Scanner Pair as Printer Pair as Printer Pair as Serial Device Properties Delete Properties Filtered Mode Enabled Filtered Mode Disabled Right Click Menu Options Pair as Scanner Receive data from the highlighted Bluetooth scanner or Bluetooth imager Pair as Printer Send data to the highlighted Bluetooth printer Pair as Serial Device Communicate with the highlighted serial Bluetooth device This option is available when Filtered Mode is disabled Disconnect Stop the connection between the Thor VM2 and the highlighted paired Bluetooth de vice Delete Remove an unpaired device from the Bluetooth device list The highlighted device name and identifier is removed from the Thor VM2 Bluetooth Devices panel after the user taps OK Properties More information on the highlighted Bluetooth device Bluetooth Device Properties Bluetooth Properties E
13. Adjust the input and output parameters volume sidetone and record gain for headphone software and microphone Set the double tap sensitivity for stylus taps on the touch screen Set network driver properties and network access properties Set network logging options Set various device specific configuration options Set the mobile device owner details name phone etc Enter notes Enable disable Own er display parameters Enter Network ID for the device user name password domain Set OS access password properties for signon and or screen saver Control the connection between the mobile device and a local desktop or laptop computer Set power scheme properties Review device status Set power configuration mode Program P1 P5 keys on the front bezel Set appearance of numbers currency time and date based on country region and language settings Load or save user defaults load factory defaults warmboot or restart Select to remove specific user installed programs in their entirety Configure screen blanking Option Screen Rotation page 5 91 Stylus page 5 92 System page 5 93 Terminal Server Client Licenses page 5 94 Volume and Sounds page 5 95 Wi Fi page 5 96 Function Rotate screen display Set double tap sensitivity properties and or calibrate the touch panel Review System and Computer data and revision levels Adjust Storage and Program mem ory settings Enter dev
14. ES ode e ete gt S A cable tie wrap can be used instead of a padlock if desired oo000 o 0 M 0 7 lt i Laptop Security Cable gt ON The Thor VM2 can be secured with a standard laptop security cable using the slot on the back of the Thor VM2 Install RAM Mount CAUTION This device is intended to transmit RF energy For protection against RF exposure to humans and in accor dance with FCC rules and Industry Canada rules this transmitter should be installed such that a minimum separation dis tance of at least 20 cm 7 8 in is maintained between the antenna and the general population This device is not to be co located with other transmitters Before installation begins verify you have the applicable vehicle mounting bracket assembly components necessary as shown in the following figures Components RAM Mounting Kits A Thor VM1 mounting kit can b
15. Open 802 11 authentication type used when associating with the Access Point Options are Open LEAP or Shared key EAP Type None Extensible Authentication Protocol EAP type used for 802 1x authentication to the Access Point Options are None LEAP EAP FAST PEAP MSCHAP PEAP GTC PEAP TLS EAP TTLS or EAP TLS Note EAP Type chosen determines whether the Credentials button is active and also determines the available entries in the Credentials pop up window Parameter Default Explanation Encryption Type of encryption to be used to protect transmitted data Available options may vary by SCU version Options are None WEP or Manual WEP WEP EAP or Auto WEP WPA PSK WPA TKIP WPA CCKM WPA2 PSK WPA2 AES or WPA2 CCKM An upgrade to the SCU may be necessary to support CKIP See Using CKIP page 8 7 for details The Encryption type chosen determines if the WEP Keys PSK Keys button is active and also determines the available entries in the WEP or PSK pop up window Radio Mode BGA Rates Full Specify 802 11a 802 11b and or 802 11g rates when communicating with the AP The options displayed for this parameter depend on the type of radio installed in the mobile device Options B rates only 1 2 5 5 and 11 Mbps BG Rates Full All B and G rates G rates only 6 9 12 18 24 36 48 and 54 Mbps BG optimized or BG subset 1 2 5 5 6 11 24 36 and 54 Mbps A rates only 6 9 12 18 24 36 4
16. and require external remote mount antennas 1 WI FI MAIN Red label 802 11 Main External Antenna Connector 2 GPS Green label GPS Antenna Connector 3 MOBILE NET Blue label WWAN Antenna Connector 4 WI FI AUX Yellow label 802 11 Auxiliary External Antenna Connector External Antenna Connector When the Thor VM2 is ordered with the internal antenna option the 802 11 antenna connectors on the back are not connected to the 802 11 radio Instead the internal antenna connector is connected to the 802 11 radio Remove the rubber cap if present from the antenna connector before connecting an external antenna Internal 802 11 Antenna If the internal 802 11 antenna option is ordered antennas are mounted inside the Thor VM2 The internal antennas are not user accessible External 802 11 Antenna An external whip antenna can be connected to the Wi Fi antenna connections on the back of the Thor VM2 for the 802 11 radio Two external antennas are used for radio diversity See Install External Antenna page 4 56 for instructions Vehicle Remote Antenna The external antennas can be remotely mounted on the vehicle See Install Remote Antenna page 4 57 for instruc tions External antenna kits are available for the 802 11 Wi Fi radio GPS and WWAN Keyboard Options Integrated Keypad The integrated keypad contains five programmable keys a blue modifier key and an orange modifier key The P1 though P5 keys are
17. e 34 character length with first two characters 01 strip first 2 and last 18 e 26 character length with first two characters 01 strip first 2 and last 10 e 24 character length with first two characters 01 strip first 2 and last 8 This 24 character bar code is Code 128 e 20 character length with first two characters 00 strip first O no characters and last 4 On the Data Options tab set Enable Code ID to Custom Create four custom IDs using 1 for EAN 128 bar code and 0 for Code 128 bar code e c1 Code C1 e c2 Code ICH e c3 Code CO 24 character bar code is Code 128 e c4 Code ICH E Name J Add ID Code Clear All Custom symbology setup is assigned in the following manner e c1 min length 34 max length 34 strip leading 2 strip trailing 18 Code ID enabled Bar Code Data 01 e c2 min length 26 max length 26 strip leading 2 strip trailing 10 Code ID enabled Bar Code Data 01 e c3 min length 24 max length 24 strip leading 2 strip trailing 8 Code ID enabled Bar Code Data 01 e c4min length 20 max length 20 strip leading 0 strip trailing 4 Code ID enabled Bar Code Data 00 Add the custom symbologies Refer to the previous section Symbology Settings for instruction Code ID custom y Symbology fea y Enable Min g Max g Strip V Leading k Code ID M Trailing fis Barcode Da
18. label near the mouthpiece Make sure the Talk label is in front of your mouth The microphone cable can be routed over or under clothing 3 Follow the safety guidelines below when wearing the headset Under Clothing e Leave the cable exposed only at the top of the collar Be sure to leave a small loop of cable to allow movement of your head Over Clothing e Use clothing clips to hold the cable close to your body e Tuck the cable under the belt but leave a small loop where it goes under the belt Do not wear the cable on the front of your body It may get in your way or get caught on protruding objects Connect CANbus Cable The CANbus Audio connector supports a headset adapter cable or a CANbus Y cable The Thor VM2 does not support connecting audio and CANbus simultaneously y eo A LL See CANbus Audio Connector page 10 6 for connector pinouts 1 2 3 Seat the D15 cable end connector firmly over the CANbus Audio Connector on the Quick Mount Smart Dock Tighten the thumbscrews in a clockwise direction Do not over tighten The CANbus Y cable has a 9 pin F SAE J1939 Deutsch and 9 pin M SAE J1939 Deutsch connector Connect the appropriate cable connector as needed Install External Antenna The external antenna cannot be used by devices with an internal antenna 1 2 Remove the rubber cap if present from the antenna connector before connecting an e
19. Advanced Taskbar and Start Menu Properties General Advanced af Tap the Clear button to remove dear Y the contents of the Documents TI Expand Control Panel Menu Expand Control Panel Tap the checkbox to have the Control Panel folders appear in drop down menu format from the Settings gt Control Panel menu option Clear Contents of Document Folder Tap the ton to remove the contents of the Document folder Taskbar Icons As Thor VM2 devices and applications open and change state icons are placed in the Taskbar In most cases tapping the icon in the Taskbar opens the related application Refer to Start gt Help for an explanation of standard Windows CE taskbar icons Following are a few of the Thor VM2 taskbar icons that may appear in the Taskbar These icons are in addition to the Windows CE taskbar icons JH 3 gt A Wireless Zero Config Utility page 8 2 Inactive Connected Not Connected Clicking on the icon opens the Wireless Zero Config utility OG 3 Bluetooth page 5 29 connected disconnected Clicking the icon opens the Bluetooth control panel yw ActiveSync page 6 1 connection BD Cerdisp connected displayed when HSM Connect page 6 3 is connected Summit client signal indicator no signal excellent signal Clicking on the icon opens the Summit Client Utility page 8 1 Gobi Connection Manager WWAN signal indicator no signal excellent signal Clicking o
20. Area Code 425 Tone Dialing Enabled Country Region 1 Disable Call Waiting Disabled blank Dialing Properties When dialing from work y New Local settings are Dialing Patterns The local area code is ba The local country region code is fi Dial using Tone Pulse IT Disable call waiting by dialing Display Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Display The display might also called the touch screen Select the desktop background image and appearance scheme for the Thor VM2 Using the options on the Backlight tab set the display backlight and keypad backlight timers when running on battery or external power Adjust the settings and tap the OK button to save the changes Saved changes take effect immediately Factory Default Settings Background page 5 57 Image Windows CE Image on background Disabled Appearance page 5 57 Schemes Windows Standard Backlight page 5 58 Battery power 30 seconds External power Varies by Power Config uration Mode selected Background Display Properties Background Appearance Backlight Image Windowsce y Tile image on background There is very little change from general desktop PC Display Properties Background options Select an image from the dropdown list or tap the Browse button to select an image from another folder to display on the Desktop and then tap the OK button to
21. Delete History Button enabled Connection Use LAN Disabled Autodial Name USB Client Proxy Server Disabled Bypass Proxy Disabled Security Privacy tab First party cookies Accept Third party cookies Prompt Session cookies Always allow Advanced Stylesheets Enabled Theming Support Enable Multimedia All options enabled Security All options enabled Popups Block popups Disabled Display notification Enabled Use same window Disabled Internet Options General connection Security Privacy Advanced Popups Start Page http www msn com Search Page http search msn com User Agent requires browser restart Windows CE KE Cache Size in KB 512 Delete Browsing History Internet Options OK x Security Privacy Advanced Popups C Use LAN no autodial amp utodial name fuse Client y Settings TI Use configuration script Address C Use a proxy server OO Bypass for local addresses Address Port feo Internet Options Ki E Connection Security Privacy Advanced Popups Sites Internet Local Trusted sites Restricted SELME intranet sites y Internet This zone contains all Web sites you haven t placed in other zones Security Tab Use the Settings button to set ActiveX control scripting and plug in behavior for each zone Internet Local intranet Trusted Sites Restricted Sites Us
22. Enable the PARM radio button to add parameters for file exe execution in the same text box 4 Tap the OK button when finished The changes take effect immediately Regional and Language Settings Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Regional Settings Set the appearance of numbers currency time and date based on regional and language settings Set the Thor VM2 user interface language and the default input language Factory Default Settings Region Locale English United States Number 123 456 789 00 123 456 789 00 neg Currency 123 456 789 00 pos 123 456 789 00 neg Time h mm ss tt tt AM or PM Date M d yy short dddd MMMM dd yyyy long Language User Interface English United States Input Language English United States US Installed English United States US Regional and Language Settings Regional Settings Your locale User Interface Language Input Language The locale option affects how some programs format numbers currency time and dates Engish United States y Regional and Language Settings Regional Settings User Interface Language User Interface Language Input Language The option will determine the language used for the menus dialogs and alerts English United States Regional and Language Settings Regional Settings User Interface Language Input Language a Default Input language Select
23. Key Value Key Value P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 Note Programmable Key Control Panel options LaunchApp and RunCmd do not inter relate with similarly named options contained in other Control Panel applets For example the AppLock Administrator Control panel file Launch option KeyMap Programmable Key 7 ok D KeyMap Launch pp RunCmd Modifier Mode None Orange Key Remapped Key Key Sequence Escape Add EA U Assign settings by clicking radio buttons and selecting keys from the drop down boxes Tap the OK button when fin ished The changes take effect immediately Remap a Key to a Single Key 1 Select the modifier key from the Modifier Mode options 2 Select the key to be remapped from the Key pull down list 3 Select the value for the remapped key from the Remapped Key pull down list 4 Click OK to save the result and close the control panel Remap a Key to a Unicode Value 1 Select the modifier key from the Modifier Mode options 2 Select the key to be remapped from the Key pull down list 3 Select Unicode from the Remapped Key pull down list 4 There are two Unicode text boxes located on the lower part of this tab Enter the Unicode value in the left text box and the Unicode character is displayed in the right text box 5 Click OK to save the result and close the control panel Remap a Key to a Key Sequence Up to 16 keys may be specified for the key seq
24. Provide mechanical support for the cable by securing it to the vehicle structure at approximately one foot inter vals taking care not to over tighten and pinch conductors or penetrate outer cable jacket Connect the watertight connector end of the power cable to the Thor VM2 Quick Mount Smart Dock power connector by aligning the connector pins to the power connector push down on the watertight connector and twist it to fasten securely Secure the power cable to the Thor VM2 using the Strain Relief Cable Clamps page 4 32 Place Thor VM2 in the Dock page 4 18 If using the Screen Blanking page 4 49 feature install the screen blanking box or switch Press the Power Switch page 3 6 on the back of the Thor VM2 dock Press the Power Button page 3 6 on the front of the Thor VM2 to turn on the Thor VM2 Once installation is complete remember to start the Thor VM2 and select the desired Power Configuration Mode to enable Auto On Ignition Control or Manual Control of the Thor VM2 boot up process See the Power Configuration Mode page 5 80 control panel Ignition Control Wiring Diagram Ignition wire must be connected and the Ignition Control power mode must be selected via the Power Configuration Mode page 5 80 control panel When switched vehicle power is available the Thor VM2 igni tion signal wire can be connected less than 1mA over input voltage range to the switched circuit to allow the Thor VM2 to power on when the vehicle
25. Screen Ea LUMEN ee tag cert eege ee ege 3 15 Display Backlight ee e EE 3 15 Chapter 4 Vehicle Mounting and Accessory Installation tre e 9101110 EE 4 17 Prepare for Vehicle Mounting astucia dee a ao 4 17 UTC Sta doo as 4 17 Maintenance Vehicle Mounted Devices ccocccoooononccccccccnnnnnnnananencnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnane 4 18 e haa ie dee ac adbvetht xeaeena ENEE Eed ee 4 18 Place Thor VM2 Mine Do tati ao ia dia 4 18 Dock I O Pin Cove siii pd add 4 19 A eege ee gees 4 19 Laptop Security Cable scort reck 4 19 edel RAM Muere eege A a AA ARA 4 20 Components RAM Mounting Kits ooocoonooccccnococcccnonacccononncncncnnnancnnnnnrnn nn rca ncccn nana 4 20 Procedure RAM Mount Assembly ooocconinnoncccnnnnnnnncconncncnncnnnnnnannnnn cnn 4 22 Torque Measurement doc ct SNE eege 4 22 Step 1a Attach RAM Ball to Vehicle AEN 4 22 Step 1b Mount RAM Clamp to Vehicle ecccccceeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeteneeeeeesenaeeees 4 23 Step 1c Attach RAM Plate to Vehicle and Attach RAM Ball 0 ceeeeeeees 4 24 Step 2 Attach RAM Mount Ball to the Thor VM2 Quick Mount Smart Dock 4 25 Step 3 Attach Thor VM2 Assembly to RAM Mount 4 26 Step 4 Place the Thor VM2 into the Doch 4 26 Step 5 Attach Keyboard to Mounting Plate 4 27 Step 6 Attach Keyboard Assembly to Thor VM2 Assembly ooooooooccccccccccccconcccno 4 28 Install U Bracket Mount 4 29 Components U Bracket Mountin
26. The default is On enabled Wireless external scanners use their own power source COM2 Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Data Collection gt COM2 tab Data Collection Main com1 COM2 Data Options Processing About Baud Rate Data Bits Parity 115200 Os None 57600 O7 O odd V 38400 O Even 19200 Stop Bits O Mark 9600 O O Space 4800 Q 2400 Ve Power on pin 9 5v 1200 This panel sets communication parameters for any device connected to the external port Adjust the settings and click the OK button to save the changes Any changes take effect immediately This panel does not configure the connected device Please refer to the documentation for the external connected or wireless device for information on configuring the device Note COM default values are restored after a cold boot or operating system upgrade COM2 supports 5V switchable power on Pin 9 for tethered scanners Power on Pin 9 To configure the COM port to supply power to an external scanner tethered to the COM2 port check the checkbox for Power on Pin 9 5V The default is On enabled Wireless external scanners use their own power source Data Options Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Data Collection gt Data Options tab Bar code manipulation parameter settings on this tab are applied to the incoming data resulting from successful bar code scans sent to the Thor VM2 for proces
27. VM1052CABLE Thor VM2 Dongle cable provides USB type A connector e D9 connector connects to the USB port on the Thor VM2 dock e The USB type A client connector on cable connects to a USB port on a PC or laptop e The USB host connector on the dongle cable does not need to be connected USB Host Connector D9 Connector A i A zl mw ALI Se USB Client Connector Explore e From the ActiveSync Dialog on the Desktop PC tap the Explore button e From the Windows Mobile Device Center interface select File Management gt Browse the contents of your device This function allows you to explore the Thor VM2 from the PC side with some limitations You can copy files to or from the mobile device by drag and drop You will not be allowed to delete files or copy files out of the Windows folder on the mobile device Technically the only files you cannot delete or copy are ones marked as system files in the original build of the Win dows image This however includes most of the files in the Windows folder Backup Data Files using ActiveSync Use the following information to backup data files from the Thor VM2 to a desktop or laptop PC using the appropriate cable and Microsoft s ActiveSync Prerequisites A partnership between the mobile device and ActiveSync has been established e Adesktop or laptop PC with an available USB port and a mobile device with a USB port The deskt
28. adjusted x Explanation and or corrective action Level The taskbar is moved when switching into user mode This prevents them from LOG_ERROR being visible if the application is exited and restarted by the timer This error does not affect the screen mode switch processing continues In administration mode the taskbar should return to normal operation so Ap LOG_EX pLock s control of the taskbar should be removed AppLock could not remove its control of the taskbar This error does not affect LOG_ERROR AppLock processing AppLock could not remove the hook that allows monitoring of the application LOG_ERROR When the administrator leaves user mode the device is fully operational there LOG_EX fore AppLock must stop monitoring the locked application This message denotes that AppLock has readjusted the window size LOG_EX Processing the backdoor entry LOG_EX Return value from password dialog LOG_EX Length of decrypted password LOG_EX The window handle that is passed to the enumeration function This message LOG_EX can be used by engineering with other development tools to trouble shoot appli cation lock failures Output the window size after it has been adjusted by AppLock LOG_EX 10 12 Hat Encoding THT hal E a gt 0X13 XOFF DC3 nderscore 10 13 F ck wN t sai iual issi ira tri tri itri miDIDIDIDIO bo po Al eololpiplelg Sslolo j t
29. tique sup rieur aux normes impos es par Sant Canada pour la population Consultez le Code de s curit 6 sur le site Internet de Sant Canada l adresse suivante http www hc sc gc ca L nergie mise par les antennes reli es aux cartes sans fil respecte la limite d exposition aux radiofr quences telle que d finie par Industrie Canada dans la clause 4 1 du document CNR 102 version 4 COFETEL 1La operaci n de este equipo est sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones 1 es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y 2 este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia incluyendo la que pueda cau sar su operaci n no deseada ANATEL Brazil Este equipamento opera em car ter secund rio isto n o tem direito a protec o contra interfer ncia prejudicial mesmo de esta es do mesmo tipo e n o causar interfer ncia a sistema operando em car ter prim rio Vehicle Power Supply Connection Safety Statement WARNING For proper and safe installation the input power cable must be connected to a fused circuit on the vehicle If the supply connection is made directly to the battery the fuse should be installed in the positive lead within 5 inches of the battery s positive terminal The fused circuit requires a maximum time delay slow blow fuse with a current rating as noted below e For 12VDC input use a 10A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 12VD
30. use a 4A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 108VDC e For 120VDC input use a 4A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 120VDC e For 132VDC input use a 3A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 132VDC e For 144VDC input use a 3A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 144VDC Note For North America a UL Listed fuse is to be used Power Cable Identification The DC power cable included with the dock is one of the two styles below Power cable with right angle connector and 6 wires gt Wire Color Connection Red 2 wires DC 10 60 VDC Black 2 wires DC Twist the red and red white wires together and twist the Green Ground black and black white wires together before connecting to vehicle power Blue Ignition Input not used Power cable with straight connector and 4 wires __ 2 Wire Color Connection 57 Red DC 10 60 VDC Black DC Green Ground Blue Ignition Input not used Note Correct electrical polarity is required for safe and proper installation See Wiring Diagram page 4 42 for additional wire color coding specifics The Thor VM2 DC input wires Red Red White DC and Black Black White DC and the Blue ignition input wire are galvanically isolated The Green ground input is used for electrostatic discharge ESD protection Vehicle 50
31. 2 346 Scanned plain Fe Data Scan next barcode into Data field The remaining bar codes may be scanned in any order After a bar code is scanned that bar code is removed from the Remaining list and placed in the Scanned list Step 3 Process Completion After the last bar code is scanned the settings are automatically applied Configuring settings Please Wait Once configured the Thor VM2 is warmbooted Once connected to the wireless network and the Mobile Device Server any software updates and additional configuration data are downloaded Wireless Network Connections Summit Wireless Network Configuration The Summit client device is a Summit 802 1 1a b g radio capable of 802 11a 802 11b and 802 11g data rates The radio can be configured for no encryption WEP encryption or WPA security Security Options Supported are Important Notes A tis important that all dates are correct on the Thor VM2 and host computers when using any type of certificate Certifi AD cates are date sensitive and if the date is not correct authentication will fail SC It may be necessary to upgrade radio software in order to use certain Summit Client Utility SCU features Contact A Technical Assistance page 11 1 for details When using the 802 11a radio the U NII 1 band is the preferred band for indoor operation For regulatory domains in A which the U NII 3 band is allowed the following ch
32. AppLock must wait until the application has ini LOG_ERROR window tialized itself before proceeding The application did not start successfully and AppLock has timed out ToUser after admin not at The user mode switch is attempted when the device boots and after the admin LOG_EX boot istrator presses the hotkey The mode switch is being attempted after a hotkey press ToUser after admin app The switch to user mode is being made via a hotkey press and the administrator LOG_EX still open has left the application open and has not made any changes in the configuration ToUser after admin no app or cmd line change If user mode is being entered via a hotkey press the administrator may have left LOG_EX the configured application open If so AppLock does not launch the application again unless a new application or command line has been specified otherwise it just locks it Unable to move desktop The desktop is moved when switching into user mode This prevents them from LOG_ERROR being visible if the application is exited and restarted by the timer This error does not affect the screen mode switch processing continues 10 11 Message Unable to move taskbar Unhook taskbar wndproc failure Unhook wndproc failure Unhooking taskbar Unhooking wndproc WM_SIZE adjusted X after Ctrl L Ret from password lt gt Decrypt data len lt gt Window handle to enum windows X WM_WINDOWPOSCHG
33. Behavior Status Blue Blinking Slowly Bluetooth is paired but not connected to a device Blue Blinking Medium Bluetooth is paired and connected to a device Blue Blinking Fast Bluetooth is discovering Bluetooth devices Off Bluetooth hardware has been turned off The Bluetooth LED blinks once every 6 seconds when the Bluetooth client is paired but not connected It blinks once for a very short time every 2 seconds when paired and connected It blinks every second when in discovery The LED is off when the Bluetooth client is off Keyboard LEDs The keyboard LEDs are located near the specified key Blue LED LED Behavior Status Solid Blue e Indicates the Blue modifier key is active e Pressing the Blue key a second time exits this modifier mode and turns off the LED e Pressing the Orange key exits the Blue mode and turns off the Blue LED e f no key other key is pressed within five seconds the Blue key times out and turns off the LED e When Blue mode is active keys P1 through P4 provide volume and brightness adjustment functions Off Blue mode is not invoked Orange LED LED Behavior Status Solid Orange e Indicates the Orange modifier key is active Orange mode is invoked for the next keypress only e Pressing the Orange key a second time exits this modifier mode and turns off the LED e Pressing the Blue key exits the Orange mode and turns off the Orange LED Off Orange mode is not invoked Programmabl
34. Charging Temperature Range The internal temperature of the Thor VM2 is the trigger for UPS battery charging e The UPS battery is not charged when the internal Thor VM2 temperature is below 0 C 32 F This corresponds to an ambient room temperature of approximately 10 C 14 F e The UPS battery is not charged when the internal Thor VM2 temperature is above 45 C 113 F This corresponds to an ambient room temperature of approximately 35 C 95 F e Ifthe UPS battery cannot be charged due to a temperature extreme the UPS Status LED page 3 12 is amber Move the Thor VM2 to a different location to charge the UPS battery When the Thor VM2 is operated in an environment where the UPS battery is not able to charge due to temperature extremes the Thor VM2 should be removed to a location within the safe charging temperature range during off hours A discharged UPS battery cannot protect against data loss in the event vehicle power is interrupted Charging Timeout e A fully discharged UPS battery normally recharges in less than 4 hours when the Thor VM2 is in a powered dock and within the safe charging temperature range e If the UPS battery is not charged before an 8 hour or 4 hours for some earlier software revisions timeout period expires the UPS Status LED page 3 12 is amber e The charge timeout is reset if charging resumes upon application of external power e The charge timeout is reset if charging resumes when the Thor V
35. Filename Blank Title Blank Arguments Blank Order 1 Internet Disabled Global Key Ctrl Spc Global Delay 10 sec Input Panel Disabled Application Launch Options page 5 24 Auto at Boot Enabled Auto at Boot Retries 0 Auto at Boot Delay 10 sec Auto Re launch Enabled Auto Re launch Retries 0 Auto Re launch Delay 0 sec Manual Launch Disabled Allow Close Disabled Security page 5 26 Hotkey Activation key Shift Ctl A Password Blank Options page 5 27 Launch timeout 60000 Replace timeout Restart timeout Status page 5 27 Filename System applock txt View Level Log Level Setup a New Device Devices with the AppLock feature are shipped to boot in Administration mode with no default password thus when the Thor VM2 is first booted the user has full access to the device and no password prompt is displayed After the admin istrator specifies the applications to lock a password is assigned and the device is rebooted or the hotkey is pressed the device switches to end user mode Briefly the process to configure a new device is as follows 1 Connect an external power source to the device and press the Power button Adjust screen display audio volume and other parameters if desired Install accessories Tap Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Administration icon Assign applications on the Control single application or Application dual application tab screen Assign a password on th
36. Firmware Selection pull down list 2 If no firmware files are found an error message is displayed Contact Technical Assistance page 11 1 for infor mation 3 Tap the Update Firmware button 4 The update process may take a minute or so to complete The status of the Gobi 2000 radio is displayed in the lower left corner of this tab An error message is displayed in this location if the firmware selected requires a SIM card and no SIM card is installed in the Thor VM2 Connection status is at the top of this tab GPS Active When the GPS Active checkbox is checked the GPS is activated This is the default behavior e When GPS is active the WWAN radio cannot use antenna diversity and WWAN coverage may be reduced When GPS in inactive the WWAN radio can use antenna diversity for best WWAN coverage When GPS is in use or a WWAN connection is established this option is inactive grayed out and cannot be changed 1 Use the Stop button on the GPS tab to stop the GPS connection 2 Use the CDMA tab or the UMTS tab to disconnect the WWAN connection Once both GPS and WWAN are disconnected the checkbox is active CDMA Use the CDMA tab to activate the Thor VM2 for use with a CDMA carrier such as Verizon This step is not necessary for carriers using a SIM card The Serial Number IMEI International Mobile Equipment Identity and MEID Mobile Equipment ID numbers are dis played on this tab as the carrier may request this inf
37. For internal combustion engine powered vehicles e Red wire is connected to battery positive If there is a red wire and a red white wire twist them together and connect to battery positive e Black wire is connected to battery negative If there is a black wire and a black white wire twist them together and connect to battery negative e Green wire is connected to the vehicle chassis ground which can also be battery negative WARNING For proper and safe installation the input power cable must be connected to a fused circuit on the ve hicle If the supply connection is made directly to the battery the fuse should be installed in the positive lead within 5 inches of the battery s positive terminal The fused circuit requires a maximum time delay slow blow fuse with a current rating as noted below e For 12VDC input use a 10A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 12VDC e For 24VDC input use a 6A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 24VDC e For 36VDC input use a 4A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 36VDC e For 48VDC input use a 3A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 48VDC Note For North America a UL Listed fuse is to be used 60 144 VDC Vehicles 50 150 VDC Power Supply Screws on Side of Lid This option requires DC DC external power supply Honeywell Part no 9000313PWRSPLY Shown With Lid Attached Shown With Lid Removed e Lid is
38. If sharing errors occur while attempting to delete the Avalanche folder warm boot the Thor VM2 immediately delete the Avalanche folder and then perform another warm boot Stop the Enabler Service To stop the Enabler from monitoring for updates from the Mobility Center Console 1 Open the Enabler Settings Panels by tapping the Enabler icon on the Thor VM2 desktop Select File gt Settings Select the Preferences tab Select Do not monitor to prevent automatic monitoring upon Startup Select Exit Application for an immediate shutdown of all Enabler update functionality upon exiting the user interface Click the OK button to save the changes y oO A 2 O Reboot the Thor VM2 if necessary Update Monitoring Overview There are three methods by which the Enabler on the Thor VM2 can communicate with the Mobile Device Server running on the host machine e Wired via a serial cable between the Mobile Device Server PC and the Thor VM2 e Wired via a USB connection using ActiveSync between the Mobile Device Server PC and the Thor VM2 e Wirelessly via the Thor VM2 2 4GHz radio and an access point After installing the Enabler on the Thor VM2 the Enabler searches for a Mobile Device Server first by polling all available serial ports and then over the wireless network The Enabler running on the Thor VM2 will attempt to access COM1 COM2 and COM3 Agent not found will be reported if the Mobile Device Server is not located or a s
39. Mode ccccccceseseeeneceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeseeeseeeeeeeesesneeeeeeeeeeenenees 3 4 On Mode DO aici eden aparece mota 3 4 User Idle Backlight Off Mode Di 3 4 System Idle Display Off Mode 21 3 4 Suspend mode DS lenta ins doin sde 3 4 Shutdown Off Mode DA icons 3 4 Primary EE 3 5 Power Controls iia 3 6 Power WINE A RI A AA AS 3 6 Power BUON catastro rd 3 6 Power Configuration Mode resist 3 6 ExtemalCOANSCIOS eege 3 7 Serial Connector COM1 and COM 3 7 Screen BANG ege eg 3 7 USB CONNECTION e ged SEENEN is 3 7 ER ee ue 3 8 Power Supply Connector ceci da aa 3 8 Antenna Connections estanteria 3 9 External Antenna Conme Gtr coord 3 9 Internal 802 11 Antenna caia lic 3 9 External 802 11 Antenna score acetal ees Sas ae eevee acess EE 3 9 Vehicle Remote Antenna cccccccononccocononocinnnnnnnnnccnnnnnnn nan r rre 3 9 Keyboard Options tic es iecptnedecadecdiicpeenieherteadior E E r E elds 3 10 WITEQFALEG NEE 3 10 Keypad LEDS eeh teuer di id 3 10 A A DEE 3 10 Keyboard Backlund ic 3 10 USB e ENT 3 11 BEB EE see ee Ee ee geed ee 3 11 System LEDS at tet ead al canal ia 3 11 SYS System Status ED eege a 3 11 UPS Stat s UE KEE 3 12 SSD Solid State Drive RE 3 12 Connection LEDS lata ts a E a a R TA aat 3 13 WWAN LED EE 3 13 WEPTEED savia 3 13 EM e E LED A tieraem aaa 3 13 Keyboard RR RE 3 14 Eeer EE 3 14 Orange LED 3 14 Programmable LED oa dr 3 14 E a aaa 3 14 TOQUEN SC ratillo 3 14
40. Mount Note This mounting system is designed for use with a Thor VM2 without an external keyboard CAUTION This device is intended to transmit RF energy For protection against RF exposure to humans and in accor dance with FCC rules and Industry Canada rules this transmitter should be installed such that a minimum separation dis tance of at least 20 cm 7 8 in is maintained between the antenna and the general population This device is not to be co located with other transmitters Before installation begins verify you have the applicable vehicle mounting bracket assembly components necessary as shown in the following figures Components U Bracket Mounting Assembly The U bracket kit is available in two configurations e With a U Bracket included for new vehicle installations e Without a U Bracket for installing the Thor VM2 in place of a previous Honeywell vehicle mounted computer such as a VX6 or VX7 U Bracket only included in kits for new installations Ca Adapter Bracket includes screws flat washers and lock washers to attach Adapter Bracket to Thor VM2 and to attach Adapter Bracket to existing U Bracket for example to a vehicle where a VX1 VX2 VX4 VX5 VX6 or VX7 was previously installed Procedure U Bracket Assembly Equipment Needed Sockets and a Torque wrench capable of measuring to 50 inch pounds 5 64 56 N m Note Torquing tool is not supplied by Honeywell Torque Measu
41. Pin Signal Description 1 Not used PIN 6 Not used Not used Not used je Audio return Headset return Headset output ja Menn Microphone input j9 Mic return Microphone return Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Quick Connect Headset Connector Pin Microphone input Microphone return j Headset output Headset return Signal Description 10 6 CANbus Y Cable D15 Female Connector Description Not Used CAN_L CAN_L bus line dominant low PEEN 3 CAN_GND CAN ground GND Ground Not used Not used B Not used Not used Not used GND Optional ground CAN_SHLD CAN_H CAN_H bus line dominant high 15 CAN Vi CAN external power supply Po A 9 Pin J1939 Deutsch Connectors Description Receptacle Socket _ CAN Ground dives Female TER 2 Option CAN external Power Supply 3 CAN_H bus line dominant high 4 5 CAN_L CAN_L bus line dominant low Sean Se Not used Not used SI 10 7 AppLock Error Messages Any messages whose first word is an ing word is output prior to the action described in the message For example Switching to admin hotkey press is logged after the administrator has pressed the hotkey but prior to starting the switch process For all operations that can result in an error an Error level message is displayed when a failure occurs These messages con tain the word f
42. Radio SD Secure Digital Memory Card Slot UPS Battery Disconnect SSD Access Panel Door is labeled with Em Access Panel Door is labeled with and Backlights and Indicators Display Backlight There are several configuration options for the Thor VM2 display backlight Power Management The display backlight is controlled by power management When the user activity timer expires the display backlight is turned off Timeouts can be set for the available power management schemes See Power page 5 78 for configuration options Backlight Brightness The intensity of the display backlight can be manually configured 1 Press the Blue key to enter Blue mode 2 Press the P3 key to increase backlight brightness or the P4 key to decrease backlight brightness 3 Press the Blue key to exit Blue mode Refer to the Screen Control page 5 90 panel for the current display brightness level Screen Blanking The Thor VM2 can be configured to blank blackout the display while the vehicle is in motion Refer to the Screen Control page 5 90 panel for information Keypad Backlight By default the integrated keypad backlight follows the display backlight The integrated keypad backlight can be disabled To change this behavior see the Misc tab of the Options see page 5 74 control panel The external USB keyboard backlight is manually controlled Speaker Volume The speak
43. See External AC DC Power Supply 3 2 page 4 52 Uninterruptible Power Supply The Thor VM2 contains an internal UPS battery The UPS battery is automatically charged when the Thor VM2 is placed in a powered dock provided the safe charging tem perature conditions below are met When external power is removed the UPS automatically powers the Thor VM2 with no user intervention When running on UPS power the power management timeouts may be different than when vehicle power is applied The UPS allows the Thor VM2 to continue operation when not mounted in a dock or when the vehicle battery is being swapped When fully charged the UPS battery is designed to power the Thor VM2 for a minimum of 30 minutes at tem peratures of 20 C 4 F or greater If operating on UPS power and the UPS battery becomes critically low the Thor VM2 performs a controlled shutdown If there is no external power available there must be 10 or greater power in the UPS battery or the Thor VM2 does not power on The UPS status LED and the Battery Control Panel can be used to monitor the state of the UPS battery Safety requirements restrict the temperature at which the Li lon UPS battery can be charged Charging is disabled if the ambient temperature is outside of the 0 C to 35 C safe charging range In order to maintain UPS charge the Thor VM2 should have power applied while the unit is within the safe charging range for at least an hour each day Safe
44. Statistics Report fi hour s y O Retransmit After Server Contact The Data tab controls when data is transferred between the Thor VM2 and the Mobile Device Server Network When checked the LAN Wi Fi network is enabled to transfer statistics Report Specifies the Report Interval how frequently the Enabler reports statistics to the Mobile Device Server Retransmit After Specifies if the device sends statistics to the Mobile Device Server immediately following a con Server Contact nection to the server Restrict Band When enabled periodic updates from the Mobile Device Server are postponed until the Thor VM2 width to User Idle has been idle for the specified period of time The default is disabled Time Idle timeout Specify the length of time the device must be idle before a periodic update can run used when the parameter above is enabled Preferences Avalanche Update Settings ok E Preferences Display Taskbar Execution _4 gt Administration _ Keep settings unlocked For 10 min Application Startup monitor For Updat sl Shutdown Monitor for Updat y Activity Log Log Level Jo Activity Log y Display Level Basic Output y Administration By default Keep settings unlocked for 10 minutes is disabled checkbox is blank Application Startup Behavior of the Enabler when the Thor VM2 boots up The default is Monitor for Update
45. Thor VM2 during the pairing process 1 Open the Bluetooth EZPair Panel 2 Tap Discover Locate the Bluetooth printer in the Discovery panel 3 Tap and hold the stylus or double tap on the Bluetooth printer ID until the right mouse click menu appears 4 Select Pair as Printer to pair the Thor VM2 with the Bluetooth managed printer The devices are paired The Bluetooth managed printer may respond with a series of beeps or LED flashes Please refer to the Bluetooth managed printer manufacturer s User Guide it may be available on the manu facturer s web site Contact Technical Assistance page 11 1 for Bluetooth product assistance Note If there is no beep or no LED flash from the Bluetooth managed printer the Thor VM2 and the printer are currently paired Easy Pairing and Auto Reconnect The Bluetooth module can establish relationships with new devices after the user taps the Discover button It can auto reconnect to devices previously known but which have gone out of range and then returned within range See Reconnect page 5 33 Note Configuration elements are persistent and stored in the registry Setup the Bluetooth module to establish how the user is notified by easy pairing and auto reconnect events AppLock if installed does not stop the end user from using the Bluetooth application nor does it stop other Blue tooth enabled devices from pairing with the Thor VM2 while AppLock is in control Certifi
46. VM2 may boot when placed in the dock The behavior depends on the Power Configuration Mode selected See Ignition Control Mode page 5 80 and Auto On Mode page 5 81 e If the Thor VM2 is on and power is connected to the dock the Thor VM2 power management timers may change when the Thor VM2 is placed in the dock See Power page 5 78 When the Thor VM2 is removed from the dock the following may happen e If the Thor VM2 is on and power is connected to the dock the Thor VM2 power management timers may change when the Thor VM2 is placed in the dock See Power page 5 78 Dock I O Pin Cover The dock contains a tethered I O Pin Cover to protect the I O pins on the dock when a Thor VM2 is not mounted in the dock N e When the Thor VM2 is not installed in the dock use the I O Pin Cover to protect the pins on the dock as shown e When a Thor VM2 is installed in the dock the I O Pin Cover can be placed out of the way behind the dock Padlock It may be desirable to secure the Thor VM2 in the dock so it cannot be removed from the dock The quick release handle on the Thor VM2 is notched to allow a user supplied standard padlock to be placed through a d hole in the bracket on the back of the Thor VM2 in the location shown below Once the padlock is installed the release handle cannot be moved so the Thor VM2 cannot be removed from the dock The padlock shackle UI GER must be smaller than 3 16 4 76mm tE SES
47. be found on the Developer Portal Please Contact Technical Assistance page 11 1 for more information Thor VM2 Utilities The following files are pre loaded LAUNCH EXE Launch works in coordination with registry settings to allow drivers or applications to be loaded automatically into DRAM at system startup Registry settings control what gets launched see the App Note for information on these settings For examples you can look at the registry key HKEY LOCAL MACHINE Software LXE Persist Launch will execute CAB files BAT files or EXE files App Note All applications to be installed into persistent memory must be in the form of Windows CE CAB files These CAB files exist as separate files from the main installation image and are copied to the CE device using ActiveSync or using a Compact Flash ATA card The CAB files are copied from ATA or using ActiveSync Explore into the folder System which is the persistent storage virtual drive Then information is added to the registry if desired to make the CAB file auto launch at startup The registry information needed is under the key HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE Software LXE Persist as follows The main subkey is any text and is a description of the file Then four mandatory values are added FileName is the name of the CAB file with the path usually System Installed is a DWORD value of 0 which changes to 1 once auto launch installs the file FileCheck is the name of a fi
48. cable by aligning the connector pins to the power connector push down on the watertight connector and twist it to fasten securely The cable is rated for a maximum temperature of 105 C 221 F Therefore routing this cable it should be protected from physical damage and from surfaces that might exceed this temperature Cable should be pro tected from physical damage from moving parts Do not expose the cable to chemicals or oil that may cause the wiring insulation to deteriorate Always route the cable so that it does not interfere with safe operation and maintenance of the vehicle Provide mechanical support for the cable by securing it to the vehicle structure at approximately one foot inter vals taking care not to over tighten and pinch conductors or penetrate outer cable jacket Connect the watertight connector end of the power cable to the Thor VM2 Quick Mount Smart Dock power connector by aligning the connector pins to the power connector push down on the watertight connector and twist it to fasten securely Secure the power cable to the Thor VM2 using the Strain Relief Cable Clamps page 4 32 Place Thor VM2 in the Dock page 4 18 If using the Screen Blanking page 4 49 feature install the screen blanking box or switch Press the Power Switch page 3 6 on the back of the Thor VM2 dock Press the Power Button page 3 6 on the front of the Thor VM2 to turn on the Thor VM2 Thor VX8 Thor VX9 Adapter Cable An adapter cab
49. cable is routed so it is not damaged by any moving parts of the vehicle Apply Touch Screen Protective Film The optional Thor VM2 touch screen protective film is shipped in packs of 10 The protective film is flexible and treated with an anti glare coating on the outer surface The protective film is slightly larger than the Thor VM2 touch screen however the notches on the edge of the protective film indicated by the arrows correspond to the display size of the Thor VM2 The protective film is not adhesive The corner edges are designed to fit between the Thor VM2 display and the display housing to hold the protective film in place A protective backing is applied to the rear surface of the protective film A gt pull tab is attached to the protective backing for easy removal of the pro tective backing from the film I Pull Tab Installation 1 Make sure the touch screen is clean and dry before installation See Cleaning page 4 18 for instructions on suitable cleaning agents 2 Pull the release tab to separate the protective backing from the rear of the protective film Avoid touching the rear side of the protective film while removing the liner 3 Place the rear side of the protective film against the Thor VM2 display roughly centering the protective film over the display 4 Slide the protective film until one corner can be slid back between the touch screen and the display housing as the protective
50. certified ITE power supply with output rated 10 60 VDC minimum 15W The external power supply may be connected to either a 120V 60Hz supply or outside North America to a 230V 50Hz supply using the appropriate detachable cordset In all cases connect to a properly grounded source of supply provided with maximum 15 Amp overcurrent protection 10 Amp for 230V circuits AC Input Cable US only DC Output Cable va To DC Output Cable To Dock Connect External Power Supply 1 Connect the provided detachable cordset US only all others must order cable separately to the external power supply IEC 320 connector 2 Plug cordset into appropriate grounded electrical supply receptacle AC mains 3 Connect the DC Output Cable end to the corresponding connector on the Adapter Cable 4 Connect the watertight connector end of the Adapter Cable to the Thor VM2 Quick Mount Smart Dock Power Connector by aligning the connector pins to the power connector push down on the watertight connector and twist it to fasten securely 5 Press the Power Switch page 3 6 on the back of the Thor VM2 dock 6 Press the Power Button page 3 6 on the front of the Thor VM2 to turn on the Thor VM2 Connect USB Keyboard The external keyboard part number 164288 0001 is a USB keyboard The keyboard has a D9 connector which attaches to the USB port on the Thor VM2 Q
51. default This option assigns Bluetooth printer connection to COM7 instead of COM19 To en able this option Filtered Mode must be enabled This option is Disabled by default When logging is enabled the Thor VM2 creates bt_log txt and stores it in the Sys tem folder Bluetooth activity logging is added to the text file as activity progresses A bt_log_bak txt file contains the data stored by bt_log txt prior to reboot During a reboot process the Thor VM2 renames bt_log txt to bt_log_bak txt Ifa file already exists with that name the existing file is deleted the new bt_log_bak txt file is added and a new bt_log txt is created Default Computer System Name System Panel gt Device Name tab The name or identifier entered in this space by the System Administrator is used ex clusively by Bluetooth devices and during Bluetooth communication Reconnect V Report when connection lost Report when reconnected M Report Failure to reconnect 7 Clear Pairing Table on Boot Y Auto Reconnect on Boot V Auto Reconnect Bluetooth Devices Settings Reconnect about Note These options can still be checked or unchecked whether Bluetooth connection is enabled or disabled Options Option Report when connection lost Report when reconnected Function This option is Enabled checked by default There may be an audio or visual signal when a connection between a paired active device is lost A
52. delay is specified in seconds Valid values are between 0 no delay and 99 seconds AppLock must also be configured to automatically re launch an application To AppLock application ter mination by the end user is indistinguishable from application termination for any other reason Manual Launch Default is Disabled Enabling this option allows the end user to launch the specified application s Upon bootup completion an application with Manual enabled is listed on the Switchpad accompanied by a check mark that indicates the application is currently active or available for Launching When an application name is tapped by the end user the application is launched if inactive and brought to the foreground Applications set up with Manual Launch enabled may or may not be launched at bootup This function is based on the application s Auto At Boot setting The applications have been listed as approved applications for end user manual launch using the Switchpad menu structure The approved applications are listed on the Switchpad A checkmark indicates the applications active status When Manual Launch is disabled for an application and Allow Close is enabled for the application when the end user closes the specific application it is no longer available shown on the Switchpad When Auto At Boot and Manual Launch are both disabled for a specific application the application is 1 not placed on the list of approved applications for en
53. do not pair successfully go to the next step 3 Open the Bluetooth page 5 29 EZ Pair panel 4 Tap Discover Locate the Bluetooth scanner in the Discovery panel 5 Double tap the stylus on the Bluetooth scanner The right mouse click menu appears 6 Select Pair as Scanner to pair the Thor VM2 with the Bluetooth mobile scanner The devices are paired The Bluetooth bar code reader responds with a series of beeps and an LED flashes See Bluetooth Beep and LED Indications page 5 38 Note After scanning the Thor VM2 Bluetooth label if there is no beep and no LED flash from the Bluetooth device the devices are currently paired Thor VM2 without Label If the Thor VM2 Bluetooth address bar code label does not exist follow these steps to create a unique Blue tooth address bar code for the Thor VM2 First locate the Thor VM2 Bluetooth on the About tab of the Bluetooth page 5 29 control panel Bluetooth Devices Settings Reconnect About Jee Friendly Name E Bluetooth Address b0 40 FD 02 03 04 BTC version 1 0 BTDRPX861Kp Bluetooth Stack Revision 2 1 Bluetooth Radio HCI 4 4839 Bluetooth Radio LMP 4 4839 Copyright 2006 2012 Honeywell Next create a Bluetooth address bar code label for the Thor VM2 The format for the bar code label is as follows e Bar code type must be Code 128 e FNC8 character followed by string Uppercase L lowercase n lowercase k uppercase B and then the Bluetooth addres
54. end user AppLock is password protected by the Administrator End user mode locks the end user into the configured application or applications The end user can still reboot the mobile device and respond to dialog boxes The administrator specified applications are automatically launched in the specified order and run in full screen mode when the device boots up When the mobile device is reset to factory default values for example after a cold reset the Administrator may need to reconfigure the AppLock parameters The assumption in this section is that the first user to power up a new mobile device is the system administrator Note AppLock Administrator Control panel file Launch option does not inter relate with similarly named options contained in other Thor VM2 Control Panels Note A few applications do not follow normal procedures when closing AppLock cannot prevent this type of application from closing but is notified that the application has closed For these applications AppLock immediately restarts the application see Auto Re Launch which causes the screen to flicker If this type of application is being locked the administrator should close all other applications before switching to end user mode to minimize the screen flicker AppLock is updated periodically as new options become available Contact Technical Assistance page 11 1 for update availability Factory Default Settings AppLock Application page 5 23
55. film is re centered on the display It may be necessary to press the edges of the protective film against the display to ensure the entire edge slides under the display housing It is easiest to start with one of the bottom corners 5 Slide the protective film away from the other bottom corner The film may bulge sligthly away from the Reference Guide as it is being slid Only slide the protective film enough so that the protective film can slide under the display housing on that corner when the protective film is returned to center 6 Repeat with each of the top corners sliding the protective film away from the corner just enough that the protective film can slide under the display housing when the protective film is returned to center 7 It may be necessary to flex the protective film during the install however use care not to flex the protective film so much that the protective film kinks 8 Once all corners are secure under the display housing adjust the protective film if necessary so it is centered on the touch screen Removal 1 To remove the protective film slide the protective film in one direction until the edge clears 2 Lift up on the edge of the protective film so it does not slide between the touch screen and display housing when the protective film is slid back to the center 3 Repeat until all edges are free and remove the protective film Disconnect UPS Battery A CAUTION The UPS battery must be disconnected befo
56. folder When VersionInfo EXE is opened a dialog box is presented to the Thor VM2 user displaying e Remote Management Utility RMU version e Wireless Configuration Application WCA version VersionInfo displays the version for each utility only after that utility has been executed at least once User Interface The Enabler can be configured and controlled manually through the user interface on the Thor VM2 This section details the functionality that can be controlled by the user or system administrator Screen displays shown in this section are designed to present the end user with information graphically Placement of information on the screen displays may be split between one or many tabbed panels Standard Avalanche Enabler parameters that are not supported by Honeywell may be missing or dimmed visible but unable to be edited on the tabbed panels or screen displays Enabler Configuration Depending on the version of the Enabler running on the Thor VM2 the desktop Enabler icon may look like one of the following N The available configuration options and tabs may vary by Enabler version The examples shown in this section assume the lat est version of the Enabler is installed on the Thor VM2 The Enabler user interface application is launched by clicking either the Enabler icon on the desktop or Taskbar or by selecting Avalanche Enabler from the Programs menu The opening screen presents the Thor VM2 user with the connection s
57. i I The Thor VM2 uses an optional rugged QWERTY 95 key keyboard designed for ease of use with the Windows CE operat ing system The USB keyboard connects directly to the D9 USB connector on the Thor VM2 Quick Mount Smart Dock e The 95 key keyboard supports all 104 keyboard functions 101 standard keyboard plus Windows keys and includes an integrated pointing device and left and right mouse buttons However because the keyboard only has 95 keys all functions are not visible or printed on the keyboard Therefore the keyboard supports what is called hidden keys keys that are accessible but not visible on the keyboard e The 95 key keyboard keys are backlit The keyboard backlight is manually controlled Keyboard Backlight The keyboard backlight key in the top right hand corner has a light bulb icon The keyboard keys are backlit The keyboard backlight is manually controlled using the backlight key in the upper right hand corner of the keyboard Pressing the backlight key cycles the keyboard backlight through the levels of backlight intensity Off Low intensity Medium intensity Maximum intensity Off etc When the Thor VM2 is powered on the key board backlight defaults to Off Since the keyboard is a USB device by default the external keyboard backlight is turned off when the Thor VM2 enters Suspend This behavior can be changed by enabling USB power in Suspend on th
58. its authorized service center within the Warranty Period and HII determines to its satisfaction that the product is defective due to defects in materials or workmanship HII at its sole option will either repair or replace the product without charge except for return shipping to HII EXCEPT AS MAY BE OTHERWISE PROVIDED BY APPLICABLE LAW THE FOREGOING WARRANTY IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER COVENANTS OR WARRANTIES EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED ORAL OR WRITTEN INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON INFRINGEMENT HIPS RESPONSIBILITY AND PURCHASER S EXCLUSIVE REMEDY UNDER THIS WARRANTY IS LIMITED TO THE REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF THE DEFECTIVE PRODUCT WITH NEW OR REFURBISHED PARTS IN NO EVENT SHALL HII BE LIABLE FOR INDIRECT INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES AND IN NO EVENT SHALL ANY LIABILITY OF HII ARISING IN CONNECTION WITH ANY PRODUCT SOLD HEREUNDER WHETHER SUCH LIABILITY ARISES FROM A CLAIM BASED ON CONTRACT WARRANTY TORT OR OTHERWISE EXCEED THE ACTUAL AMOUNT PAID TO HII FOR THE PRODUCT THESE LIMITATIONS ON LIABILITY SHALL REMAIN IN FULL FORCE AND EFFECT EVEN WHEN HII MAY HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH INJURIES LOSSES OR DAMAGES SOME STATES PROVINCES OR COUNTRIES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATIONS OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSE QUENTIAL DAMAGES SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU 11 1 All provisions of this Limited
59. mounts Mobility of the Thor VM2 since the dock remains attached to the vehicle the Thor VM2 computer can easily be moved from one vehicle equipped with a dock to another External antenna connectors may be present on the back of the Thor VM2 The connectors may include 802 11 antenna connectors used when the Thor VM2 is not equipped with internal antennas External GPS antenna connector when the Thor VM2 is equipped with GPS External WWAN antenna connectors when the Thor VM2 is equipped with WWAN Optional WWAN radio available in North America Europe New Zealand and Australia only Components Front View Microphone U V Power Button ss urs so o o o 0 P Ke Owes COs e Speakers Back View with Quick Mount Smart Dock Antenna Connectors Strain Relief Clamps RAM Ball SD Card SIM Card Access Access Panel Panel Fuse COM1 Connector Power Connector COM2 Connector Power USB Connector Switch Provision for gt CANbus Audio Laptop Security Connector Cable Provision for Padlock Quick Release Handle Access Panels SD Card Access Panel with door removed SIM Card Access Panel with door removed CompactFlash A IN Hard Drive SIM Card Slot for WWAN
60. not available for trucks over 6OVDC Wiring Diagram Existing Circuitry on Vehicle Quick Mount Smart Dock Forklift Battery Main Switch Vo Vo User supplied serial k i gt Seon Henna COM1 or COM2 Fuse See connection Connector see below Warning statement below Ze See Caution statement below Red White if present Red Black White if present Power Black Connector Green DC DC Blue Power not connected Supply CAUTION A For battery powered vehicles must be connected to the vehicle chassis ground For internal combustion engine powered vehicles is connected to the vehicle chassis ground which can also be battery negative WARNING A For proper and safe installation the input power cable must be connected to a fused circuit on the vehicle If the supply connection is made directly to the battery the fuse should be installed in the positive lead within 5 inches of the battery s positive terminal The fused circuit requires a maximum time delay slow blow fuse with a current rating as noted below For 60VDC input use a 6A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 60VDC For 72VDC input use a 6A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 72VDC For 96VDC input use a 4A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage ratin
61. of Auto Reconnect on Boot is ignored and the option is automatically disabled unchecked and dimmed Bluetooth Devices Settings Reconnect About Es Friendly Name Bluetooth Address foo 40 FD 02 03 04 BTC version 1 0 BTDRPX861Kp Bluetooth Stack Revision 2 1 Bluetooth Radio HCI 4 4839 Bluetooth Radio LMP 4 4839 Copyright 2006 2012 Honeywell This panel lists the assigned Computer Friendly Name that other devices may discover during their Discovery and Query process the Bluetooth MAC address and software version levels The data cannot be edited by the user Using Bluetooth Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Bluetooth or Bluetooth icon in taskbar or Bluetooth icon on desktop The Thor VM2 default Bluetooth setting is Enabled The Thor VM2 Bluetooth module is designed to Discover and pair with nearby Bluetooth devices Prerequisite The Bluetooth devices have been setup to allow them to be Discovered and Connected Paired The System Administrator is familiar with the pairing function of the Bluetooth devices Bluetooth Devices Display Before Discovering Devices ae Note When Filtered Mode is enabled only Bluetooth printers or Bluetooth scanners imagers are recognized and displayed in the Bluetooth panel All other Bluetooth devices are ignored Initial Configuration 1 Select Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Bluetooth or
62. of the Access Point assigned to this profile 2 Set EAP Type to None 3 Set Encryption to WEP or Manual WEP depending on SCU version 4 Set Auth Type to Open Summit Client Utility ol x Main Profile status Diags Global Profle Default y New Rename Delete Scan E Radio Encryption EAP type Japa manual WEP z None z WEP keys PSKs Credentials Save Changes Commit Enter 10 or 26 Hex digits A F 0 9 OR enter 5 or 13 ASCII characters Tx Key oi CO y M O4 Cal cen Valid keys are 10 hexadecimal or 5 ASCII characters for 40 bit encryption or 26 hexadecimal or 13 ASCII characters for 128 bit encryption Enter the key s and click OK Once configured click the Commit button Ensure the correct Active Profile is selected on the Main tab and warmboot The SCU Main tab shows the device is asso ciated after the radio connects to the network LEAP To use LEAP without WPA also known as WEP_LEAP make sure the following profile options are used 1 Enter the SSID of the Access Point assigned to this profile Set EAP Type to LEAP Set Encryption to WEP EAP or Auto WEP depending on SCU version Set Auth Type as follows If the Cisco CCX certified AP is configured for open authentication set the Auth Type radio parameter to Open If the AP is configured to use shared key or passphrase set the Auth Type radio parameter to Shared NO pm F
63. of the negative wires black and black white twisted together or a single black wire to the output See Power Cable Identification page 4 44 Note The input and output blocks each have two plus two minus and two ground connectors Either connector in the block can be used to connect the matching polarity wire 6 Route the wiring from the DC DC power supply to the vehicle s electrical system Do not connect to vehicle power at this time 7 Strip the wire ends and connect to the input side of the DC DC power supply 8 Use looms and wire ties to secure all wiring as shown 9 Reattach the cover with the screws 10 Connect the DC DC power supply to the vehicle s electrical system as directed below For battery powered vehicles A is connected to battery positive must be connected to battery negative must be connected to the vehicle chassis ground For internal combustion engine powered vehicles is connected to battery positive is connected to battery negative is connected to the vehicle chassis ground which can also be battery negative 11 While observing the Fuse Requirements see page 4 43 connect the power cable as close as possible to the actual battery terminals of the vehicle When available always connect to unswitched terminals in the vehicle fuse panel after providing proper fusing ATTENTION For uninterrupted power electrical supply connections should not be made at any
64. paper towels or harsh chemical based cleaning fluids since they may result in damage to the Thor VM2 surfaces cables connectors and mounting hardware Use a clean soft cloth to wipe any dirt moisture or grease from the Thor VM2 connectors cables or the vehicle mounting hard ware Do not use any liquid to clean the Thor VM2 or connectors Spray or dampen the cleaning cloth with the cleaning liquid If possible clean only those areas which are soiled Lint particulates can be removed with clean filtered canned air Place Thor VM2 in the Dock Back of Thor VM2 Front of Quick Mount Smart Dock 0009 e Upper Lip on Dock e OU e Notch on Thor VM2 o o O Lower Lip on Dock Release Lever 1 Locate the notch on the upper rear of the Thor VM2 2 Slide this notch over the top lip of the dock Slide the Thor VM2 from side to side on the dock to make sure it fully engages on the lip of the dock If the Thor VM2 cannot be slid side to side the lip is engaged 3 Pull the quick release lever on the Thor VM2 down and push the Thor VM2 against the dock 4 Release the quick release lever The quick release lever catches the lower lip on the dock and secures the Thor VM2 to the dock 5 If necessary adjust the viewing angle of the Thor VM2 When the Thor VM2 is placed in the dock the following may happen e If the Thor VM2 is off and power is connected to the dock the Thor
65. power on checkbox e The screensaver password is not automatically enabled when the power on checkbox is enabled Enter the password in the Password text box then press Tab and type the password again to confirm it Enable the power on checkbox and if desired the screensaver checkbox A changed saved password is in effect immediately PC Connection Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt PC Connection Use these options to control a cabled connection USB serial between the Thor VM2 and a nearby desktop laptop com puter Factory Default Settings Enable direct connection Enabled Connect using USB Client PC Connection Properties PC Connection to These settings control the connection between your Windows el CE device and desktop computer Warning Adjusting these settings may result in an inability to connect with your desktop computer M Allow connection with desktop computer when device is attached Connect using USB Client Tap the Change button to change the direct connect setting Tap the drop down box to view a list of pre configured connection settings Power Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Power The Thor VM2 power mode timers are cumulative The System Idle timer begins the countdown after the User Idle timer has expired and the Suspend timer begins the count down after the System Idle timer has expired When the User Idle timer is set to Ne
66. seconds when operating on the internal UPS battery Gobi Connection Manager Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Gobi Connection Manager or Tap the Gobi Connection Manager Desktop Icon or Tap the Gobi Connection Manager icon in the system tray or Tap Start gt Programs gt GobiCM gt GobiCMExe Set parameters for optional internal WWAN module Home page 5 60 View connection status and select firmware CDMA page 5 61 UTMS page 5 62 GPS page 5 63 Admin page 5 64 About page 5 65 View information on the WWAN card Use this tab to activate a CDMA carrier such as Verizon Use this tab to test and save connection parameters View GPS statistics Enter PIN or PUK for SIM card The Gobi Connection Manager tray icon indicates the status of the connection in dark blue bars If you hover the mouse pointer over the Connection Manager Taskbar icon the current signal level and radio interface are displayed Note The similar Summit Wi Fi icon in the task bar uses red yellow and green bars al There is no WWAN connection present 105 dbm to 86 dbm signal strength 85 dbm to 66 dbm signal strength 65 dbm to 46 dbm signal strength ill 45 dbm or higher signal strength A Initial Use Some carriers such as AT amp T and T Mobile require a SIM card for use on their networks Other carriers such as Verizon use a CDMA network and must be activated Please refer to the sections below for m
67. secured with screws on the side of lid e Input and output connector blocks under lid One positive Vin negative Vin and ground 77 connection in input block e One positive Vo and negative Vo connection in output block If the DC DC power supply does not have screws in the side of the lid see 60 144 VDC Vehicles 50 150 VDC Power Supply Screws on Top of Lid page 4 43 A CAUTION For installation by trained service personnel only CAUTION Usage in areas where moisture can affect the power supply connections should be avoided The power supply should be mounted in a dry location within the vehicle or placed in a suitable protective enclosure A Use caution when routing the power cable See Power Cable Cautions page 4 33 Fuse Requirements A WARNING For proper and safe installation the input power cable must be connected to a fused circuit on the vehicle If the supply connection is made directly to the battery the fuse should be installed in the positive lead within 5 inches of the battery s positive terminal The fused circuit requires a maximum time delay slow blow fuse with a current rating as noted below For 60VDC input use a 6A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 60VDC e For 72VDC input use a 6A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 72VDC For 96VDC input use a 4A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 96VDC e For 108VDC input
68. shipped with the bar code reader e Wireless hand held Bluetooth scanners are configured by scanning the engine specific bar codes in the scanner manufacturer s programming guide The manufacturer s guides are usually shipped with the bar code reader e The body worn Bluetooth Ring Scanner module may be using a Symbol 4400 Ring Imager or a Symbol 955 Ring Scanner The BTRS module is configured by scanning the bar codes in the Bluetooth Ring Scanner Guide 5 39 By default the Thor VM2 is pre configured for a tethered scanner attached to the COM1 port e Power on Pin 9 page 5 43 is enabled e The Data Collection control panel Main page 5 42 tab is configured for COM1 on Device 2 Return to Factory Default Settings After scanning the engine specific bar code to return the scanner imager to factory default settings the next step is to open the bar code wedge panel on the mobile device collecting the scanned data Click the OK button to close the panel This action will synchronize all scanner formats for your device Data Processing Overview Bar code data processing involves several steps Some steps may be skipped during the processing depending on user selections on the Data Options control panels The steps are presented below in the order they are performed on the scanned data 1 Scanned data is tested for a code ID and length Min Max If it matches it is processed per the rules in place for that symbology If the scan does no
69. tab e View radio status software versions and regulatory domain on the Main tab e Access additional troubleshooting features on the Diags tab After Admin Login the end user can also e Create edit rename and delete profiles on the Profile tab Edit global parameters on the Global tab e Enable disable the Summit tray icon in the taskbar Profile Start gt Programs gt Summit gt Profile tab Note Tap the Commit button to save changes before leaving this panel or the SCU If the panel is exited before tapping the Commit button changes are not saved Factory Default Settings Profile Default SSID Blank Client Name Blank Power Save CAM Tx Power Maximum Bit Rate Auto Radio Mode BGA rates full Auth Type Open EAP Type None Encryption None Summit Client Utility E OK D Main Profle status Diags Globa Profile Default y New Rename Delete Scan Ed io Encryption EAP type far None v none WEP keys Psks c d Save Changes Commit Credentials When logged in as an Admin use the Profile tab to manage profiles When not logged in as an Admin the parameters can be viewed and cannot be changed The buttons on this tab are dimmed if the user is not logged in as Admin Buttons Button Function Commit Saves the profile settings made on this screen Settings are saved in the profile Credentials Allows entry of a username and
70. the Thor VM2 The requesting Bluetooth device does not need to have been Discovered by the Thor VM2 before the pairing request is received Tap the Accept button or the Decline button to remove the dialog box from the screen Note In some cases if a Bluetooth device is already paired this setting cannot be changed If this is the case an error message Is displayed and the option is not changed The Bluetooth device must be disconnected before changing this setting Option Continuous Search Filtered Mode Printer Port COM7 Logging Computer Friendly Name Function This option is Disabled by default When enabled the Bluetooth connection never stops searching for a device it has paired with when the connection is broken such as the paired device entering Sus pend mode going out of range or being turned off When disabled after being en abled the Thor VM2 stops searching after 30 minutes This option draws power from the Main Battery This option is Enabled by default Determines whether the Bluetooth client discovers and displays all serial Bluetooth devices in the vicinity Filtered Mode is disabled unchecked or the discovery result displays Bluetooth scanners and printers only Filtered Mode is enabled checked When Filtered Mode is disabled the Thor VM2 can pair with up to four Bluetooth de vices A Warmboot is required every time Filtered Mode is toggled on and off This option is Disabled by
71. the dock into the RAM arm and tighten the knob on the RAM arm using the supplied RAM wrench AM Mo CEEA q i Dij e B Co 1 H 0 0 Step 4 Place the Thor VM2 into the Dock If the Thor VM2 is not already mounted to the dock Place Thor VM2 in the Dock page 4 18 If the optional external keyboard is not used the mounting process is complete Step 5 Attach Keyboard to Mounting Plate Note This step is only for a Thor VM2 with the optional external keyboard If using the optional integrated keyboard mount attach the keyboard to keyboard mounting plate using four 8 screws flat washers and lock washers Note Excess keyboard cable length can be looped around the hooks on the bottom of the keyboard mounting plate Step 6 Attach Keyboard Assembly to Thor VM2 Assembly Note This step is only for a Thor VM2 with the optional external keyboard 1 Slip the Size C RAM arm over the ball on the Thor VM2 Keyboard Bracket 2 Slip the ball on the Keyboard Mounting Plate into the other end of the Size C RAM arm 3 Tighten the knob on the RAM arm using the supplied RAM wrench L ie oc 0 8 Ip a 8 a O 6 6 ay Ss Ss D Note Some components omitted for detail clarity Install U Bracket
72. the input language to gt a use when vu start wor device Engish United States US y Installed Input Languages Select input languages you plan to use Registry Registry 2 for x Load User Defaults Save User Defaults Load Factory Defaults Warmboot Restart Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Registry Choose options for managing the registry and rebooting the Thor VM2 Button Load User Defaults Save User Defaults Load Factory De faults Warmboot Restart Action When clicked a standard load file dialog is opened to allow the user to pick a Registry Save RSG file The applet then copies the specified User registry file to the Active registry The user is asked to verify a reboot and then the applet does a warmboot to activate the new registry When clicked a standard Save File dialog is opened to allow the user to name the Registry Save RSG file The applet then copies the Active registry to the specified User registry file and reboots the device The applet copies the Factory Default registry from the OS to the Active registry by deleting the cur rent registry The user is asked to verify a reboot and then the applet performs a restart to activate the factory default registry If a user password has been set the applet warns the user that the pass word will be erased and asks them to enter it before the reboot is allowe
73. to save those changes before making any additional changes to the profile or global parameters Verify the device is authenticated by reviewing the Status tab When the device is property configured the Status tab indicates the device is Authenticated and the method used Note See Configuring the Profile page 8 17 for more details Note Ifinvalid credentials are entered into the stored credentials the authentication will fail No error message is displayed The user may or may not be prompted to enter valid credentials To Use Sign On Screen 1 After completing the other entries in the profile click on the Credentials button Leave the Username and Password blank No entries are necessary on the Credentials screen for LEAP or LEAP WPA For PEAP MSCHAP and PEAP GTC importing the CA certificate into the Windows certificate store is optional For EAP TLS import the CA certificate into the Windows certificate store Also import the User Certificate into the Windows certificate store Access the Credentials screen again Make sure the Validate server and Use MS store checkboxes are checked The default is to use the entire certificate store for the CA certificate Alternatively use the Browse button next to the CA Cert CA Certificate Filename on the Credentials screen to select an individual certificate For EAP TLS also enter the User Cert User Certificate filename on the credentials screen by using the Browse button C
74. user programmable When used with no modifier key P1 through P5 can be configured for a user programmable function e When used with the Orange modifier key P1 through P5 provide secondary programmable keys P6 through P10 and can be configured for a user programmable function e The programmable keys can be remapped to provide a single keypress a string of keypresses or to execute an application or command Key remapping is configured via the Programmable Key page 5 83 option in the Control Panel e Programmable keys persist across a warmboot or power cycle When used with the Blue modifier key P1 through P4 keys are used to adjust speaker volume and display brightness The Thor VM2 integrated keypad is backlit e By default the integrated keypad backlight follows the display backlight When the display backlight is on the integrated keypad backlight is on e Ifthe display backlight brightness is increased or decreased the integrated keypad backlight brightness is increased or decreased e The integrated keypad backlight and the display share the same timer which is configured in the Power page 5 78 control panel e The integrated keypad backlight can be disabled via the Misc tab of the Options page 5 74 control panel Keypad LEDs See Keyboard LEDs page 3 14 for details 95 Key USB Keyboard EE KE a aa alo DUUH sl P SOWO UU U U E ENS EME A EJOJONO0ONNONOE_ JIVE j 000 OMe I I
75. visual signal may be a dialog box placed on the display notifying the user the con nection between one or all of the paired Bluetooth devices has stopped Tap the ok button to remove the dialog box from the screen This option is Disabled unchecked by default There may be an audio or visual signal when a connection between a paired active device is made A visual signal may be a dialog box placed on the display notifying the user the con nection between one or all of the paired Bluetooth devices has resumed Tap the ok button to remove the dialog box from the screen Option Function Report failure to recon This option is Enabled checked by default nect The default time delay is 30 minutes This value cannot be changed by the user There may be an audio or visual signal when a connection between a paired active device fails to re connect A visual signal may be a dialog box placed on the display notifying the user the connection between one or all of the previously paired Blue tooth devices has failed Tap the X button or ok button to close the dialog box Possible reasons for failure to reconnect Timeout expired without reconnecting at tempted to pair with a device that is currently paired with another device attempted to pair with a known device that moved out of range or was turned off attempted to pair with a known device but the reason why reconnect failed is unknown Clear Pairing Table on This option i
76. wait before starting to run after reboot Note Delay Global may not be available in all versions of AppLock You can simulate a Global Delay function by setting a delay for the first application lowest Order launched and setting the delay to O for all other applications See Boot Options Default is Disabled Enable check to show the Keyboard option on the Switchpad menu When en abled the input panel cannot be enabled or disabled for each individual application and is available to the user for all configured applications Tap the ton to clear all currently displayed Filename or Application information The Global settings are not cleared Use the left and right scroll buttons to move from application setup screen to application setup screen The left and right buttons update the information on the screen with the previous or next configured application respectively Application Launch Options Tap the Launch button to access the application launch options This panel displays the Launch options panel for the Filename selected on the Administration panel Application Launch Options Launch V Auto At Boot Retries jo Delay fro V Auto Re launch Retries fo Delay fo _ Manual IT allow Close Note Launch order is determined by the Order specified in the Application tab The Order value does not have to be sequential Auto At Boot Default is Enabled Auto At Boot When enabled automati
77. with Avalanche on Demand Adapters page 7 12 Enable or disable network and wireless settings Select an adapter and switch between the Avalanche Network Profile and manual settings Status page 7 14 View the current adapter signal strength and quality IP address MAC address SSID BSSID and Link speed The user cannot edit this information Connection Avalanche Update Settings OK Ba Connection Server Contact Data Prefer Avalanche Server Address _ Check serial connection IT Disable ActiveSync _ Restrict Adapter Link Speed Min Link Speed i0000 kb Avalanche Server Enter the IP Address or host name of the Mobile Device Server assigned to the Thor VM2 Address Check Serial Con Indicates whether the Enabler should first check for serial port connection to the Mobile Device nection Server before checking for a wireless connection to the Mobile Device Server Disable ActiveSync Disable ActiveSync connection with the Mobile Device Server Restrict Adapter Default is disabled Minimum Link Speed dimmed When enabled the Enabler only allows a Link Speed connection to the server if the detected link speed is greater than or equal to the specified value Server Contact Avalanche Update Settings ok Server Contact Data Preferences Displa_4 M Syne clock Contact V On startup On IP Change J Onresume onext power Periodic Update ff y
78. without an external keyboard There are 5 programmable keys P1 P5 on the front bezel and when used with the Orange modifier key provide 5 additional programmable keys P6 P10 Contact Technical Assistance page 11 1 for information on the latest upgrades for your Thor VM2 ona gt em ES ups sso P HAAT AAA About this Guide This user s guide has been developed for a Thor VM2 with a Microsoft Windows Embedded CE 6 operating system Out of the Box The following items may be packaged separately e Thor VM2 e Quick Mount Smart Dock includes 10 60VDC power cable e RAM or U Bracket vehicle mount kit If you ordered additional accessories for the Thor VM2 verify they are also included with the order Keep the original packaging material in the event the Thor VM2 should need to be returned for service For details see Product Service and Repair page 11 1 Initial Setup for Thor VM2 This page lists a quick outline of the steps you might take when setting up a new Thor VM2 More instruction for each step is listed later in this guide Contact Technical Assistance page 11 1 if you need additional help Hardware Setup 1 o NO mF YO DN Install RAM Mount page 4 20 or Install U Bracket Mount page 4 29 to the vehicle Place Thor VM2 in the Dock page 4 18 Secure the optional external keyboard to either an integrate
79. 150VDC Power Connection Please review the Wiring Diagram page 4 42 before beginning power cable install The Thor VM2must be pow ered off and the power cable disconnected from the Thor VM2 The last connection must be to the vehicle power source before connecting the power cable to the Thor VM2 1 Route the cable from the Thor VM2 to the DC DC power supply Route the power cable the shortest way pos sible The cable is rated for a maximum temperature of 105 C 221 F When routing this cable it should be protected from physical damage and from surfaces that might exceed this temperature Do not expose the cable to chemicals or oil that may cause the wiring insulation to deteriorate Always route the cable so that it does not interfere with safe operation and maintenance of the vehicle 2 Cut the cable to length and strip the wire ends 3 Remove the lid from the DC DC power supply 4 Connect the stripped end of the positive wires red and red white twisted together or a single red wire to the output block See Power Cable Identification page 4 40 5 Connect the stripped end of the negative wires black and black white twisted together or a single black wire to the output See Power Cable Identification page 4 40 Note The input block has VIN VIN and GND terminals The output block has Vo and Vo terminals 6 Connect the ground green wire from the Thor VM2 to the GND terminal on the input side of the DC DC powe
80. 2 IRC ee ll e EE 6 2 Thor VM2 with a Disabled Touch screen 6 2 Reset and Loss of Host R CONNECTION cccccooccccnccocnccnncooononnononconnnnnnronononnrononnnnnonononononennns 6 3 ActiveSync Help EE 6 3 SM o IAE e E EE AEE E EEA SE EE A E A AEE 6 3 INSTA A A AA A AAA A a ad a 6 4 Using AS MICONNSOL ica tarot aia 6 4 Chapter 7 Enabler Installation and Configuration ere e He DE 7 1 Installation EE 7 1 Installing the Enabler on Mobile Devices A 7 1 Enabler Uninstall Process tica 7 1 lee 7 2 Update eieiei le Ee VE 7 2 Mobile Device Wireless and Network Settings coooocccinncccccnnoncccccnnonanncnnnanncnnnannnnncnnnns 7 2 Preparing a Device for Remote Management AA 7 3 Using Wavelink Avalanche to Upgrade System Baselne esenee esenee 7 3 User Le 7 4 Enabler CONTIGUA ON sido il tias 7 4 File Menu Options cintia data 7 5 Avalanche Update using File gt Settings cnn nnnncnnn 7 5 Menu Options sunno 7 5 COMO atrial iaa 7 6 A e EE 7 7 DM ts eege A ee Eege 7 8 EE ee ete ey areas eene eos etc acest ag ce eee eee moet 7 8 EYES EE 7 9 LEE 7 10 EXPIDO aint A aa 7 10 A EE 7 11 SOC 7 11 Seege Ri tica 7 12 Adal id A A teat eae 7 12 Eeer 7 14 Ei ies 7 14 Using Remote Management cancion tia 7 15 EXE SCA Mince Mis ecedusinch Aedes ta tacdngs Paces nes Sastvame O AE teehee Caveat teca wee arden ee 7 15 Step Create EE 7 15 Step 2 Scan Bar le 7 15 Step 3 Process COMPISION EE 7 16 Chapter 8 Wireless Network Connections
81. 7 Note that the auto launch process can also launch batch files BAT executable files EXE registry setting files REG or sound files WAV The mechanism is the same as listed above but the appropriate CE applica tion is called depending on file type Note Registry entries may vary depending on software revision level and options ordered with the Thor VM2 LAUNCH EXE and Persistent Storage If any of the following directories are created in the System folder Launch automatically copies all of the files in these direc tories System Desktop copied to Windows Desktop System Favorites copied to Windows Favorites System Fonts copied to Windows Fonts System Help copied to Windows Help System Programs copied to Windows Programs AppMgr copied to Windows AppMgr Recent copied to Windows Recent This function copies only the folder contents no sub folders The Windows Startup folder is not copied on startup because copying this folder has no effect on the system or an incorrect effect Files in the Startup folder are executed but only from System Startup Windows Startup is parsed too early in the boot pro cess so it has no effect Executables in System Startup must be the actual executable not a shortcut because shortcuts are not parsed by Launch Note Files in the Startup folder are executed but only from System gt Startup They are not copied to another folder REGEDIT EXE Registry Editor Use caution when ed
82. 8 AppLock Help The mobile device won t switch from Administration mode to end user mode If the configuration is valid for one application but not the other the switch to end user mode fails AppLock stays in Administration mode and is stopped until the Administrator password is entered The hotkey sequence needed is not allowed What does this mean When the Administrator is selecting a hotkey sequence to use when switching user modes they are not allowed to enter key combinations that are reserved by installed software applications Only RFTerm key combinations are validated When RF Term is installed on the mobile device and an RFTerm restricted key sequence is specified as a hotkey sequence by the Administrator the following error message is displayed in a message box Selected hotkey is not allowed Please reenter When RF Term is not installed on the mobile device the RFTerm keys are not restricted from use Can t locate the password that has been set by the administrator Contact Technical Assistance page 11 1 for password help Battery Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Battery This panel is used to view the status and percentage of power remaining in the Thor VM2 UPS battery en The battery gas gauge icon resides in the system tray and shows four levels of charge 100 75 50 25 At 100 a point below 25 the gas gauge icon will turn red indicating the battery is low The battery gauge
83. 8 EE 5 29 EE BEE 5 29 Bluetooth DEVICES orakcsexdeevcrsosizscnaesceste chan a E A aliadas 5 30 le E 5 32 Recon eege a eet eet it PR lee een 5 33 EE EE 5 34 USIMO II GTO OU oe eege eegene a 5 34 Retter EN 5 39 Data Collection RE 5 39 Bar Code Readers arr cs iaa oy diene cay meee oda sate aes coe ete 5 39 Data ee ebe EEN 5 40 MAU EE 5 42 ES LEE 5 43 EE EE 5 43 Data ie 5 44 Add GE ut Control TE 5 48 Al elle 5 49 POCOS EE 5 53 About eege eege 5 54 Length Based Bar Code Stripping ococcccoccccncnonacccnnanaccnnnonnoncccnnnnnn non nnnnccnnnnnnnccnn 5 54 Date TIMO dci 5 56 Lloret eege ee a a aiai 5 56 e EE 5 57 EB ACK e ele ie DEE 5 57 Appearance eer Ze Eed 5 57 Backo EE 5 58 Gobi Connection dE et EE 5 59 A An A eg E gege 5 59 PIAS R E ecm cers eee tetera eg ce sete dered E etapa ea ete marae 5 60 COMA EE 5 61 UMSS a aa age le aS ae Carles Dale EL ead 5 62 CGPS Sapa Geshe Seca anaes aA fale aed Set SO E A sls aaa id shane cee aetna 5 63 a 5 64 ADO id is 5 65 O 5 66 Transcriber cet eis taa ts 5 66 l ternet Options ee EE EE 5 67 K yboa rd E 5 69 License VIC Wer emgeet eege geet ee URN 5 69 Md nd RENE ees 5 70 Outp t RANG EE 5 70 DPE Panel eene ee 5 70 e 5 71 Network and Dialup Connections oooooccnnccccccnonoccccconanaconnnnanccnnnnnnn cnn non nn cnn nn nrcnnnnnnnnnnn 5 71 Create a New Connechon EEN 5 71 Ee Gapt re ios 5 72 Nel ii 5 72 NDISLOG cutter tito 5 73 PPP Eege reel ESO 5 74 COMUNICAMO
84. 8 14 for information on entering credentials Click the Credentials button e No entries except the CA Certificate Filename are necessary for Sign On Credentials as the user will be prompted for the User Name and Password when connecting to the network Enter these items as directed below Password CA cert a E O Validate server 7 Use MS store 1 Enter the Domain Username if the Domain is required otherwise enter the Username Enter the password Leave the CA Certificate File Name blank for now Click OK then click Commit Ensure the correct Active Profile is selected on the Main tab See Windows Certificate Store vs Certs Path page 8 15 for more information on certificate storage oa P Io bh Once successfully authenticated import the CA certificate into the Windows certificate store Return to the Credentials screen and check the Validate server checkbox Note Some servers may be configured to allow only a single use of the password for PEAP GTC In this case wait for the token to update with a new password before attempting to validate the server Then enter the new password check the Validate Server checkbox and proceed with the certificate process below Credentials User Password LXE CA cert Full trusted store E Validate server Use MS store If using the Windows certificate store 1 Check the Use MS store checkbox The default is to use the Full Trusted Store
85. 8 and 54 Mbps ABG Rates Full All A rates and all B and G rates with A rates preferred BGA Rates Full All B and G rates and all A rates with B and G rates preferred Ad Hoc when connecting to another client device instead of an AP Default BGA Rates Full It is important the Radio Mode parameter correspond to the AP to which the device is to connect For example if this parameter is set to G rates only the Thor VM2 may only connect to APs set for G rates and not those set for B and G rates Using CKIP Contact Technical Assistance page 11 1 if an update to the SCU is needed to support CKIP To use CKIP on the Thor VM2 1 Select WEP from the encryption list and None from the EAP type list CKIP LEAP is not supported 2 The Thor VM2 can connect to any AP that is configured for manual WEP or manual CKIP The Thor VM2 auto matically detects whether WEP or CKIP is configured on the AP and connects accordingly 3 All APs must be configured the same If some APs are configured with different security types enabled the Thor VM2 may experience disconnects or delays when roaming Status Start gt Programs gt Summit gt Status tab Summit Client Utility zo x Main Profile Status Diags Global Profile Default Channel 6 gt y Status Associated Bit Rate 48 Mbps SOC Device Name Unnamed Tx Power 63 mW IP 100 100 100 100 Beacon Period 102 MAC 00 17 23 00 00 00 DTIM 1 AP Name Unknown o
86. 802 11a DSSS OFDM 1 2 5 5 6 9 11 12 18 24 36 48 54 Mbps 64 mW 18dBm FCC 1 11 36 40 44 48 149 153 157 161 ETSI 1 13 36 40 44 48 Same as Thor VM2 Operating Temperature Same as Thor VM2 Storage Temperature Connectivity TCP IP Ethernet ODI Diversity Yes Bluetooth Bus Interface USB Enhanced Data Rate Connection Bluetooth Version Operating Frequency QDID Up to 3 0 Mbit s over the air No less than 32 80 feet 10 meters line of sight 2 0 EDR 2 402 2 480 GHz B013455 WWAN Device Technology Gobi 3000 data only Five band UMTS HSPA 800 850 900 1900 2100MHz quadband GSM io 850 900 1800 1900MHz and dual band EV DO CDMA 800 1900 10 3 Port and Connector Pinouts Power Supply Connector Pin Signal Description 1 V In 10 60V DC input 2 V In 10 60V DC input 3 V In input 4 V In input 5 GND Chassis ground 6 Ignition 0V to 60V to start terminal COM1 and COM2 Connector Pin Signal Description PIN 1 PIN 5 Data Carrier Detect Input 2 Receive Data Input Transmit Data Output 4 Data Terminal Ready Output PIN 6 PIN 9 Signal Power Ground Data Set Ready Input Request to Send Output Clear to Send Input 5VDC Bar Code Scanner Power 500mA max or or RI Ring Indicator Input Shell CGND Chassis Ground 10 4 USB Connector Pin Signal Description USBC_D US
87. 9 2 mm 12 10 in 307 3 mm 6 05 in 153 6 mm 1 02 in 25 9 mm 3 38 in 85 85 mm Vehicle Mount Footprint 0 406 in 10 312 mm 0 88 in 22 3 mm 1 25 in 31 75 mm D ON Oa Fb amp by Step 2 Remove RAM Ball If the Thor VM2 Quick Mount Smart Dock has a RAM ball attached the RAM ball must be removed from the dock to use the U Bracket mount Remove the RAM ball The hardware used to attach the RAM ball to the dock is not reused for the U bracket mount Step 3 Attach Adapter Bracket Note For the steps below always place the lock washer on the bolt before the flat washer 1 Attach the Adapter Bracket to the Thor VM2 dock using four each M5x16mm bolt M5 lock washer and M5 flat washer Torque to 35 in lbs 4 0 N m Attach the Thor VM2 Adapter Bracket assembly to the U Bracket using 4 each 1 4 20x5 8 bolt 1 4 lock washer and 1 4 flat washer If the Thor VM2 is not already mounted to the dock Place Thor VM2 in the Dock page 4 18 Adjust the Thor VM2 to the desired viewing angle Torque the 14 20 bolts to 50 in lbs 5 6 N m Connect Cables There are many cables available for the Thor VM2 including power cables and data communication cablesThor VM2 Strain Relief Cable Clamps Equipment Required Phillips screwdriver not supplied by Honeywell There are five strain relief cable clamps secured to the Thor VM2 Quick Mount Smart Dock Use the strain relief clamps
88. B client data signal USBC_D USB client data signal 3 USB_H1_PWR _ USB host 1 5V output power 5 PIN 9 PIN 6 Common ground Common ground USB host 1 data signal USB host 1 data signal 9 USBC_VBUS USB client 5V detect from attached host USB Y Cable D9 Male Connector Pin Signal Description 1 GND Common ground AS 2 USBC_D USB client data signal Dep USBC_D USB client data signal USB_H1_PWR _ USB host 5V output power PIN 6 PIN 9 Common ground USB_H1_D USB host 1 data signal B USB_H1_D USB host 1 data signal 9 USBC_VBUS USB client 5V detect from attached host PIN 1 PIN 5 USB Host Connector Description 5V_USB USB Power Current Limited USB_H1_D USB D USB_H1_D USB D USB Power Return Shell CGND Chassis Ground USB Client Connector Pin Signal Description PINd 1 USB Power Current Limited 4 USB Power Return Shell CGND Chassis Ground 10 5 CANbus Audio Connector Pin Signal Name Description 1 P CAN reserved ping PINT PINS pin An M PIN 11 PIN 15 CAN_L CAN_L bus line dominant low CAN Ground 4 0f e CAN reserved Optional ground 8 Audio return Headset return Headset output 8 Micimput Microphone input Microphone return Optional ground CAN_H bus line dominant high 4 CAN reserved Option CAN external Power Supply Headset Adapter Cable D15 Female Connector PIN 15 PIN 11 Not used
89. C e For 24VDC input use a 6A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 24VDC For 36VDC input use a 4A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 36VDC e For 48VDC input use a 3A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 48VDC Note For North America a UL Listed fuse is to be used Li lon Battery When disposing of the Thor VM2 UPS battery the following precautions should be observed The battery should be disposed of properly The battery should not be disassembled or crushed The battery should not be heated above 212 F 100 C or inciner ated Safety requirements restrict the temperature at which the Li lon UPS battery can be charged Charging is disabled if the ambi ent temperature is outside of the 0 C to 35 C safe charging range In order to maintain UPS charge the Thor VM2 should have power applied while the unit is within the safe charging range for at least an hour each day RF Safety Notice This device is intended to transmit RF energy For protection against RF exposure to humans and in accordance with FCC rules and Industry Canada rules this transmitter should be installed such that a minimum separation distance of at least 20 cm 7 8 in is maintained between the antenna and the general population This device can only be co located with FCC ID TWG SDCMSD30G Bluetooth Y Bluetooth Class 11 Honeywell Scanning amp Mobility Product Environmental Information R
90. Contact Technical Assistance page 11 1 to get the OS upgrade files e Honeywell Technical Assistance may advise you that additional upgrades such as BIOS or firmware are required before upgrading the OS Please follow any additional upgrade instructions provided by Technical Assistance e Use ActiveSync to back up Thor VM2 user files and store them elsewhere before beginning an upgrade on the Thor VM2 e Maintain an uninterrupted AC DC power source to the Thor VM2 throughout this process e The CF card with the OS and systems files must be present for the Thor VM2 to boot Removal or installation of SD or CF cards should be performed on a clean well lit surface e Always perform OS updates when the Thor VM2 has a dependable external power source connected to the Thor VM2 Procedure 1 Verify a dependable power source is applied to the Thor VM2 and will stay connected during the upgrade procedure Warmboot the Thor VM2 before beginning the update process Establish an ActiveSync connection between the Thor VM2 and a desktop laptop computer Download the OS files from the desktop laptop to the Thor VM2 s System folder During the file copy process to the Thor VM2 System folder when asked Overwrite select Yes to All Review the files that were downloaded to the System folder Restart the Thor VM2 Disconnect from ActiveSync Dm N O oO PF pm bh When the OS finishes loading check the OS update version by selecting Start gt Sett
91. For best results use AppLock configured via the Administration page 5 19 for this function AppLock is resident on each mobile device vice Avalanche Update Settings Shortcuts Shortcuts saas Adapters Status add Configure shortcuts to other applications on the Thor VM2 Shortcuts are viewed and activated in the Programs panel This limits the user s access to certain applications when the Enabler is controlling the mobile device display SaaS Avalanche Update Settings Shortcuts 5335 adapters Status SaaS Settings Disable SaaS O Manually Configure Customer O Scan Configure SaaS m Saa Use to configure the Enabler to connect with Avalanche on Demand This is a Software as a Service version of Ava Disable SaaS lanche Using either of the SaaS configuration options below assumes the user has registered with Wavelink Scan Configure SaaS Manually Config No SaaS connection is used Scan bar codes printed from within the Avalanche Console to configure the Enabler for the SaaS connection Manually enter the SaaS connection information Enter the server address on the Connection tab ure SaaS and the customer ID in the Company text box Adapters Avalanche Update Settings ok All M Manage Network Settings C Manage Wireless Settings Current O Use Manual Settings Shortcuts Saas Adapters status S
92. Honeywell Thor VM2 Vehicle Mount Computer with Microsoft Windows Embedded CE 6 0 User s Guide Disclaimer Honeywell International Inc HII reserves the right to make changes in specifications and other information contained in this document without prior notice and the reader should in all cases consult HII to determine whether any such changes have been made The information in this publication does not represent a commitment on the part of HII HII shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein nor for incidental or consequential damages resulting from the furnishing performance or use of this material HII disclaims all responsibility for the selection and use of software and or hardware to achieve intended results This document contains proprietary information that is protected by copyright All rights are reserved No part of this document may be photocopied reproduced or translated into another language without the prior written consent of HII O 2012 2014 Honeywell International Inc All rights reserved Web Address www honeywellaidc com Trademarks RFTerm is a trademark or registered trademark of EMS Technologies Inc in the United States and or other countries Microsoft Windows ActiveSync MSN Outlook Windows Mobile the Windows logo and Windows Media are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other c
93. Kin ee 11 1 Bet WE dn e EE 11 1 11 12 Thor VM2 Agency Information Thor VM2 mobile computers meet or exceed the requirements of all applicable standards organizations for safe operation However as with any electrical equipment the best way to ensure safe operation is to operate them according to the agency guidelines that follow Read these guidelines before using your Thor VM2 This documentation is relevant for the following Thor models VM2C FCC Part 15 Statement This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the follow ing two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation NOTE This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installa tion This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turni
94. M2 enters the permissible temperature range for charging Charging and Power Management Charging does not occur when the Thor VM2 is in ignition mode and the ignition is inactive e Charging of the UPS battery continues when the Thor VM2 is in power management user idle system idle or suspend modes Backup Battery The Thor VM2 has a permanent Lithium battery installed to maintain time date and CMOS setup information for a minimum of 90 days The lithium battery is not user serviceable and should last four years with normal use before it requires replace ment Note The backup battery should only be changed by authorized service personnel The Thor VM2 uses an 8A time delay slow blow fuse that is externally accessible and user replaceable The fuse is located on the back of the Quick Mount Smart Dock The fuse is accessed by unscrewing the cap as indicated Should it need replacement replace with same size rating and type of fuse e Littelfuse 0215008 MXP e Cooper Bussmann BK1 S506 8 R Bel Fuse 5HT 8 R or equivalent Fuse has voltage on it even when power is off Always disconnect input power before changing the fuse Power Management Modes The Thor VM2 supports the standard Microsoft Windows CE power management modes On DO Backlight Off D1 Dis play Off D2 and Suspend D3 On Mode DO When the Thor VM2 is attached to either vehicle power or an
95. M2 in Suspend by pressing the Power button 4 Place the Thor VM2 face down on a stable surface 5 Using a 2 Phillips bit loosen the M3 screws and then remove the tethered access panel with the SIM label This panel is on the right hand side when the Thor VM2 is face down with the top away from the user al 6 Locate the SD card installation slot a 7 Slide the SD card into the slot The label side front of the SD card faces toward the back of the Thor VM2 8 Reattach the access panel torquing the screws to 4 5 inch pounds 9 If removed reinstall the Thor VM2 in the dock 10 Resume the Thor VM2 from suspend 11 When using Windows explorer to view My Device the SD card is identified as SD Card Install SIM Card A SIM card may be required for WWAN Equipment Required The following equipment i
96. Mass Storage 1GB CompactFlash memory card Storage Expansion User installable supports 1 to 4GB SD card Operating System Microsoft Windows CE 6 0 Radio Modules 802 11 a b g radio Bluetooth Optional GPS WWAN Scanner Options No integrated scanner Optional serial USB or Bluetooth scanners Display Technology Intel GMA 500 graphics processor SVGA compatible Active matrix TFT Resolution 1024 x 768 pixels maximum 400 NIT brightness 9 7 measured horizontally display Transmissive with LED backlight Vehicle motion screen blanking available Keyboard Integrated 5 key keypad Optional 95 key USB keyboard Touch Screen Impact resistive Signature capture capability Field replaceable front panel including touch screen External Connectors Optional external 802 11 GPS WWAN antenna connectors Additional connectors on Quick Mount Smart Dock see below Beeper Minimum loudness greater than 95dBm at 10 cm in front of unit Power Supply 10 to 60 VDC isolated Uninterruptible Power Supply Internal UPS battery 30 minute life at 20 C 4 F Backup Battery RCT Internal lithium battery maintains Real Time Clock Quick Mount Smart Dock External Connectors Two external RS 232 serial ports COM1 and COM2 with switchable power CANbus Audio connector supports either audio microphone via adapter cable or J1939 Female and J1939 Male connectors via CANbus cable USB connector supports USB client port and USB host port via adapter cable Power Connector 6 pin co
97. Name Bluetooth Address 00 20 E0 00 12 34 C COD oxen0614 Subclass COM port Status not paired Data on the Bluetooth Properties panel cannot be changed by the user The data displayed is the result of the device Query performed during the Discovery process The Status dialog box reflects the current state of the highlighted device Settings Bluetooth Devices Settings Reconnect About V Computer is connectable Turn Off Bluetooth Computer is discoverable IV Prompt if devices request to pair Continuous search M Filtered Mode 7 Printer Port COMP Computer Friendly Name _ Logging mmm Note These options can still be checked or unchecked whether Bluetooth connection is enabled or disabled Turn Off Bluetooth Tap the button to toggle the Bluetooth client On or Off The button title changes from Turn Off Bluetooth to Turn On Bluetooth The default value is Bluetooth On Options Option Function Computer is connectable This option is Enabled by default Disable this option to inhibit Thor VM2 connection initiated by a Bluetooth scanner Computer is discoverable This option is Disabled by default Enable this option to ensure other devices can discover the Thor VM2 Prompt if devices request This option is Enabled by default to pair A dialog box appears on the Thor VM2 screen notifying the user a Bluetooth device requests to pair with
98. Note The icon on the screen above may differ based on the version of the Enabler installed on the Thor VM2 Change the option if desired Tap the X button to cancel Exit Tap the OK button to exit the Avalanche applet Using Remote Management 1 Configure the radio to connect to the network running the Mobile Device Server After the Thor VM2 is connected proceed to step 2 2 If itis desired to configure the radio using the Summit package add the configured package to the Wavelink Avalanche MC Console and enable it 3 Verify RMU CE CAB exists in the System RMU folder 4 Double click the Thor VM2 enabler CAB file in the System folder 5 The enabler automatically launches after installation and contacts the Mobile Device Server The Avalanche MC Console connected to that Mobile Device Server identifies the remote device and performs a sync This downloads any available packages available for the Thor VM2 eXpress Scan Butt eXpress Scan Desktop Icon a express Scan If the Thor VM2 has an eXpress Scan icon on the desktop eXpress Scan may be used for the initial configuration of the device If the eXpress Scan icon is not present on the desktop perform the Enabler Installation page 7 1 If the eXpress Scan icon is present follow these steps to configure the Thor VM2 to connect with the wireless network and the Mobile Device Server Step 1 Create Bar Codes Bar codes are created with the eXpress Config utility on the de
99. O DN If the AP is configured for network EAP only set the Auth Type radio parameter to LEAP Summit Client Utility fa OK x Man Profile status Diags Global Paie Default y New Rename Delete Scan Car Radio Encryption EAP type jerr auto WEP Lear WEP keys PSKs _ Credentials Save Changes Commit See Sign On vs Stored Credentials page 8 14 for information on entering credentials To use Stored Credentials click on the Credentials button No entries are necessary for Sign On Credentials as the user will be prompted for the Username and Password when connecting to the network Credentials User Enter the Domain Username if the Domain is required otherwise enter the Username Enter the password Click OK then click Commit Ensure the correct Active Profile is selected on the Main tab and warmboot The SCU Main tab shows the device is asso ciated after the radio connects to the network PEAP MSCHAP To use PEAP MSCHAP make sure the following profile options are used 1 Enter the SSID of the Access Point assigned to this profile 2 Set EAP Type to PEAP MSCHAP 3 Set Encryption to WPA TKIP 4 Set Auth Type to Open To use another encryption type select WPA CCKM WPA2 AES or WPA2 CCKM for encryption and complete other entries as detailed in this section Summit Client Utility fa ok x Main Profile Status Diags Global Profil
100. Password Confirm Password None Cancel When prompted for the private key password e Click None if you do not wish to use a password or Enter and confirm your desired password then click OK Microsoft Certificat Certificate Issued The certificate you requested was issued to you DER encoded or Base 64 encoded Download certificate Download certificate chain Click the Download certificate link File Download Security Warning x Do you want to open or save this file Name certnew cer Type Security Certificate 1 46 KB From 100 100 100 100 Dpen Save Cancel potentially harm your computer If you do not trust the source do not Y While files from the Internet can be useful this file type can open or save this software What s the risk Click Save to download and store the user certificate to the PC Make sure to keep track of the name and location of the certificate The private key file is also downloaded and saved during this process Be sure use the same name for the certificate file as was used for the private key file For example it the private key was saved as AAAUSER PVK then the certificate file created must be given the same name for example AAAUSER CER Install the user certificate Install a User Certificate Copy the certificate and private key files to the Thor VM2 Import the certificate by navigating to Start gt Control Panel gt Certificates
101. Power Configuration Mode page 5 80 and Power page 5 78 scheme timers 2 3 4 Adjust Speaker Volume page 2 6 5 Pair Bluetooth page 5 29 devices 6 Set Wireless client parameters using the Summit Client Utility page 8 1 7 Set terminal emulation parameters 8 Set AppLock parameter via the Administration page 5 19 control panel 9 Set DCWedge parameters via the Data Collection page 5 39 control panel 10 Save Changes to the Registry page 5 2 11 Set Date Time page 5 56 if not set during first boot Quick Mount Smart Dock The Thor VM2 assembly consists of two parts the Thor VM2 computer and the Quick Mount Smart Dock The Thor VM2 contains an internal UPS battery that once fully charged powers the Thor VM2 for a minimum of 30 minutes when the unit is not mounted in the dock The dock provides A mount for the Thor VM2 computer The dock attaches to a vehicle via a RAM or U bracket mount or to a RAM table stand for use in an office environment Conditioned power for the Thor VM2 The dock accepts 10 60VDC power input directly or 50 150VDC power input with a DC DC converter COM1 and COM2 serial connections for a tethered scanner printer PC connection etc USB host and client connections via an adapter cable CANbus connection via an adapter cable Headset connection via an adapter cable When a headset is not attached the microphone and speakers on the Thor VM2 are active Strain relief cable
102. S cto E 5 74 MISC Lars ondaa 5 74 Status POpUD ca dad 5 75 ENEE O 5 76 PASS WOM Aut A A A ita 5 77 POCO CIN rai eege ee deeg 5 77 POWER it 5 78 Power Configuration Mole Sei segergedeus usage ia 5 80 ACIDO Mode cootiiocanci ias 5 80 Uer RER RE 5 80 det Chr MOG iii os 5 81 E EE eegene geed ege ted side 5 82 Programmable KV tiocinianaai dt 5 83 KO MD A a aaae 5 84 PROG ING ebe Geet neue Eege ien Sege 5 86 Regional and Language Gettmgs conan cnn nnnnnnnnnn nana nnnnnnns 5 88 BEIENEE eege deeg egene 5 89 Remove Program EE 5 89 ee KEE RE ege EE 5 90 Screen Bla kiNg areare di ia ie 5 90 Currentlievel ion o drid 5 91 Screen Rotation A See E EE EE 5 91 SIS ile ade tent e ature a alee it Ue Pee io heres 5 92 Double GAD ea ee ee dee ee 5 92 Calibration EE 5 92 POV SUG E 5 93 COn e E EEI EA ee ee 5 93 Memory E 5 93 Device Name EE 5 94 COPY TINS sree ries a pa taa a ttle 5 94 Terminal Server Client Llcenses conca nano nana nano nananinas 5 94 Volums and Sounds ia NEE A A SS 5 95 Good Scan and Bad Scan SoundS cccccononcnccncncnnncnonnoncccnnnnnnnnononnnanonennnononanonanannns 5 95 WEE dat A A AAA A A EE 5 96 Chapter 6 ActiveSync INTOUCION Laa da A A AE A AA aes 6 1 NAL Sel adri risa 6 1 Connect Via US ita A A AA Diada 6 1 Cable for USB ActiveSync Connechon cnn nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnns 6 2 EXPO anta A A AA th atest 6 2 Backup Data Files Vegetaresch a 6 2 POr QUISIMOS aa at 6 2 CONNECT ii a if te tl itinere 6
103. Summit Wireless Network Configuration oomoccccnnnnccccccnoncccnnononcconnnnnnnccnnnnnnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnncnnanns 8 1 Mpal tata 8 1 Summit Client Utility cated ati a a ied yeaa ns cadre OC taht 8 1 Help eie aot wet a aaa eaaa aA aca cctns a aA a AR 8 1 Summit Tray ICON EE 8 1 Wireless Zero Config Utility ceras iii 8 2 To Switch Control to the Wireless Zero Config Utility ooon occnnn nnccnnnnccnnnnncc 8 2 TOE Switch Control to SCU EE 8 2 Mal E 8 3 AUTO e UE 8 3 Admin QI ace aceite ded eege 8 4 lge UE 8 5 Een E 8 5 e UE EE 8 6 NST KE EE 8 7 EN 8 8 PINGS slot io 8 9 Ee EE 8 10 CLUS TOI EE 8 11 Sign On vs Stored Credentials AEN 8 14 To Use Stored Credentials oo oooocccccccnnnccnnnnnnccnnnnonancnnnonancnnnnnnncnna nono an nano nana nano nananinns 8 14 TO USE SIG ON SCIGEN actos raras delicia 8 14 Windows Certificate Store vs Certs Path 8 15 User Geniticates ii daa 8 15 Root GA Certificates ib 8 15 TO USethe Gors Path morden a a A ee eene 8 16 To Use Windows Certificate Store oo oocnnnnnnccnccnnnncnnnnnancncnnnancnono nono nananonanccnn canon 8 16 Configuring Me PROMI ada didas 8 17 ING Secure 8 17 WEB tere asics Ne aarti tic EE 8 18 RE 8 19 PEAP MSGHA Perrita arar ee een 8 20 PEAR GHG oe Ee ee e Eege 8 22 WRAIMEAP eege sd 8 24 EAP FAST riete a a a a aa a A a a a a 8 25 SE HE 8 27 WRAPS eege a nae Nae as elt at Rie Ce anda 8 29 CGeniliCateS EEN 8 30 QUICIES Aia A det 8 30 Genera
104. This specifies the period of time for AppLock to wait for an application to restart If the application fails to restart automatically AppLock then proceeds according to the options selected when the application was configured on the Application page 5 23 and Application Launch Options page 5 24 panels Status Use the Status panel to view the log of previous AppLock operations and to configure which messages are to be recorded during AppLock operation Status information is stored in a specific location on the storage device and in a specific log file specified by the Admin istrator For this reason the administrator can configure the type of status information that is logged as well as clear the status information Administrator Control El oK x Application Security Options Status Filename System applock txt m view Log Level None y Level None y Clear Save As Move the cursor to the Filename text box and either type the logfile path or tap the Browse button the button The standard Windows CE Browse dialog is displayed After selecting the logfile from the Browse dialog tap OK For detail on error messages written to the log see AppLock Error Messages page 10 8 Note If your Status Panel does not look like the figure shown above you may have the Single Application version which does not have as many options View Level Messages Displayed Error Error
105. To Use this to save the results of the diagnostics to a text file Use the explorer window to specify the name and location for the diagnostic file The text file can viewed using an application such as WordPad Global Start gt Programs gt Summit gt Global tab The parameters on this panel can only be changed when a logged in with the admin password The current values for the parameters can be viewed by the general user without requiring a password Note Tap the Commit button to save changes If the panel is exited before tapping the Commit button changes are not saved Factory Default Settings Roam Trigger 65 dBm Roam Delta 5 dBm Roam Period 10 sec BG Channel Set Full DFS Channels Off DFS Scan Time 120 ms Ad Hoc Channel 1 Aggressive Scan On CCX Features ABG Optimized IWMM Ion Auth Server Type 1 TTLS Inner Method Auto EAP PMK Caching Standard WAPI Ton dimmed TX Diversity On RX Diversity On Starton Main Frag Threshold 2346 RTS Threshold 2347 LED Off Tray Icon On Hide Passwords On Admin Password SUMMIT or blank Auth Timeout 8 seconds Certs Path System Ping Payload 32 bytes Ping Timeout 5000 ms Ping Delay ms 1000 ms Summit Client Utility zo x Main Profile Status Diags Global Property Value a Roam Trigger 65 dBm E Roam Delta Roam Period BG Channel Set INFS Channels v Save Changes Commit Cust
106. UAE Compliance Mark UAE TRA ER0117274 13 DA0052379 10 Getting Started Overview The Thor VM2 Vehicle Mount Computer VMC is a rugged vehicle mounted computer running a Microsoft Windows CE 6 operating system and capable of wireless data communications from a fork lift truck or any properly configured vehicle Wire less communications are supported over a 802 11 WLAN network and optionally over a WWAN network The Bluetooth mod ule supports Bluetooth printers and scanners d CAUTION Before shipping the Thor VM2 be sure to Disconnect UPS Battery page 4 61 The Thor VM2 is designed for use with a vehicle Quick Mount Smart Dock The dock installs in the vehicle and connects to vehicle power The dock provides conditioned input power for the Thor VM2 Peripheral connections are on the dock The Thor VM2 is designed to easily be removed from the dock with a latch on the lower rear of the Thor VM2 housing Since the dock remains attached to the vehicle the Thor VM2 computer can easily be moved from one vehicle equipped with a dock to another vehicle equipped with a dock The Thor VM2 contains a UPS battery which when fully charged can power the Thor VM2 for a minimum of 30 minutes This can be when the Thor VM2 is not attached to a Quick Mount Smart Dock or when the Thor VM2 is attached to a dock but the vehicle power is interrupted such as when the vehicle battery is being changed The Thor VM2 can be used with or
107. Use of Wi Fi Multimedia extensions Options are On Off Devices running Windows XP can change the default value Devices running all other OS cannot change the default value Specifies the type of authentication server Options are Type 1 ACS server and Type 2 non ACS server Parameter PMK Caching WAPI TX Diversity RX Diversity Frag Thresh RTS Thresh LED Tray Icon Hide Password Default Function TTLS Inner Method Auto EAP SE method used within the secure tunnel created by EAP TTLS Options are AUTO EAP Any available EAP method MSCHAPV2 MSCHAP PAP CHAP EAP MSCHAPV2 Standard Type of Pairwise Master Key PMK caching to use when WPA2 is in use PMK caching is designed to speed up roaming between APs by allowing the client and the AP to cache the results of 802 1X authenti cations eliminating the need to communicate with the ACS server Standard PMK is used when there are no controllers The reauthenti cation information is cached on the original AP The client and the AP use the cached information to perform the four way handshake to ex change keys Opportunistic PMK OPMk is used when there are con trollers The reauthentication information cached on the controllers The client and the controller behind the AP use the cached information to perform the four way handshake to exchange keys If the selected PMK caching method is not supported by the network in frastructure every r
108. VM2 is already mounted to a dock and external power is applied to the dock e Thor VM2 is already mounted to a dock and the dock power switch is turned On Result The Thor VM2 boots Once booted the Thor VM2 follows the Auto On power scheme with timers reset after the boot completes Thor VM2 is On Conditions The Thor VM2 is On and gets external power such as e Thor VM2 is installed on a powered Quick Mount Smart Dock with the dock power switch On e Thor VM2 is already mounted to a dock and external power is applied to the dock e Thor VM2 is already mounted to a dock and the dock power switch is turned On Result The Thor VM2 continues to run and follows the Auto On power scheme with timers reset at the time power was connected UPS Mode This mode is selected any time external power is not present regardless of selected Power Configuration Ignition Input is ignored Thor VM2 is Off Conditions e The Thor VM2 is Off and the power button is pressed the Thor VM2 and both the following conditions are met e UPS power is over 10 capacity e CPU temperature is over 20 C Result The Thor VM2 boots and follows the UPS power scheme with power management timers reset at boot up Conditions The Thor VM2 is Off and the power button is pressed the Thor VM2 and at least one of the following condi tions are met e UPS power is under 10 capacity e CPU temperature is under 20 C Results The Thor VM2 remains Off Thor VM2 is O
109. Warranty are separate and severable which means that if any provision is held invalid and unen forceable such determination shall not affect the validity of enforceability of the other provisions hereof Use of any peripherals not provided by the manufacturer may result in damage not covered by this warranty This includes but is not limited to cables power supplies cradles and docking stations HII extends these warranties only to the first end users of the products These warranties are non transferable The duration of the limited warranty for the Thor VM2 is 1 year The duration of the limited warranty for the Thor VM2 Quick Mount Smart Dock is 1 year The duration of the limited warranty for the Thor VM2 Vehicle Mount Assembly is 1 year The duration of the limited warranty for the Thor VM2 internal UPS battery is 1 year The duration of the limited warranty for the Thor VM2 AC power supply and cables is 1 year The duration of the limited warranty for the Thor VM2 DC DC power supply is 1 year The duration of the limited warranty for the Thor VM2 cables USB Serial Communication Power is 1 year The duration of the limited warranty for the Thor VM2 headset is 1 year 11 2 Back Cvr 1 Honeywell Scanning amp Mobility 9680 Old Bailes Road Fort Mill SC 29707 www honeywellaidc com VM2 CE UG Rev B 6 14
110. X LOG_EX LOG_ERROR LOG_EX LOG_ERROR LOG_EX LOG_ERROR LOG_ERROR LOG_EX LOG_ERROR LOG_ERROR LOG_EX LOG_ERROR LOG_ERROR LOG_ PROCESSING LOG_ PROCESSING LOG_ PROCESSING LOG_ PROCESSING LOG_ PROCESSING LOG_ PROCESSING LOG_EX LOG_ERROR LOG_ERROR LOG_ERROR LOG_EX 10 9 Message Explanation and or corrective action Level Hot key pressed Processing the hotkey and backdoor entry LOG_EX Hot key set event failure When the administrator changes the hotkey configuration the hotkey controller LOG_ERROR must be notified This notification failed Hotkey press message re The user just pressed the configured hotkey LOG_ ceived PROCESSING In app hook WM_SIZE In addition to preventing the locked application from exiting AppLock must also LOG_EX prevent the application from enabling the taskbar and resizing the application s window This message traps a change in the window size and corrects it In app hook WM_WIN In addition to preventing the locked application from exiting AppLock must also LOG_EX DOWPOSCHANGED prevent the application from enabling the taskbar and resizing the application s window This message traps a change in the window position and corrects it Initializing keyboard hook AppLock is calling the keyboard hook initialization LOG_ procedure PROCESSING Keyboard hook initialization The keyboard filter initialization failed LOG_ERROR failure Keyboard hook lo
111. a wea PSK z None y WEP keys PSks Credentials Save Changes Commit For Passphrase enter 8 63 chars For PSK enter 64 Hex chars This value can be 64 hex characters or an 8 to 63 byte ASCII value Enter the key and click OK Once configured click the Commit button Ensure the correct Active Profile is selected on the Main tab and warmboot The SCU Main tab shows the device is asso ciated after the radio connects to the network Certificates Note Please refer to the Security Primer to prepare the Authentication Server and Access Point for communication Note It is important that all dates are correct on the Thor VM2 and host computers when using any type of certificate Certificates are date sensitive and if the date is not correct authentication will fail Quick Start Root Certificates are necessary for EAP TLS PEAP GTC and PEAP MSCHAP 1 Generate a Root CA Certificate page 8 30 and download it to a PC 2 Connect the Thor VM2 to the desktop PC using ActiveSync and copy the certificate to the Thor VM2 System folder 3 Install a Root CA Certificate page 8 32 User Certificates are necessary for EAP TLS 1 Generate a User Certificate page 8 33 and private key file and download them to a PC 2 Connect the Thor VM2 to the desktop PC using ActiveSync and copy the certificate and private key file to the Thor VM2 System folder 3 Install a User Certificate page 8 37 and the p
112. ab When Auto Profile is On if the radio goes out of range from the currently selected profile the radio then begins to attempt to connect to the profiles listed under Auto Profile The search continues until e the SCU connects to and if necessary authenticates with one of the specified profiles or e the Off button is clicked to turn off Auto Profile Note Do not include any profiles with an Ad Hoc radio mode this listing Once logged in the button label changes to Admin Logout To logout either tap the Admin Logout button or exit the SCU without tapping the Admin Logout button Admin Login To login to Administrator mode tap the Admin Login button Once logged in the button label changes to Admin Logout The admin is automatically logged out when the SCU is exited The Admin can either tap the Admin Logout button or the OK button to logout Admin Password Entry Enter Admin Password m cen Enter the Admin password the default password is SUMMIT and is case sensitive and tap OK If the password is incorrect an error message is displayed The Administrator default password can be changed on the Global tab The end user can e Turn the radio on or off on the Main tab e Select an active Profile on the Main tab e View the current parameter settings for the profiles on the Profile tab e View the global parameter settings on the Global tab e View the current connection details on the Status
113. aded OK The keyboard hook dll exists and loaded successfully LOG_EX L after Ctrl Processing the backdoor entry LOG_EX Loading keyboard hook When AppLock first loads it loads a dll that contains the keyboard hook process LOG_ ing This message is logged prior to the load attempt PROCESSING Open failure The status information is being saved to a file and the file open has failed This LOG_ERROR could occur if the file is write protected If the file does not exist it is created Open registry failure If the Administration registry key does not exist the switch to user mode fails be LOG_ERROR cause the AppName value in the Administration key is not available Opened status file The status information is being saved to a file and the file has been opened suc LOG_EX cessfully Out of memory for encrypt Not enough memory to encrypt the password LOG_ERROR ed pwd pRealTaskbarWndProc al The taskbar control has already been installed LOG_EX ready set Pwd cancelled or invalid The password prompt was cancelled by the user or the maximum number of LOG_EX remain in user mode failed attempts to enter a password was exceeded Read registry error hot key The hotkey registry entry is missing or empty This is not considered an error LOG_ERROR The keyboard hook uses an embedded default if the value is not set in the reg istry Read registry failure app AppName registry value does not exist or is empty This constitut
114. age The language is identified as English only or an additional language The languages are ordered separately and built in to the OS image The Thor VM2 may be pre loaded with an English only OS Contact Technical Assistance page 11 1 for information on installing an OS for a different lan guage The built in languages are added to registry entries and are available immediately upon startup Versions The Versions tab displays the versions of many of the software programs installed Not all installed software is included in this list and the list varies depending on the applications loaded on the Thor VM2 The Image line displays the revision of the system software installed Refer to the last three digits to determine the revision level Versions Tab and the Registry The Versions tab displays program version details from the registry Customized information can be displayed by modifying the Registry using the Registry Editor Use caution when editing the Registry and make a backup copy of the registry before changes are made The registry settings for the Version tab are under HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE Software 1 LXE Version in the reg istry To add a user application to the Version panel create a new string value under the HKLM Software LXE Version key The string name should be the Application name to appear in the Version window The data for the value should be the version number to appear in the Version window Version strings can
115. age memory If the mobile device is running slowly try increasing the amount of program memory Device Name System Properties General Memory Device Name copyrights These settings are used to identify your Windows CE device to other computers Please type a name without any spaces and a short description Device name THOR Device description Honeywell_YM2 The device name and description can be changed by the user Enter the name and description using either the keypad or the Input Panel and tap OK to save the changes This information is used to identify the Thor VM2 to other comput ers and devices Copyrights forix System Properties Copyrights General Memory Device Name Depending upon which components you are running your product may contain the following third party technologies licensing agreement with Spyglass Inc This screen is presented for information only The Copyrights information cannot be changed by the user Terminal Server Client Licenses Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Terminal Server Client Licenses Terminal Server Client Licenses Any licenses stored on the Thor VM2 appear in the drop down list Select a license and tap the Close button The license Stored Lconsos i cite sae INo Licenses found is available for use immediately Volume and Sounds Start gt Sett
116. ailure These messages have a partner Extended level message that is logged which contains the word OK if the action completed successfully rather than with an error For processing level messages Enter is logged at the beginning of the function specified in the message and Exit is logged at the end just before the return of the function specified in the message Message Explanation and or corrective action Level Error reading hotkey The hotkey is read but not required by AppLock LOG_EX Error reading hotkey using A hotkey is required If there is a failure reading the hotkey the internal factory LOG_ERROR default default is used App Command Line Command line of the application being locked LOG_ lt Command line gt PROCESSING App lt Application name gt Name of the application being locked LOG_ PROCESSING dwProcess ID lt gt Device ID of the application being locked LOG_EX Encrypt exported key len Size of encrypt export key LOG_EX lt gt Encrypt password lengih The length of the encrypted password LOG_EX lt gt Encrypted data len lt gt Length of the encrypted password LOG_EX hProcess lt gt Handle of the application being locked LOG_EX Key pressed lt gt A key has been pressed and trapped by the hotkey processing LOG_EX KEE The status information is being saved to a file and the file has been opened suc LOG_EX cessfully Address of keyboard hook AppLock fo
117. ally installed when the radio driver is updated If the Remote Management Utility RMU is not present on the Thor VM2 see Using Wavelink Avalanche to Upgrade Sys tem Baseline below Using Wavelink Avalanche to Upgrade System Baseline This procedure assumes the Avalanche Enabler is already installed on the Thor VM2 and is already in communication with the Avalanche MC Console Part 1 Bootstrapping the RMU 1 Install the RMUCEbt package into the Avalanche MC Console Do NOT include the Reboot option as part of the configuration i e the Reboot button in the Reboot Options branch must be unboldea 2 Enable ONLY the RMUCEbt package in the Avalanche MC Console and update the devices The RMU is downloaded and automatically installed Disable the RMUCEbt package in the Avalanche MC Console 3 4 For each device double click on the device to open the Client Controls dialog box 5 Check the Delete Orphaned Packages checkbox and click the Update Now button 6 After the sync completes uncheck Delete Orphaned Packages and close the dialog box Part 2 Installing Packages 1 Enable the RMUCE package in the Avalanche MC Console 2 Enable all remaining packages and send them down It is important that you include the new OS package in this group be sure to include the Enabler If the radio is to be managed remotely it is important to include the radio package in this group so that after the reboot the radio can automatical
118. an AP when the radio is contemplating roaming By specifying the channels to search roam ing time may be reduced over scanning all channels Options are Full all channels 1 6 11 the most commonly used channels 1 7 13 for ETSI and TELEC radios only or Custom page 8 11 Support for 5GHZ 802 11a channels where support for DFS is required Options are On Off Not supported always off in some releases ABG radio only The amount of time the radio will passively scan each DFS channel to see if it will receive a beacon Recommended value is 1 5 times that of the AP s beacon period ae this parameter when the Radio Mode profile parameter is set to Ad oc Specifies the channel to be used for an Ad Hoc connection to another client device If a channel is selected that is not supported by the by the radio the default value is used Options are 1 through 14 the 2 4GHz channels 36 40 44 48 the UNII 1 channels When set to On and the current connection to an AP weakens the radio aggressively scans for available APs Aggressive scanning works with standard scanning set through Roam Trigger Roam Delta and Roam Period Aggressive scanning should be set to On unless there is significant co channel interference due to overlapping APs on the same channel Options are On Off Use of Cisco Compatible Extensions CCX radio management and AP specified maximum transmit power features This parameter cannot be changed
119. anager Home coma umts GPS Admin About Operation Standalone Timeout sec 64 Interval ms 1000 Accuracy m 50 Status Enabled Tracking Inactive Lat 33 963545 Lon 84 219071 Signal Quality GPS SPS Mode Fix valid Elv 343 3000 Automatic Fix 20 Speed 0 0000 15 59 34 6364 Start Where am I Reset All Data Tap the Start button to initiate a scan for GPS data The information on this tab is updated every 3 seconds Tap the Reset All Data button to clear all GPS data from the Gobi radio You must confirm that you want to rest the data Use this button with caution as it takes a longer time for the GPS to establish a valid fix after the data is cleared After the GPS establishes a coordinate fix the Where am I button is active Tapping this button activates Internet Explore to display a Google map of the current location The GPS time and NMEA National Maritime Electronics Association string count are displayed at the bottom of this tab Admin This tab allows for entry of a PIN or PUK for the SIM card The PIN or PUK entered on this tab is stored in the Thor VM2 registry Gobi Connection Manager Home coma umrs Gps Admin about PIN PUK Entry mf Ga En PIN Personal Identification Number The PIN is a unique sequence of numbers stored on the SIM card If the radio is enabled and the SIM card requires a PIN a connection will not occur until t
120. and CANbus simultaneously See CANbus Audio Connector page 10 6 for connector pinout detail A headset cable attaches to the CANbus Audio connector and provides a quick connect connection for a headset See Connect Headset Cable page 4 55 for more information The CANbus Y cable has a 9 pin F SAE J1939 Deutsch and 9 pin M SAE J1939 Deutsch connector See Connect CANbus Cable page 4 56 for more information The CANbus interface is a virtual COM9 port This port can be accessed using standard Windows API calls Power Supply Connector Ug Power is supplied to the Thor VM2 through the power connector Additionally this assembly pro vides a connection point for the vehicle s chassis ground to be connected internally to the conduc tive chassis of the computer The Thor VM2 internal power supply can accept DC input voltages in the range of 10 to 60 Volts DC See Power Supply Connector page 10 4 for connector pinout detail See Connect Power page 4 33 for more information on connecting power to the Thor VM2 Antenna Connections The Thor VM2 is equipped with an 802 11 radio and can be ordered with internal antennas external antennas or external remote mount antennas d G e When the Thor VM2 is ordered with internal antennas the external antenna connectors are not used GPS and WWAN are optional on the Thor VM2
121. and executed directly by the keyboard driver 1 Place the cursor in the text box next to the App you wish to run e g App1 App2 2 Enable the EXE radio button if the application is an EXE file 3 Enter the name of the executable file 4 Enable the OPT radio button to add options or parameters for the executable file in the same text box Switching from EXE to OPT clears the text box but the information previously entered is stored allowing parameter entry 5 Tap the OK button when finished The changes take effect immediately The result of the application exe and options opt entries are displayed on the KeyMap tab in the Key Sequence box when the key mapped to the LauchApp is selected RunCmd The default for all text boxes is Empty Null or The text boxes accept string values only Note that executables and parameters are not checked for accuracy by the keyboard driver If the launch fails the Thor VM2 emits a single beep if the launch is successful the mobile device is silent Programmable Key ie OK D KeyMap Launch pp RunCmd mil cma OO Z mmm gt File Parm file parm The Run Cmd command is defined for use by system administrators These instructions call the ShellExecuteEx API which opens documents directly 1 Place the cursor in the text box next to the Cmd you wish to run e g Cmd1 Cmd2 2 Enable the file radio button and enter the name of the file 3
122. and the Thor VM2 has been mounted in the dock press the side of the power switch with the raised bump to pass power from the dock to the Thor VM2 Next locate the power button on the front of the Thor VM2 Press the power button to turn the Thor VM2 on When the Windows desktop is displayed or an application begins the power up sequence is complete See Power Controls see page 3 6 for more information Rebooting the Thor VM2 If a USB drive such as a thumb drive is attached to the Thor VM2 the device attempts to boot from the USB drive A e If the USB drive contains a bootable sector the Thor VM2 boots from the USB drive e If the USB drive does not contain a bootable sector the Thor VM2 does not boot Remove the USB drive and boot the Thor VM2 again Warmboot A warmboot reboots the Thor VM2 without erasing any registry data Configuration settings and data in RAM are pre served during a warmboot Network sessions are lost and any data in running applications that has not been previ ously saved may be lost CAB files already installed remain installed There are several warmboot methods available e Using the Registry select Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Registry and tap the Warmboot button The Thor VM2 immediately warmboots e Using the Start menu select St
123. annels are supported 149 153 157 and 161 The AP must be con figured accordingly After making any changes to the wireless configuration warmboot the Thor VM2 Summit Client Utility Note When making changes to profile or global parameters the device should be warmbooted afterwards Start gt Programs gt Summit gt SCU or SCU Icon on Desktop or Summit Tray Icon if present or Wi FI Icon in the Windows Control Panel if present The Main tab provides information admin login and active profile selection Profile specific parameters are found on the Profile tab The parameters on this tab can be set to unique values for each profile The Status tab contains information on the current connection The Diags tab provides utilities to troubleshoot the radio Global parameters are found on the Global tab The values for these parameters apply to all profiles Help Help is available by clicking the icon in the title bar on most SCU screens The SCU help may also be accessed by selecting Start gt Help and tapping the Summit Client Utility link The SCU does not have to be accessed to view the help information using this option Summit Tray Icon dill The Summit tray icon provides access to the SCU and is a visual indicator of radio status The Summit tray icon is displayed when e The Summit radio is installed and active The Windows Zero Config utility is not active e The Tray Icon setting is On Click the icon to laun
124. apping the Enabler icon on the desktop Select File gt Settings Select the Adapters tab Choose settings for the Use Manual Settings parameter Choose settings for Manage Network Settings Manage Wireless Settings and Use Avalanche Network Profile O 01 2 09 Je Click the OK button to save the changes 7 Reboot the device Preparing a Device for Remote Management Two additional utilities are necessary for remote management The Remote Management Utility RMU must be installed on all mobile devices first then you can control mobile device reboot storage RAM adjustment real time updates and Avalanche Enabler properties If the RMU is not already installed on the Thor VM2 see Using Wavelink Avalanche to Upgrade System Baseline below If in doubt verify RMU CE CAB exists in the System folder If the RMU CE CAB file is present when the Enabler is installed the RMU is also installed Important If the OS package includes double byte Asian fonts the storage RAM property of the RMU must be higher than the default value 40MB If the amount of storage RAM is too low the Enabler returns a Mobile unit out of resources error e Use the Wireless Configuration Application WCA when you want to remotely manage the Summit client device This utility is downloaded and installed in addition to the Remote Management Utility The WCA is included when the Summit radio driver software is updated The WCA is automatic
125. arameters is displayed in the Key Sequence text box when the remapped key is again selected Remap a Key to Run a Command 1 N Oo a Ek D Select the modifier key from the Modifier Mode options Select the key to be remapped from the Key pull down list Select RunCmd 1 4 from the remapped key from the Remapped Key pull down list Click on the RunCmd page 5 86 tab Make sure the FILE radio button is selected In the text box Cmd1 4 corresponding to the number selected for RunCmd1 4 enter the desired command If any parameters are needed for the command click on the PARM radio button This clears the text box though the command is saved Enter the desired parameters in the appropriate text box 8 Click OK to save the result and close the control panel 9 Ifthe KeyMap tab is accessed again the command plus any specified parameters is displayed in the Key Sequence text box when the remapped key is again selected LaunchApp The default for all text boxes is Null or The text boxes accept string values only Note that executables and parameters are not checked for accuracy by the keyboard driver If the launch fails the Thor VM2 emits a single beep if the launch is successful it is silent Programmable Key Ki OK KeyMap Launch pp Runcmd apt IT ape FO aB appt fe App Opt exe O opt The Launch App command is defined for use by system administrators These instructions are parsed
126. art gt Run and type WARMBOOT in the text box Press Enter The Thor VM2 immediately warmboots The WARMBOOT text command is not case sensitive e Use the P1 P5 Orange key press sequence to reboot the Thor VM2 The keys may be pressed in sequence they do not need to be held down simultaneously Restart A restart reboots the Thor VM2 without erasing any registry data Configuration settings are preserved during a restart Network sessions are lost and any data in running applications that has not been previously saved may be lost The contents of RAM are erased and the operating system and CAB files are reloaded To initiate a restart e Using the Registry select Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Registry and tap the Restart button The Thor VM2 immediately restarts e Using the Start menu select Start gt Run and type RESTART in the text box Press Enter The Thor VM2 immediately restarts The RESTART text command is not case sensitive Clearing Persistent Storage Reset to Default Settings Use the Registry control panel Load Factory Defaults button to set the Thor VM2 registry back to factory defaults No other clearing is available or necessary Tapping the Touch Screen with a Stylus Note Always use the point of the stylus for tapping or making strokes on the touch screen Never use an actual pen pencil or sharp abrasive object to write on the touch screen Hold the stylus as if it were a pen or pencil Touch an
127. art Starts the Netlog process of logging the network traffic stop Stops Netlog from logging network traffic unload Unloads Netlog Options Options Function Specifies the maximum packet size captured in bytes This option should only be run after you have pkt_size in bytes called load and stop Default is 5000 cap_size in Specifies the maximum size of NetlogO cap or Netlog1 cap in bytes This option should only be run bytes after you have called load and stop Default is 500 000 Specifies the name of the file to which network traffic information is saved This option should only cap file be run after you have called load and stop Default is netlog Run cmd Performs the command selected For example to run Netlog and modify the packet size do the following 1 Select load from the Commands list and click the Run cmd button 2 Select stop from the Commands list and click the Run cmd button 3 Select options from the Commands list enter the new packet size in the Options list and click the Run cmd button NDISLog NDISLog creates a TXT file that can be viewed with any text editor program that supports TXT files Network Capture Ka Ki Netlog Wa Command O start O stop indislog txt file Save File Run cmd ready to run command Command Command Function Starts logging the network traffic start stop Stops logging network traffic file Specifies the name of the file to wh
128. asswords are case sensitive When the user exits the Administrator Control panel the two passwords are compared to verify that they match If they do not match a dialog box is displayed notifying the user of the error After the user closes the dialog box the Security Panel is displayed and the password can then be entered and confirmed again If the passwords match the password is encrypted and saved Options AppLock contains several types of delays and timeouts to accommodate different applications Please note that the delays specified on the Application Launch Options page 5 24 panel are delays before AppLock attempts to start the specified application s The timeouts specified on this panel are delays after AppLock has attempted to launch the application Administrator Control Application Security Options Launch timeout Jeoooa Replace timeout 20000 Restart timeout 20000 Status Launch timeout This timeout specifies the period of time for AppLock to wait for the application to initially launch after the applica tion has been called For example if the application takes time to launch and then initialize before a display win dow is created use this delay to specify the delay period Replace timeout This timeout specifies the period of time for AppLock to wait after an initial screen like a password prompt screen is replaced by another application window Restart timeout
129. be equal to or less than 254 characters Because the strings are displayed in a text box any number can be accommodated up to the 64K byte text box limitation Network IP Software Hardware Versions Network 1P Adapter O SWGOBIUSBNDIS1 MAC 00 40 C6 00 00 00 IP GW Adapter 1 SERIAL ON USB MAC 20 52 41 00 00 00 IP 192 100 100 101 GW 192 100 100 100 0 0 0 0 MAC Address The Network IP tab displays the MAC address of the network card s such as the Summit WLAN radio and the Bluetooth module Accessibility Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Accessibility Customize the way the Thor VM2 keyboard sound display mouse automatic reset and notification sounds function There are a few changes from general Windows desktop Accessibility options Tab Keyboard Sound Display Mouse General Contents Sticky Keys Disabled cannot be enabled ToggleKeys Disabled by default Tap the Use ToggleKeys checkbox to enable this option Tap the Settings button to view or change parameters SoundSentry is disabled by default Tap the Use SoundSentry checkbox to enable this option Tap the Set tings button to view or change parameters High Contrast is disabled by default Tap the Use High Contrast checkbox to enable this option Tap the Set tings button to view or change parameters MouseKeys is disabled by default Tap the Use MouseKeys checkbo
130. be used connect the blue wire to an ignition switched circuit less than 1mA over input voltage range If ignition control is not used the blue wire can be left disconnected If the VX8 VX9 cable is connected to a screen blanking box or switch connect the D9 connector to a COM port on the dock The cable is rated for a maximum temperature of 105 C 221 F Therefore when routing this cable it should be protected from physical damage and from surfaces that might exceed this temperature Cable should be protected from physical damage from moving parts Do not expose the cable to chemicals or oil that may cause the wiring insulation to deteriorate Always route the cable so that it does not interfere with safe opera tion and maintenance of the vehicle Provide mechanical support for the cable by securing it to the vehicle structure at approximately one foot inter vals taking care not to over tighten and pinch conductors or penetrate outer cable jacket Connect the watertight connector end of the power cable to the Thor VM2 Quick Mount Smart dock power connector by aligning the connector pins to the power connector push down on the watertight connector and twist it to fasten securely Secure the power cable to the Thor VM2 using the Strain Relief Cable Clamps page 4 32 Place Thor VM2 in the Dock page 4 18 If using the Screen Blanking page 4 49 feature install the screen blanking box or switch if not previously installed Press th
131. between the first characters of the bar code and a string from the list is found that string is stripped from the bar code data Processing the list terminates when a match is found or when the end of the list is reached If the wildcard is not specified the string is assumed to strip from the beginning of the bar code data The string ABC strips off the prefix ABC The string XYZ will strip off the suffix XYZ The string ABC XYZ will strip both prefix and suffix together More than one in a configuration string is not allowed The User Interface will not prevent it but results would not be as expected as only the first is used in parsing to match the string The question mark wildcard may be used to match any single character in the incoming data For example the data AB D will match ABCD ABcD or ABOD but not ABDE The data collected is saved per symbology configured The Symbology selected in the Symbologies dialog defines the symbology for which the data is being configured Note that the Code ID if any are configured is ignored by this dialog regardless of the setting of Strip Code ID in the Symbologies dialog According to the sequence of events specified above the Code ID must not be included in the bar code data being matched because when the matching test occurs the Code ID has already been stripped If Strip Code ID is disabled then the bar code data to match must include the Code ID If Strip Code ID is enabled the
132. ble The registry save process takes 0 3 seconds If nothing has been changed nothing is saved eg O seconds Software Load The software loaded on the Thor VM2 consists of Microsoft Windows Embedded CE 6 OS hardware specific OEM Adapta tion Layer device drivers Internet Explorer 6 0 for Windows CE browser and utilities The software supported is summarized below e Full Operating System License Includes all operating system components including Microsoft Windows Embedded CE 6 kernel file system communications connectivity for remote APIs device drivers events and messaging graphics keyboard and touch screen input window management and common controls Network and Device Drivers e Bluetooth Note Please contact Honeywell Technical Assistance for software updates and CAB files as they are released by Honeywell Software Applications The following applications are included e WordPad Data Collection Wedge bar code result manipulation e ActiveSync e Transcriber e Internet Explorer e Word Viewer e Excel Viewer e PDF Viewer e PowerPoint Viewer Note that the viewer applications allow viewing documents but not editing them ActiveSync ActiveSync is pre loaded Using Microsoft ActiveSync you can copy files from your Thor VM2 to your desktop laptop and vice versa After an ActiveSync relationship partnership has been established with a desktop laptop ActiveSync will auto matically startu
133. ble key 5 Programmable key 6 Programmable key 7 U al T al alal alal al alal a The Blue plus P5 key press sequence causes no action External 95 Key Keyboard DOCE EEJEJE Bo UEO DEO EU e e e S e E SH JEJE EJE A PJtt AA ees ele A AE OO EIO aJ N000 gt O000500YJ The key map table that follows lists the commands used for the Thor VM2 Note that since the Thor VM2 uses a Microsoft Windows CE operating system no DOS Terminal Emulation keypress sequences are provided There are 10 hidden keys on the 95 key keyboard Each of the hidden keys is accessed by pressing the lt Fn gt key located in the top right hand corner plus a key on the numeric keypad on the right Additional function keys are supported as well To get this Key Function Insert Home Page Up Delete End Page Down Up Arrow Left Arrow Down Arrow Right Arrow Press These Keys in this Order O numeric keypad 7 numeric keypad 9 numeric keypad numeric keypad 1 numeric keypad 3 numeric keypad 8 numeric keypad 4 numeric keypad 2 numeric keypad 01 0 Ty ma mam Ty Ty mam S 6 numeric keypad 10 Specifications and Reference Material Technical Specifications Thor VM2 Processor Atom CPU operating at 1 6 GHz Memory 1GB SDRAM
134. button the button The standard Windows CE Browse dialog is displayed After se lecting the application from the Browse dialog tap OK Default is blank Enter the Title to be associated with the application The assumption is that multiple oo of a same application may need unique titles in order to differentiate them in the Switchpad page 5 22 Default is blank Enter the command line parameters for the application in the Arguments text box Default is 1 Enter the Order in which the application is to be loaded or presented to the end user Applications are launched in lowest to highest number order and do not need to be sequential Default is Disabled Enable the Internet checkbox to use the End user Internet Explorer EUIE EXE When the checkbox is enabled the Internet Menu and Internet Status are available See the section titled End user Internet Explorer EUIE for more details See following section titled Application Launch Options page 5 24 Note AppLock Administrator Control panel file Launch option does not inter relate with similarly named options contained in other Control Panels Default is Ctrl Spc Select the Global Key key sequence the end user is to press when switching be tween applications The Global Key default key sequence must be defined by the AppLock Adminis trator The Global key is presented to the end user as the Activation key Default is 10 seconds Enter the number of seconds that Applications must
135. cally launches subject to the specified Delay in seconds the application after the unit is rebooted If a Delay in seconds is specified AppLock waits for the specified period of time to expire before launching the application The Delay default value is 10 seconds valid values are between 0 no delay and a maximum of 999 seconds Retries This is the number of times the application launch will be retried if a failure occurs when the application is automatically launched at bootup Valid values are between 0 no tries and 99 tries or 1 for infinite Infinite tries ends when the application successfully launches The default is O retries Delay This timer is the time that AppLock waits prior to the initial launch of the selected application when it is automatically launched at bootup Delay default is 10 seconds Valid values are between 0 seconds no delay and 999 seconds The Auto At Boot delay is associated for each application it will be either a value specified by the Admin istrator or it will be the delay default value At startup when a delay has been assigned for each applica tion AppLock waits for the delay associated with the first application to expire before launching the first application then AppLock waits for the delay associated with the second application to expire before launching the second application AppLock continues in this manner until all applications are launched Note A Global Delay can be accomplis
136. cates Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Certificates Manage digital certificates used for secure communication Note Digital certificates are date sensitive If the date on the Thor VM2 is incorrect wireless authentication will fail Certificates Stores Class 3 Public Primary Certification Authority Entrust net Certification Authority 2048 Entrust net Secure Server Certification Authorit Equifax Secure Certificate Authority Se GlobalSign Root CA x Import view Remove The Certificates stores tab lists the certificates trusted by the Thor VM2 user Lists the certificates trusted by you These values may change based on the type of network security resident in the client access point or the host system Tap the Import button to import a digital certificate file Tap the View button to view a highlighted digital certificate Note Tap the Remove button to remove highlighted certificate files Note Tap the button and follow the instructions in the Windows CE Help file when working with trusted authorities and digital certificates Data Collection Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Data Collection The Data Collection wedge DC Wedge software component is the interface between data collection devices such as bar code scanners or imagers connected to a COM port on the Thor VM2 or bar code scanners wirelessly connected via Blue tooth to your Thor VM2 This software compo
137. ccononann cnn conan cc nnnnnnncnn 2 4 Access PAE nr ii 2 5 Backlights and ne eu 2 6 e UA le LE 2 6 Power Management s 15ssscosetiesetee een aes ee Rie eee 2 6 Bot Miete el te Lett 2 6 ET at WE 2 6 Keypad AC Te EE 2 6 SEKR 2 6 Power EE 2 7 Pebooting Me Thor VM2 ateereigde egen 2 8 A a o a a a aaea aa 2 8 DEE arenorna O 2 8 Clearing Persistent Storage Reset to Default Gettngs 2 8 Tapping the Touch Screen with a TC 2 8 Setup Terminal Emulation PDarameters cnn nnnnnncnnanns 2 9 Cleaning the Touch Screen iio ea edu 2 9 VATS EE 2 9 Chapter 3 Hardware Overview System AWS tes i aa stra tose lee ui eo ca cacead slop E 3 1 802 1 la b gWireless Client icono 3 1 Central Processing WE E 3 1 lift leien ET 3 1 System Memo Ye a secret A atecaertadeh er tele neal lenealates 3 1 VideO SUBS Mia 3 1 Audio lan 3 2 Ee Re 3 2 CompactFlash CF Slot et etait tei ai 3 2 Secure Digital SD SlOb EE 3 2 Blu to th EZ EE 3 2 NEEN e ee 3 2 OPS EE 3 2 EE 3 2 Vehicle DC Power Supply EE 3 2 External AC Power Supply c2ccccscclei dur iia lila is 3 2 Uninterruptible Power Supply vecicchessticcseccee cevtedecwenevsarh agesetucehevencerengerseniuieddewenecaeaeeuaess 3 3 Safe Charging Temperature Hange e 3 3 Charging FIC EE 3 3 Charging and Power Management ccessscecseneeceneceeeeeeeseneeeeseneeeeneeeseeeensenees 3 3 Backup Battery eege eege cease eters EE EES SEAN 3 3 PUSS een Egeter A AAA e nace eege 3 4 Power Management
138. ce can access the network e The Username and Password are left blank on the Credentials screen When the device attempts to connect to the network a sign on screen is displayed The user must enter the Username and Password at that time to authenticate To Use Stored Credentials 1 o pm ro bh N 10 11 12 13 After completing the other entries in the profile click on the Credentials button Enter the Username and Password on the Credentials screen and click the OK button Click the Commit button For LEAP and WPA LEAP configuration is complete For PEAP MSCHAP and PEAP GTC importing the CA certificate into the Windows certificate store is optional For EAP TLS import the CA certificate into the Windows certificate store Also import the User Certificate into the Windows certificate store Access the Credentials screen again Make sure the Validate server and Use MS store checkboxes are checked The default is to use the entire certificate store for the CA certificate Alternatively use the Browse button next to the CA Cert CA Certificate Filename on the Credentials screen to select an individual certificate For EAP TLS also enter the User Cert User Certificate filename on the credentials screen by using the Browse button If using EAP FAST and manual PAC provisioning input the PAC filename and password Click the OK button then the Commit button If changes are made to the stored credentials click Commit
139. certificate chain or CRL Click the Download a CA certificate certificate chain or CRL link Make sure the correct root CA certificate is selected in the list box Microsoft Certificat Download a CA Certificate Certificate Chain or CRL To trust certificates issued from this certification authority install this CA certificate chain To download a CA certificate certificate chain or CRL select the certificate and encoding method CA certificate Encoding method DER Base 64 Download CA certificate Download CA certificate chain Download latest base CRL Download latest delta CRL Click the DER button To download the CA certificate click on the Download CA certificate link File Download Security Warning xi Do you want to open or save this file Name certnew cer Type Security Certificate 1 46 KB From 100 100 100 100 Open Save Cancel While files from the Internet can be useful this file type can potentially harm your computer If you do not trust the source do not open or save this software What s the risk Click the Save button and save the certificate Make sure to keep track of the name and location of the certificate Install the certificate on the Thor VM2 Install a Root CA Certificate Note This section is only if the Windows certificate store is used If the certificate store is not used copy the certificate to the System folder or other path specified in th
140. ch the SCU Use the tray icon to view the radio status EI The radio is not currently associated or authenticated to an Access Point dl The signal strength for the currently associated authenticated Access Point is less than 90 dBm dl The signal strength for the currently associated authenticated Access Point is 71 dBm to 90 dBm dl The signal strength for the currently associated authenticated Access Point is 51 dBm to 70 dBm dll The signal strength for the currently associated authenticated Access Point is greater than 50 dBm Wireless Zero Config Utility x e The WZC utility has an icon in the toolbar that looks like a networked computer with a red X beside it indicating that Wireless Zero Config application is enabled but the connection is inactive at this time the device is not connected to a network The WZC icon may not be visible until control is passed to the WZC utility as described below e You can use either the Wireless Zero Configuration Utility or the Summit Client Utility to connect to your network The Summit Client Utility is recommended because the Wireless Zero Configuration Utility cannot control the complete set of security features of the radio To Switch Control to the Wireless Zero Config Utility 1 Select ThirdPartyConfig in the Active Profile drop down list as the active profile on the Main tab 2 Warmboot the device The Summit Client Utility passes control to Wireless Zero Config and the WZC Wirele
141. cked Settings No Relevant Settings The Display State options control the appearance of the taskbar while using the Enabler interface e Normal taskbar is visible taskbar icons function normally e Hidden taskbar is not displayed e Locked taskbar is visible but most icons are hidden or for information only Execution Note the dimmed options on this Thor VM2 panel This menu option is designed to manage downloaded applications for automatic execution upon startup Avalanche Update Settings ok Execution scan Config Shortcuts saas _ 4 gt Oo Auto E Auto Execute Se An application that has been installed with the Avalanche Management system can be run auto lection matically following each boot cution Delay before exe Time delay before launching Auto Execute application Scan Config For best results use eXpress Config and eXpress Scan page 7 15 for this function eXpress Scan is included with the Thor VM2 enablers Avalanche Update Settings lok E Scan Config Shortcuts Saas Adapters Ar M Use Scan Wedge 7 Run Scan Wedge Path Fa Close Scan Wedge on Exit Enabler Scan Not Present Scan Config is Enabled E Auto Display Scan Config for Wireless Settings Scan Config functionality is a standard option of the Wavelink Avalanche MC system but is not currently supported on the Thor VM2 Shortcuts
142. ct to a network create a new connection and adjust pa Connections page 5 71 rameters for client connections Taskbar page 5 11 Set Taskbar parameters Transcriber To make changes to the Transcriber application tap the keyboard icon in the status bar Select Transcriber from the pop up menu Then open the Input control panel and tap the Options button Transcriber Options Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Input Panel are available only when Transcriber is selected as the active input method Tap the button or the Help button to access Transcriber Help Windows Explorer Start gt Programs gt Windows Explorer There are a few changes in the Windows CE version of Windows Explorer as it relates to the general desktop PC Windows Explorer options Tap the button to access Windows Explorer Help Taskbar Start gt Settings gt Taskbar There are a few changes in the Windows CE version of Taskbar as it relates to the general desktop PC Windows Taskbar options When the taskbar is auto hidden press the Ctrl key then the Esc key to make the Start button appear Clicking the Taskbar option on the Settings menu displays the General and Advanced Taskbar tabs General Factory Default Settings Always on Top Enabled Auto hide Disabled Show Clock Enabled Taskbar and Start Menu Properties General Advanced V Always on top IT Auto hide E Show Clock
143. d When clicked the OS performs a registry save Active registry saved to Flash registry hive and then a warmboot The contents of RAM are preserved CAB files already loaded into RAM remain load ed When clicked the OS performs a registry save and then a restart OS and CAB files are reloaded Remove Programs Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Remove Programs Note Lists programs installed in RAM that have been marked for removal Select a program and tap Remove Follow the prompts on the screen to uninstall Thor VM2 user installed only programs The change takes effect immediately Files stored in the My Documents folder are not removed using this option Remove Programs Remove Programs Ze The listed software can be Programs wW automatically removed To remove a program select it alicia Honeywell Data Collection Wedge select Remove Remove Honeywell Bluetooth EZPair v1 0 Honeywell HSM SDC Summit WLAN Adapter Note Do not remove factory installed programs using this option Contact Technical Assistance page 11 1 if factory installed programs must be deleted Screen Control Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Screen Control Set screen properties for the Thor VM2 Factory Default Settings Screen Blanking Blackout Enable screen blanking Disabled 1000 none selected Screen on delay ms COM Port Current Level LCD Brightness 100 Ambient Li
144. d The command is not case sensitive Desktop Note For general use instruction please refer to commercially available Windows CE user s guides or the Windows on line Help application installed in the mobile device The Thor VM2 Desktop appearance is similar to that of a desktop PC running a Windows operating system At the bottom of the screen is the Start button Tapping the Start Button causes the Start Menu page 5 8 to display It contains the standard Windows menu options Programs Favorites Documents Settings Help and Run Desktop Icons At a minimum the desktop displays icons for My Device Internet Explorer and the Recycle Bin Following are a few of the other icons that may be on the Thor VM2 Desktop Contact Technical Assistance page 11 1 about the latest updates and upgrades for your operating system Icon Function E Access files and programs My Device EI Storage for files that are to be deleted Kl Recycle Bin 9 Discover and then pair with nearby discoverable Bluetooth page 5 29 devices a Bluetooth p Storage for downloaded files applications E My Documents Icon S Internet Explorer A Summit Client Utility Gut express Scan LXE RFTer LG ites Remote Desktop Connection N Avalanche li TelnetCE asta Function Displays web pages from the Internet intranet Used for accessing the Summit Client Utility page 8 1 This utility configures
145. d or if mandatory information is missing in the configuration There are several situations that display a password prompt after a password has been configured If the configured hotkey is pressed the password prompt is displayed In this case the user has 30 seconds to enter a password If a valid password is not entered within 30 seconds the password prompt is dismissed and the device returns to end user mode All other situations that present the password prompt do not dismiss the prompt this is because the other situations result in invalid end user operation These conditions include e If inaccurate configuration information is entered by the administrator i e an application is specified that does not exist e Ifthe application name which is mandatory for end user mode is missing in the configuration e Invalid installation of AppLock e g missing DLLs e Corrupted registry settings To summarize if an error occurs that prevents AppLock from switching to user mode the password will not timeout and AppLock will wait until the correct password is entered Forgotten password See AppLock Help page 5 28 End User Switching Technique Note The touch screen must be enabled Keyboard wv RFTerm EXE v pword exe A checkmark indicates applications currently active or available for Launching by the user When Keyboard is selected the Thor VM2 default input method Input Panel Transcriber or custom input meth
146. d or remote mounting bracket Connect Cables page 4 32 for any peripherals Connect Power page 4 33 Secure all cables in Strain Relief Cable Clamps page 4 32 Press the Power Switch page 3 6 on the dock to the on position Press the Power Button page 3 6 on the Thor VM2 Software Languages and Fonts The Thor VM2 may be shipped with an English only operating system OS Contact Technical Assistance page 11 1 for the availability of OS files for other languages See Thor VM2 OS Upgrade page 5 13 for OS update installation information The language installed is identified on the Software tab of the About page 5 17 control panel First Boot When a new Thor VM2 starts up a EULA End User License Agreement may be displayed on the touch screen It remains on the screen until the Accept or Decline button is tapped with a stylus Tap the Accept button to accept the EULA terms and the Thor VM2 continues the startup process The EULA is not presented to the user again Tap the Decline button to decline the EULA and the Thor VM2 reboots It will continue to reboot until the Accept but ton is tapped with the stylus Note The EULA will be presented after any operating system upgrade or re installation including language specific operating systems Software Setup Hardware setup should be completed before starting software setup 1 If prompted perform touch screen Calibration page 5 92 Set Date Time page 5 56 Set
147. d user manual launch and 2 never launched and 3 not dis played on the Switchpad Allow Close Default is Disabled When enabled the associated application can be closed by the end user This option allows the administrator to configure applications that consume system resources to be termi nated if an error condition occurs or at the end user s request Error conditions may generate a topmost popup requiring an end user response memory resource issues requiring an end user response etc Also at the administrator s discretion these types of applications can be started manually see Manual Launch by the end user End User Internet Explorer EUIE AppLock supports applications that utilize Internet Explorer such as HTML pages and JAVA applications The end user can run an application by entering the application name and path in Internet Explorer s address bar To prevent the end user from executing an application using this method the address bar and Options settings dialog are restricted in Internet Explorer This is accomplished by creating an Internet Explorer that is used in end user mode End user Internet Explorer EUIE EXE The EUIE executes the Internet Explorer application in full screen mode which removes the address bar and status bar The Options Dialog is also removed so the end user cannot re enable the address bar The administrator specifies the EVIE by checking the Internet checkbox in the Application tab of the Ad
148. data should not include the Code ID since it has already been stripped Add Prefix Suffix Control Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Data Collection tab gt Symbology button Use this option to specify a string of text hex values or hat encoded values to be added to the beginning prefix or the end suffix of the bar code data Add _ Prefix _ Suffix Up to 19 characters can be included in the string The string can include any character from the keyboard plus charac ters specified by hex equivalent or entering in hat encoding See see Hat Encoding page 10 13 for a list of charac ters with their hex and hat encoded values Use the Escape function to enter literal hex and hat values Add Prefix To enable a prefix check the Prefix checkbox and enter the desired string in the text box The default is disabled unchecked with a blank text string When bar code data is processed the Prefix string is sent to the output buffer before any other data Because all stripping operations have already occurred stripping settings do not affect the prefix The prefix is added to the output buffer for the Symbology selected from the pull down list If All is selected the prefix is added for any symbology that has not been specifically configured Add Suffix To enable a suffix check the Suffix checkbox and enter the desired string in the text box The default is disabled unchecked with a blank text st
149. depleted Because of the cumulative effect if the Thor VM2 is operating from the UPS for example The backlight turns off after 30 seconds of no activity The display turns off after 1 minute and 30 seconds of no activity 30 sec 1 min The Thor VM2 enters Suspend after 11 minutes and 30 seconds of no activity The Thor VM2 shuts down after 31 minutes and 30 seconds of no activity If the User Idle timer is set to Never the power scheme timers never place the Thor VM2 in User Idle System Idle or Suspend modes 5 79 Power Configuration Mode Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Power Configuration Mode There are three user selectable power configuration modes for the Thor VM2 available Additionally a UPS power configu ration mode is supported and automatically selected regardless of the user selected mode any time external power is not present Power page 5 78 control panel timeout values vary by the power configuration mode selected ac oc Auto On Cancel AC DC Power Configuration Mode v0 1 Power Configuration O Ignition Control Mode This is the default power mode In AC DC mode the Thor VM2 is turned On by a press of the Power button Ignition input is ignored when AC DC Mode is enabled Thor VM2 is Off Conditions The Thor VM2 is Off and external power is available such as e Thor VM2 is installed on a powered Quick Mount Smart Dock with the dock power switc
150. e 2 To select an individual certificate click on the Browse button 3 Uncheck the Use full trusted store checkbox 4 Select the desired certificate and click Select You are returned to the Credentials screen 5 Click OK then click Commit If using the Certs Path option 1 Leave the Use MS store box unchecked 2 Enter the certificate filename in the CA Cert text box 3 Click OK then click Commit The device should be authenticating the server certificate and using PEAP MSCHAP for the user authentication Ensure the correct Active Profile is selected on the Main tab and warmboot The SCU Main tab shows the device is asso ciated after the radio connects to the network Note The date must be properly set on the device to authenticate a certificate PEAP GTC To use PEAP GTC make sure the following profile options are used 1 Enter the SSID of the Access Point assigned to this profile 2 Set EAP Type to PEAP GTC 3 Set Encryption to WPA TKIP 4 Set Auth Type to Open To use another encryption type select WPA CCKM WPA2 AES or WPA2 CCKM for encryption and complete other entries as detailed in this section Summit Client Utility fa ok x Main Profile Status Diags Global Profile Default y New Rename Delete Scan E Radio Encryption EAP type far wea TKIP ES JPEAP cTC le WEP keys PSKs Credentials Save Changes See Sign On vs Stored Credentials page
151. e Recalibrate If your Windows CE device is not responding properly to your taps you Double Tap Follow the instructions on the screen and tap the OK button to save any double tap changes Calibration Calibration involves tapping the center of a target If you miss the center keep the stylus on the screen slide it over the target s center and then lift the stylus To begin tap the Recalibrate button on the screen with the stylus Press and hold the stylus on the center of the tar get as it moves around the screen Press the Enter key to keep the new calibration setting or press the Esc key to revert to the previous calibration settings Note Ifthe touch screen looses calibration on a Thor VM2 you must use a USB mouse or keyboard attached to the Thor VM2 to access this tab to recalibrate the touch screen unless a Programmable Key page 5 83 has been assigned to launch the calibration utility System Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt System Use these Thor VM2 panels to Review System and mobile device data and revision levels Adjust Storage and Program memory settings Assign a device name and device descriptor Factory Default Settings General No user interaction Memory Device Name Device Description Copyrights No user interaction 1 4 storage 3 4 program memory Unique to equipment type Unique to equipment type General System Properties ok x Genera
152. e Default y New Rename Delete Scan Ed Radio Encryption EAP type far wea TKIP ES PEAP MSCHAr y WEP keys PSKs Credentials Save Changes See Sign On vs Stored Credentials page 8 14 for information on entering credentials Click the Credentials button e No entries except the CA Certificate Filename are necessary for Sign On Credentials as the user will be prompted for the User Name and Password when connecting to the network e For Stored Credentials User Password and the CA Certificate Filename must be entered Enter these items as directed below Password CA cert ae E validate server Use MS store Enter the Domain Username if the Domain is required otherwise enter the Username _ Enter the password Leave the CA Certificate File Name blank for now Click OK then click Commit Ensure the correct Active profile is selected on the Main tab See Windows Certificate Store vs Certs Path page 8 15 for more information on certificate storage oa fF wo N Once successfully authenticated import the CA certificate into the Windows certificate store Return to the Credentials screen and check the Validate server checkbox Credentials User Password LXE CA cert Full trusted store E Validate server Use MS store If using the Windows certificate store 1 Check the Use MS store checkbox The default is to use the Full Trusted Stor
153. e LED The Programmable LED is available for user applications The LED defaults to Off unless activated by user applica tion LED Behavior Status Controlled by application Refer to application developer for LED behavior details Off Default mode Refer to application developer for LED behavior details The LED behavior is controlled by the NLedDriverSetDevice API Please refer to the CE API Programming Guide for API details Display The display is a thin film transistor display capable of supporting WSVGA graphics modes Display size is 1024x768 pixels The display covering is designed to resist stains The touch screen allows signature capture and touch input The display sup ports screen blanking to eliminate driver distraction when the vehicle is in motion Touch Screen The touch screen is a Resistive Panel with a scratch resistant finish that can detect touches by a stylus and translate them into computer commands In effect it simulates a computer mouse Only Delrin or plastic styluses should be used A right mouse click is simulated by touching and holding the screen for the appropriate time interval When a dialog box is too large for the display tap and drag the dialog box up or down or from side to side to view the remainder of the dialog box Always use the point of the stylus for tapping or making strokes on the display Never use an actual pen pencil sharp or abrasive object to write on the touch screen An ext
154. e Misc tab of the Options page 5 74 control panel control panel USB Keyboard Mouse A standard USB keyboard or mouse can be attached to the Thor VM2 using the appropriate adapter cable The Y cable attaches to the Thor VM2 and provides a USB connector Please refer to documentation provided with the USB keyboard or mouse for more information on their operation LED Functions gt e O System LEDs 0 E Connection LEDs Programmable LED oP 7 De OD O e Blue LED Orange LED System LEDs SYS System Status LED y a O UPS Uninterruptible Power Supply LED gt Ou SSD Solid State Drive LED E SYS System Status LED LED Behavior System State Solid Green e On e On but Backlight Off e On but Display Off Green blinking very slowly External power present e Suspend 1 2 sec on 4 1 2 sec off Off Off External power present LED Behavior System State Off e Suspend External power not present e Off Green blinking slowly CPU temperature less than 20 C Heater warming CPU for 30 sec External power present 1 2 sec on 1 1 2 sec off Green blinking slowly CPU temperature less than 20 C Need to move unit to warmer environment External power not pres
155. e Power Switch page 3 6 on the back of the Thor VM2 dock Press the Power Button page 3 6 on the front of the Thor VM2 to turn on the Thor VM2 Screen Blanking Prerequisite The steps outlined in either 12 48 VDC Vehicles 10 60 VDC Direct Connection page 4 34 60 144 VDC Vehicles 50 150 VDC Power Supply Screws on Side of Lid page 4 39 or 60 144 VDC Vehicles 50 150 VDC Power Supply Screws on Top of Lid page 4 43 have been completed Screen blanking is accomplished by either a Screen Blanking Box or a user supplied switch A CAUTION For installation by trained service personnel only CAUTION For proper and safe installation the input power lead to the Screen Blanking Box requires a 3 Amp maximum time delay slow blow high interrupting rating fuse Note For North America a UL Listed fuse is to be used Screen Blanking Cable Refer to Screen Control in the Windows Control Panel to configure the Thor VM2 for screen blanking When routing any additional cables for screen blanking Route the cable the shortest way possible removing any left over cable e Fuses and cabling are user supplied Therefore route these cables so they are protected from physical damage and from surfaces that might exceed the cable s rated temperature threshold e Cable should be protected from physical damage from moving parts Do not expose the cable to chemicals or oil that may cause the wiring insulation to deteriorate e Always rout
156. e Security tab screen Select a view level on the Status tab screen if desired Tap OK Press the hotkey sequence to launch AppLock and lock the configured application s oOo oN Dm oO PY oO Jo The device is now in end user mode Administration Mode Administration mode gives full access to the mobile device hardware and software configuration options The administrator must enter a valid password when a password has already been assigned before access to Admin istration mode and configuration options are allowed The administrator can configure the following options e Create change the keystroke sequence to activate administrator access e Create change the password for administrator access e Assign the name of the application or applications to lock e Select the command line of the application to lock In addition to these configuration options the administrator can view and manage the status logs of AppLock sessions Administrator default values for this device Administrator Hotkey Shift Ctrl A Note You must use an external keyboard with the Thor VM2 to enter the Administrator Hotkey Password none Application path and name none Application command line none End User Mode End user mode locks the end user into the configured application or applications The end user can still reboot and respond to dialog boxes Each application is automatically launched and runs in full screen mode when the device boot
157. e Summit Certs global parameter Copy the certificate file to the Thor VM2 Import the certificate by navigating to Start gt Control Panel gt Certificates Certificates Stores Trusted Authorities y Clas Class 3 Public Primary Certification Authority E Entrust net Certification Authority 2048 Entrust net Secure Server Certification Authorit Lists the certificates Equifax Secure Certificate Authority trusted by you GlobalSign Root CA Import View Remove Tap the Import button Import Certificate or Key Ki E From a File O From a Smart Card Reader y Card Absent Make sure From a File is selected and tap OK Select a Certificate File QJ My Documents Shortcut to Office Templates laa heeuser Name Type Certificates y Using the explorer buttons browse to the location where you copied the certificate select the certificate desired and tap OK 8 32 Root Certificate Store Do you want to ADD the following certificate to the Root Store Subject doe SUPPORT LOCAL Issuer mickey LOCAL Time Validity Thursday July 01 2004 through Tuesday July 01 2014 Serial Number 12345678 9DABCDEF 12345678 9DABCDEF Tap Yes to import the certificate Once the certificate is installed return to the proper authentication section earlier in this manual Generate a User Certificate The easiest way to get the u
158. e Thor VM2 off before attaching a cable to any port serial USB Audio CAN etc The serial connectors are industry standard RS 232 PC AT standard 9 pin D male con nector See COM1 and COM2 Connecior page 10 4 for connector pinout detail By default Pin 9 is configured to provide 5V for an external bar code scanner Pin 9 of COM1 or COM2 may also be configured to provide RI See Connect Serial Device page 4 54 for more information If a COM port is not being used for a scanner it can be used for Screen Blanking page 4 49 when the vehicle is in motion The screen blanking signal can be provided either by a Honeywell Screen Blanking Box or a user supplied switch or relay See Screen Blanking page 4 49 for information on connecting screen blanking accessories USB Connector The USB connector is a D 9 female connector located on the back of the Quick Mount Smart Dock See USB Connector page 10 5 for connector pinout detail Power the Thor VM2 off before attaching a cable to any port serial USB Audio CAN etc See Connect USB Host page 4 33 and Connect USB Client page 4 34 for more informa tion CANbus Audio Connector The CANbus Audio connector is a D 15 male connector located on the back of the Quick Mount Smart Dock The connector supports a headset adapter cable or a CANbus cable The Thor VM2 does not support connecting audio
159. e United States and or other countries SanDisk and CompactFlash are trademarks of SanDisk Corporation registered in the United States and other countries ATP is a trademark of ATP Electronics Inc Acrobat Reader 2014 with express permission from Adobe Systems Incorporated Other product names or marks mentioned in this document may be trademarks or registered trademarks of other companies and are the property of their respective owners Patents For patent information please refer to www hsmpats com Table of Contents Chapter 1 Thor VM2 Agency Information FCC Part 15 Hat dd 1 1 POC 5GHZ E 1 1 EMC Directive Heouirements EEN 1 1 Canada Industry Canada IC Notices acio cicl n 1 1 GOPETEL trios 1 2 ANATEL Brazil ura 1 2 Vehicle Power Supply Connection Safety Statement A 1 2 Liton Baton dia ree 1 2 lolo o Po O ee ee ree 1 3 A A On 1 3 Honeywell Scanning amp Mobility Product Environmental Intormation 1 3 GEMA sra ar ist 1 3 Dealer License Republic of Singapore AEN 1 4 Oman PA A ey ee es er ee ee 1 4 United Arab Emirates UAE oca Ri 1 4 Chapter 2 Getting Started OVENI EW cisne 2 1 EECHER orinar oia 2 1 E BO ec 2 1 Initial Setup for Thor VM2 usina ei 2 2 Hardware SSI E 2 2 E 2 2 Languages and Fonts E 2 2 First BOON EE 2 2 SoftWare Sol sico ita E EiS 2 2 Q ick Mount Smart Doc atada ii lcd 2 3 KEE EE 2 4 Front EE 2 4 Back View with Quick Mount Smart DOCK ooooccinncccccnnnocccccononncccnonan
160. e antenna is not damaged while the vehicle or any of its parts are moving Clean the area where the antenna is to be mounted If using an adhesive mount antenna remove the protective backing paper from the adhesive on the antenna Position the antenna on the vehicle Attach the one end of the coaxial cable to the antenna and the other end to the Mobile Net WWAN connector on the vehicle mounted Thor VM2 Use cable ties to secure the coaxial cable to the vehicle as necessary Make sure the cable is routed so it is not damaged by any moving parts of the vehicle GPS Remote Mount Antenna The external GPS antenna is an adhesive mount antenna Bee The Remote Antenna Installation Kit consists of the antenna CA and an integrated cable The remote antenna is mounted on the top of a forklift truck or other vehicle and cabled to the Thor a fF o DN ai VM2 inside the vehicle Locate a mounting position on highest point on the vehicle following these precautions e The antenna must be mounted so the antenna is not damaged while the vehicle or any of its parts are moving Clean the area where the antenna is to be mounted Remove the protective backing paper from the adhesive on the antenna and position the antenna on the vehicle Attach the connector on the coaxial cable to the GPS antenna connector on the vehicle mounted Thor VM2 Use cable ties to secure the coaxial cable to the vehicle as necessary Make sure the
161. e the Site button to add sites to each zone Internet Options General Connection Security Privacy Advanced Popups Cookies First party Cookies Third party Cookies O Accept O Accept O Block O Block O Prompt O Prompt Always allow session cookies Internet Options General Connection Security Privacy Advanced Popups Accessibility Always expand ALT text for images Anchors navigate on access key Browsing Always send URLs as UTF 8 Display a notification about every script error Enable stylesheets Enahla nane transitinns Internet Options General l Connection Security Privacy Advanced Popup Windows C Block popups Exceptions Advanced Display notification when a popup has been blocked IT Open new pages in the current window Keyboard Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Keyboard Set keypad key map keypad key repeat delay and key repeat rate Factory Default Settings Repeat character Enable Repeat Delay Short Repeat Rate Slow Keyboard Properties Repeat Enable character repeat D Repeat delay A Repeat rate Long Short Slow Tap here and hold down a key to test License Viewer Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt License Viewer Use this option to view software license registration details and se
162. e the cable so that it does not interfere with safe operation and maintenance of the vehicle e Provide mechanical support for the cable by securing it to the vehicle structure at approximately one foot intervals taking care not to over tighten and pinch conductors or penetrate outer cable jacket Honeywell Screen Blanking Box Cable An optional Honeywell Screen Blanking Box Cable is available E DB9 Female Function with Screen Blanking Box Wire color mes fosa lt RS 7 RTS Connected to Screen Blanking Box unswitched side Black see note II 8 CTS Connected to Screen Blanking Box switched side Gray see note Note Wire colors only apply to optional Honeywell Screen Blanking Box Cable VM1080CABLE Wire colors may vary in a user supplied cable The optional Honeywell Screen Blanking Box Cable VM1080CABLE is installed as follows 1 Connect the gray wire of the cable to the switched side of the Screen Blanking Box 2 Connect the black wire of the cable to the unswitched side of the Screen Blanking Box 3 Connect the D9 serial connector to either COM1 or COM2 serial port on the Thor VM2 Quick Mount Smart Dock User Supplied Cable A user supplied cable can be used as well Pins 7 and 8 must be connected as detailed below No other pins are to be connected PIN 5 PIN 1 y SS E PINS PIN7 DB9 Female Function with Screen Blanking Box Function with Switch 7 RTS Connected to Scr
163. e used when an external keyboard is not installed and includes the parts on this page A Thor VM2 mounting kit can be used when an external keyboard is installed includes the parts on this page plus the parts on the next page In addition to the kits below individual RAM mounting components are also available Each mounting kit contains RAM Ball Size D for back of Thor VM2 Quick Mount Smart Dock with hardware screws and washers to attach RAM ball to dock RAM Arm Size D length varies by kit selected One of three mounting options e RAM Ball mount Size D may include 3 cone washers or RAM Clamp mount Size D or RAM Plate mount with RAM Ball Size D with Hardware cone washers and nuts to attach Ball to Plate Additionally the kits for the Thor VM2 with an integrated keyboard include Thor VM2 Keyboard Mounting Bracket RAM Ball Size C with hardware nuts to attach RAM ball to Keyboard Mounting Bracket RAM Arm Size C Keyboard Mounting Plate with RAM Ball Size C and hardware screws and washers to attack Keyboard to Mounting Plate Procedure RAM Mount Assembly Equipment Needed Sockets screwdriver and a Torque wrench capable of measuring to 50 inch pounds 5 64 56 N m Note Torquing tool is not supplied by Honeywell Tools needed to attach the RAM Clamp Mount to the vehicle are not supplied by Honeywell Torque Measurement You will need a torqui
164. eSync indicator on the host remains gray Solution 1 ActiveSync icon on the PC does not turn green after connecting USB cable from Thor VM2 1 Disconnect Thor VM2 USB cable from PC 2 Suspend Resume or Restart the Thor VM2 3 In ActiveSync gt File gt Connection Settings on PC disable Allow USB Connections and click OK 4 Re enable Allow USB Connections on the PC and click OK 5 Reconnect USB cable from Thor VM2 to PC Solution 2 The host doesn t know you are trying to connect May mean a bad cable with no control lines connected or an incompatible baud rate Try the connection again with a known good cable HSM Connect HSM Connect allows a user to view the Thor VM2 screen remotely from a PC using an ActiveSync connection Requirement ActiveSync version 4 5 or higher must be resident on a Windows XP desktop laptop host computer Windows Mobile Device Center version 6 1 or higher is required for a Windows Vista Windows 7 desktop laptop computer Note For readability in this section ActiveSync will be used in instructions and explanations If you have a Windows Vista or Windows 7 operating system on your desktop laptop replace ActiveSync with Windows Mobile Device Center ActiveSync is already installed on the Thor VM2 The Thor VM2 is preconfigured to establish a USB ActiveSync connection to a host PC when the USB cable is attached to the Thor VM2 and the host PC Installation 1 2 3 Connect the Thor VM2 t
165. echanical support for the cable by securing it to the vehicle structure at approximately one foot inter vals taking care not to over tighten and pinch conductors or penetrate the outer cable jacket 15 Connect the watertight connector end of the power cable to the Thor VM2 Quick Mount Smart Dock power connector by aligning the connector pins to the power connector push down on the watertight connector and twist it to fasten securely Flip the power switch on the back of the dock to On 16 Secure the power cable to the Thor VM2 using the Strain Relief Cable Clamps page 4 32 17 Place Thor VM2 in the Dock page 4 18 18 If using the Screen Blanking page 4 49 feature install the screen blanking box or switch 19 Press the Power Switch page 3 6 on the back of the Thor VM2 dock 20 Press the Power Button page 3 6 on the front of the Thor VM2 to turn on the Thor VM2 Once installation is complete remember to start the Thor VM2 and select the desired Power Configuration Mode to enable Auto On or Manual Control of the Thor VM2 boot up process See the Power Configuration Mode page 5 80 control panel Note Ignition control is not available for trucks over 6OVDC Wiring Diagram Existing Circuitry on Vehicle Quick Mount Smart Dock Forklift Battery Main Switch User supplied serial Vo Vo cable for optional COM1 or COM2 screen blanking Connector connection on Dock Fuse See see below Warning stateme
166. een Blanking Box unswitched side Connected to Switch 8 CTS Connected to Screen Blanking Box switched side Connected to Switch The user supplied cable is installed as follows 1 Connect the wire from Pin 8 of the cable to the switched side of the Screen Blanking Box or to a user sup plied switch 2 Connect the wire from Pin 7 of the cable to the unswitched side of the Screen Blanking Box or to a user supplied switch 3 Connect the D9 serial connector to either COM1 or COM2 serial port on the Thor VM2 Quick Mount Smart Dock Screen Blanking Box Screen Blanking Connection Box Terminal 12 xxV Input from vehicle motion sensing circuitry Please refer to label on Screen Blanking Box for allowable voltage input range DC E These two terminals are for connecting a serial cable GND e f using an optional Honeywell screen blanking cable VM1080CABLE connect the gray wire to the switched side of the connection and connect the black wire to the unswitched side Unswitched Switched ls If using a user supplied cable the cable must be constructed so that Pin 7 RTS connects to switched side of the connection and Pin 8 CTS connects to the unswitched side It is assumed that the motion sensing circuitry in the illustrations below is powered by internal vehicle circuitry Please refer to the appropriate illustration below for Screen Blanking Box wiring diagrams CAUTION Do not exceed the maximum input voltage
167. efer to www honeywellaidc com environmental for the RoHS REACH WEEE information CE Mark The CE marking on the product indicates that this device is in conformity with the following directives e 1995 5 EC R amp TTE e 2011 65 EU RoHS Recast In addition complies to 2006 95 EC Low Voltage Directive when shipped with recommended power supply European contact Hand Held Products Europe BV Nijverheidsweg 9 13 5627 BT Eindhoven The Netherlands Honeywell shall not be liable for use of our product with equipment i e power supplies personal computers etc that is not CE marked and does not comply with the Low Voltage Directive This device complies with the following harmonized European Standards Health EN63211 2008 Safety EN60950 1 2006 A1 2010 A11 2009 A12 2011 EMC EN301 489 1 V1 9 2 2011 EN301 489 17 V2 1 1 2009 Radio EN300 328 V1 7 1 2006 The following CE marking is valid for EU harmonized telecommunications products Part C 05600 mr EN300328 V1 7 1 2006 EN301893 V1 6 1 2011 EN6231 1 2008 EN301489 1 V1 9 2 2011 EN301489 17 V2 1 1 2009 EN55022 EN55024 2010 Dealer License Republic of Singapore Republic of Singapore Dealer License Number DA104328 complies with IDA Standards Complies with IDA Standards DA104328 WWAN is not available in Singapore Oman Oman Compliance Mark OMAN TRA i R 1296 13 D090016 United Arab Emirates UAE
168. either 60 or 72VDC specified on the Screen Blanking Box label when using this configuration MOTION CIRCUITRY Vi GND 3A fuse To Vo on vehicle Le Negative battery terminal To pin 7 of COM1 or COM2 To pin 8 of COM1 or COM2 Note The black and gray wire colors in the illustration only apply to the optional Honeywell Screen Blanking Box Cable VM1080CABLE The wire colors may be different in a user supplied cable Screen Blanking with Switch In applications where it is impractical to use the screen blanking box due to vehicle voltage or lack of a motion sensing signal screen blanking can be controlled via a user supplied switch or relay that provides an electrical conductive connection on vehicle motion To pins 7 and 8 of COM1 or COM2 port on dock Pins 7 and 8 must be connected as shown in the illustration above No other pins are to be connected External AC DC Power Supply The optional external AC DC power supply is for use in environments such as an office where DC power is not avail able Note The Honeywell approved AC DC Power Supply and Adapter Cable are only intended for use in a 25 C 77 F maximum ambient temperature environment In North America this unit is intended for use with a UL Listed ITE power supply with output rated 10 60 VDC mini mum 15W Outside North America this unit is intended for use with an IEC
169. el to the floor e If using two antennas they must be mounted at least 12 inches 304 8mm apart Attach the female connector of the coaxial cable to the antenna connector on the vehicle mounted Thor VM2 Secure the whip antenna to the mounting bracket Connect the antenna cable to the whip antenna Use cable ties to secure the coaxial cable to the vehicle as necessary Make sure the cable is routed so it is not damaged by any moving parts of the vehicle Connect the cable to the antenna connector Wi Fi Main or Wi Fi Aux on the Thor VM2 If only one antenna is used be sure to connect it to the Wi Fi Main connector Repeat the steps above for the second 802 11 antenna WAN Remote Mount Antenna The WAN remote mount antenna can be either a magnetic mount or an adhesive mount antenna Magnetic Mount WAN Antenna Adhesive Mount WAN Antenna E ri To extension cable To extension cable To antenna Mm A es To antenna EE 8 connector on z computer To antenna connector on computer The Remote Antenna Installation Kit consists of the WAN antenna and an extension cable The remote antenna is mounted on the top of a forklift truck or other vehicle and cabled to the Thor VM2 inside the vehicle 1 a fF eo DP Locate a mounting position on highest point on the vehicle following these precautions e The antenna must be mounted so th
170. elates to the general desktop Windows PC Internet Explorer options Tap the button to access Internet Explorer Help Start Menu The following list represents a typical factory default program installation Your system may contain different items from those shown below based on the software and hardware options purchased Communication Connect Start or Stop FTP Server Command Prompt eXpress Scan Internet Explorer File Viewers JETCET PDF Viewer Office 2003 Excel Viewer Office 2003 PowerPoint Viewer Office 2003 Word Viewer Microsoft WordPad Remote Desktop Connection Honeywell RFTerm Settings Summit Transcriber Wavelink Avalanche Windows Explorer Stores Network communication options Run this command after setting up a connection Begin end connection to FTP server The command line interface in a separate window Option Requires Wavelink Avalanche option eXpress Config Access web pages on the Internet Intranet View Adobe PDF Documents View Excel 2003 and compatible documents View PowerPoint 2003 and compatible documents View Word 2003 and compatible documents Opens an ASCII notepad Log on to a Windows Terminal Server Option Terminal emulation application Access to all Control Panels a shortcut to the Network and Dialup Control Panel and access to Taskbar options Set Summit radio network parameters Enter data using the stylus on the touch screen Option Remote management for networked devices
171. elect the Default profile from the pull down menu Make any desired parameter changes as described in the applicable following section determined by network security type and click the Commit button to save the changes IMPORTANT Remember to click the Commit button after making changes to ensure the changes are saved Many versions of the SCU display a reminder if the Commit button is not clicked before an attempt is made to close or browse away from the tab in focus if there are unsaved changes If changes are made to the stored credentials click Commit to save those changes first before making any additional changes No Security To connect to a wireless network with no security make sure the following profile options are used 1 Enter the SSID of the Access Point assigned to this profile 2 Set EAP Type to None 3 Set Encryption to None 4 Set Auth Type to Open Summit Client Utility oK Main Profile Status Diags Global Profile Default y New Rename Delete Scan E Radio Encryption EAP type Japa None Is none y WEP keys PSKs Credentials Save Changes Commit Once configured click the Commit button Ensure the correct Active Profile is selected on the Main tab and warmboot The SCU Main tab shows the device is asso ciated after the radio connects to the network WEP To connect using WEP make sure the following profile options are used 1 Enter the SSID
172. element on the screen with the tip of the stylus then remove the stylus from the screen Firmly press the stylus into the stylus holder when the stylus is not in use Using a stylus is similar to moving the mouse pointer then left clicking icons on a desktop computer screen Using the stylus to tap icons on the touch screen is the basic action that can e Open applications e Choose menu commands e Select options in dialog boxes or drop down boxes e Drag the slider in a scroll bar e Select text by dragging the stylus across the text e Place the cursor in a text box prior to typing in data e Place the cursor in a text box prior to retrieving data using a scanner imager A right click can be simulated by touching the touch screen with the stylus and holding it for a short time A stylus replacement kit is available Setup Terminal Emulation Parameters Note The instructions below are for Honeywell RFTerm Ifa different terminal emulation software is installed on your Thor VM2 refer to the documentation for that software Before you make a host connection you will at a minimum need to know e the alias name or IP address Host Address and the port number Telnet Port of the host system to properly set up your host session 1 Make sure the mobile client network settings are configured and functional If you are connecting over wireless LAN 802 11x make sure your mobile client is communicating with the Access Point 2 Fro
173. emain at 8 none and 1 respectively 7 Under the Call Options tab be sure to turn off Wait for dial tone since a direct connection will not have a dial tone Set the timeout parameter default is 5 seconds Tap OK 8 TCP IP Settings should not need to change from defaults Tap the Finish button to create the new connection 9 Close the Remote Networking window 10 To activate the new connection select Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt PC Connection and tap the Change Connection button 11 Select the new connection Tap OK twice 12 Close the Control Panel window 13 Connect the desktop PC to the mobile device with the appropriate cable 14 Click the desktop Connect icon to test the new connection You can activate the connection by double tapping on the specific connection icon in the Remote Networking window but this will only start an RAS Remote Access Services session and does not start ActiveSync properly Network Capture Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Network Capture Note Verify the Date Time page 5 56 before using the logging utilities to ensure meaningful data The Network Capture panels provide configuration options for logging utilities Two types of logging are configurable e Netlog is a Windows CE utility that monitors network traffic Netlog creates a CAP file that can be read using Microsoft Windows Network Monitor or any compatible tool that supports CAP files e NDISLog m
174. ent 1 2 sec on 1 1 2 sec off UPS Status LED The color of the UPS LED identifies the charge level while the behavior of the LED identifies the charging state Charge Level LED Color Status Fully charged gt 90 e Less than fully charged but more than 2 minutes runtime remaining e Out of Safe Charging Temperature Range page 3 3 Charging only occurs between approximately 10 C and 35 C ambient temperature e No UPS present e Charging Timeout page 3 3 Not fully charged after 4 or 8 hours depending on software revision Green Amber Red Low battery less than 2 minutes runtime until shutdown Charging State LED Behavior Status Slow Blink 1 sec on 3 sec off Fast Blink 1 2 sec on 1 2 sec off On Off Unit is off or is in Suspend Charging UPS supplying power and discharging Neither charging or discharging SSD Solid State Drive LED LED Behavior Status Flashing Green SSD read or write activity Off No SSD read or write activity Connection LEDs WWAN LED Sg O y Wi Fi LED gt Ou O Bluetooth LED a WWAN LED LED Behavior Status Solid Green Indicates a WWAN connection to a network Off Indicates no WWAN connection Wi Fi LED LED Behavior Status Solid Green Indicates a connection with an IP address to an Access Point Off Indicates no connection to an Access Point Bluetooth LED LED
175. entries in the Key Sequence box Click OK to save the result and close the control panel Remap a Key to a Special Function 1 2 3 Select the modifier key from the Modifier Mode options Select the key to be remapped from the Key pull down list Select the special function from the remapped key from the Remapped Key pull down list Special functions that can be assigned are Toggle SIP soft keyboard state between displayed and hidden Toggle touch screen state between enabled and disabled Toggle integrated keyboard backlight state between on and off Launch the touch screen calibration utility Click OK to save the result and close the control panel Remap a Key to Launch an Application 1 om mF oO DN Select the modifier key from the Modifier Mode options Select the key to be remapped from the Key pull down list Select Launch App1 4 from the remapped key from the Remapped Key pull down list Click on the LaunchApp page 5 86 tab Make sure the EXE radio button is selected In the text box App1 4 corresponding to the number selected for Launch App1 4 enter the application to launch If any parameters are needed for the application click on the OPT radio button This clears the text box though the application name is saved Enter the desired parameters in the appropriate text box Click OK to save the result and close the control panel If the KeyMap tab is accessed again the application plus any specified p
176. er installation file HSM_ENABLER CAB older software loads may use LXE_ENABLER CAB instead is loaded on the Thor VM2 by Honeywell however the device is not configured to launch the Enabler installation file auto matically The installation application must be run manually the first time Avalanche is used After installation the Enabler runs as a background application monitoring for updates This behavior can be modified by accessing the Avalanche Update Settings panel through the Enabler interface This behavior can be modified by accessing the Avalanche Update Settings panel through the Enabler Interface The RMU CE CAB file is placed on the device during manufacturing in the System RMU folder During the Enabler installation process the Enabler checks for the RMU CE CAB file in the System folder e If present it assumes the RMU CE CAB file is already installed and continues If the file RMU CE CAB file is not present it looks for the file in the System RMU folder e If present the Enabler copies the file to the System folder and installs it At this point the OS will automatically install the Remote Management Utility RMU after the Thor VM2 reboots Enabler Uninstall Process To remove the Avalanche Enabler from the Thor VM2 1 Delete the Avalanche folder located in the System directory 2 Warm boot the Thor VM2 The Avalanche folder cannot be deleted while the Enabler is running See Stop the Enabler Service page 7 2
177. er name password and domain provided by your Domain network administrator Enter user name password and domain to be used when logging into network resources 5 76 Password Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Password Use this panel to set Thor VM2 user access to control panels and power up password properties Important This password must be entered before performing a Load Factory Defaults If entering a power on or screen saver password does not allow you to disable this password protection or perform a Load Factory Defaults contact Technical Assistance page 11 1 Factory Default Settings Password Blank Enter password at Power On Disabled Enter password at Remote Desktop Screen Saver Disabled Password Properties Password Settings Password A Password Confirm password Enable Password Protection C t Po O ser r On e The password and password settings are saved during a warm boot and a restart e The screensaver password affects the Remote Desktop screensaver only e After a password is assigned and saved each time a Settings gt Control Panel option is selected the user will be required to enter the password before the Control Panel will open e The screensaver password is the same as the power on password They are not set independently e A screensaver password cannot be created without first enabling the Enable password protection at
178. er reboot Reboot Now Reboot Later Reboot Now The Thor VM2immediately reboots and the new screen rotation is in effect after the reboot Reboot Later The current screen rotation remains in effect until theThor VM2 is rebooted by the user at a later time The new screen rotation is in effect after the reboot To cancel the upcoming screen rotation after Reboot Later has been selected it is necessary to access the Screen Rota tion control panel and select a different rotation value Note Screen rotation does not affect any screens before the operating system loads Therefore the BIOS and startup screens are not rotated Stylus Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Stylus Use this control panel option to set stylus double tap sensitivity properties and calibrate the Thor VM2 touch panel when needed Stylus Properties Double Tap Calibration Double tap this grid to set the double tap sensitivity for both the speed and physical distance between taps Double tap this icon to test your double tap settings If this icon doesn t change adjust your settings using the grid above Stylus Properties Double Tap Calibration may need to recalibrate your screen Recalibration involves tapping the center of a target If you miss the center keep the stylus on the screen slide it over the target s center and then lift the stylus To start tap Recalibrat
179. er screen The default is Basic Output e Basic Output General information is displayed e Critical Critical errors are displayed in addition to those above Error Communication or configuration problems are displayed in addition to those above e Warning Possible operation problems are displayed in addition to those above e Info Operational information is displayed in addition to those above e Debug The most detailed list is displayed Display Update Window Display Avalanche Update Settings ok Display Taskbar Execution Scan Config 4 At startup Har Screen y On connect as is e Normal Jas is v Update Window Display The user interface for the Enabler can be configured to dynamically change based on the status of the Thor VM2 connection with the Mobile Device Server At startup Default is Half Screen Options are Half screen Hidden or Full screen On connect Default is As Is Options are As is Half screen or Full screen Default is As Is Options are Half screen Hidden or As Is Taskbar For best results use AppLock configured via the Administration page 5 19 control panel to manage the taskbar AppLock is resident on each mobile device Avalanche Update Settings ok x Taskbar Execution Scan Config Shorteu Ar Note These settings are only applied to the taskbar if the Enabler UI is active Display State Normal O Hidden O Lo
180. er volume can be adjusted via the Thor VM2 keypad 1 Press the Blue key to enter Blue mode 2 Press the P1 key to increase speaker volume or the P2 key to decrease speaker volume 3 Press the Blue key to exit Blue mode The current volume level can be viewed on the Mixer page 5 70 control panel This control panel can also be used to adjust speaker volume Power Up If a USB drive such as a thumb drive is attached to the Thor VM2 the device attempts to boot from the USB drive and A cannot Please remove the USB drive and power up the Thor VM2 again The Quick Mount Smart Dock has a power switch on the back e ee esa e El bos 0 S O The Or side of this rocker switch has a raised bump to allow the state of the switch to be determined when the switch may not be easily viewed for example after the dock is mounted in a vehicle After external power has been connected
181. erial port is not present or available COM port settings can be verified using the bar code wedge panels on the Thor VM2 The wireless connection is made using the default wireless radio interface on the mobile device therefore the Thor VM2 must be actively communicating with the network for this method to succeed If a Mobile Device Server is found the Enabler automatically attempts to apply all wireless and network settings from the active profile The Enabler also automatically downloads and processes all available packages If the Enabler does not automatically detect the Mobile Device Server the IP address of the Mobile Device Server can be entered on the Connect tab of the Enabler setup See Enabler Configuration page 7 4 for details Mobile Device Wireless and Network Settings Once the connection to the Mobile Device Server is established the Thor VM2 Enabler attempts to apply all network and wireless settings contained in the active profile The success of the application of settings is dependent upon the local configuration of control parameters for the Enabler These local parameters cannot be overridden from the Avalanche MC Console The default Enabler adapter control settings are e Manage network settings enabled e Use Avalanche network profile enabled e Manage wireless settings disabled To configure the Avalanche Enabler management of the network and wireless settings 1 Open the Enabler Settings Panels by t
182. ership with the last one of the two hosts is also deleted The host retains the random numbers and unique names of all devices having a partner ship with it Two clients cannot have a partnership with the same host if they have the same name Control Panel gt System gt Device Name If the reset mobile device tries to reestablish the partnership with the same host PC a new random number is generated for the mobile device and ActiveSync will insist the unique name of the mobile device be changed If the mobile device is associated with a second host changing the name will destroy that partnership as well This can cause some confusion when re establish ing partnerships with hosts ActiveSync Help ActiveSync on the host says that a device is trying to connect but it cannot identify it Verify the dongle cable is attached to the Thor VM2 Disconnect and reconnect the cable from the PC Check that the correct connection is selected See Reset and Loss of Host Re connection above ActiveSync indicator on the host disc in the toolbar tray turns green and spins as soon as you connect the cable before tapping the Connect icon or REPLLOG EXE in the Windows directory One or more control lines are tied together incorrectly This is usually a cable problem ActiveSync indicator on the host turns green and spins but connection never occurs Check that the correct connection is selected or Incorrect or broken data lines in cable Activ
183. ertificate Se Request a Certificate Select the certificate type User Certificate Or submit an advanced certificate request Click on the advanced certificate request link Microsoft Certificate Services Advanced Certificate Request The policy of the CA determines the types of certificates you can request Click one of the following options to Create and submit a request to this CA Submit a certificate request by using a base 64 encoded CMC or PKCS 10 file or submit a renewal request by using a base 64 encoded PKCS 7 file Request a certificate for a smart card on behalf of another user by using the smart card certificate enrollment station Note You must have an enrollment agent certificate to submit a request on of another user Click on the Create and submit a request to this CA link Microsoft Certificate S Advanced Certificate Request Certificate Template User k Key Options Create new key set O Use existing key set CSP Microsoft Enhanced Cryptographic Provider v1 0 Key Usage Exchange Ge Min 384 SN Key Size 11024 max 16384 common key sizes 512 1024 2048 4096 8192 16384 Automatic key container name O User specified key Y Mark keys as exportable contalnername Export keys to file Full path name C Enable strong private key protection C Store certificate in the local computer certificate store Stores the certificate in the l
184. es are assigned to their appropriate CTRL code sequence when the bar codes are sent in Character mode The wedge provides a one to one mapping of control characters to their equivalent control character sequence of keystrokes If control characters are translated the translation is performed on the bar code data prefix and suffix before the keystrokes are simulated Parameters Translate All This option is grayed unless the user has Send Key Messages WEDGE on the Main tab selected In Key Message mode when this option is enabled control characters embedded in a scanned bar code are translated to their equivalent control key keystroke sequence 13 0x0d is translated to Control M keystrokes as if the user pressed the CTRL SHIFT and m keys on the keypad Additionally when Translate All is disabled any control code which has a keystroke equivalent enter tab escape backspace etc is output as a keystroke Any control code without a keystroke equivalent is dropped Character This is a drop down combo box that contains the control character name Refer to the Character drop down box for the list of control characters and their names When a character name is selected from the drop down box the default text Ignore drop is shown and highlighted in the Replacement edit control Ignore drop is highlighted so the user can type a replace ment if the control character is not to be ignored Once the user types any character i
185. es a failure for LOG_ERROR name switching into user mode Read registry failure Cmd AppCommanoLine registry entry is missing or empty This is not considered an LOG_ERROR Line error since command line information is not necessary to launch and lock the ap plication Read registry failure Inter The Internet registry entry is missing or empty This is not considered an error LOG_ERROR net since the Internet value is not necessary to launch and lock the application Registering Backdoor MSG The AppLock system communicates with the keyboard hook via a user defined message Both AppLock exe and Kbdhook dll register the message at initializa tion LOG_ PROCESSING Registering Hotkey MSG The AppLock system communicates with the keyboard hook via a user defined LOG_ message Both Applock exe and Kbdhook dll register the message at initializa PROCESSING tion Registry read failure at re The registry has to be read when entering user mode is the AppName is missing LOG_ERROR enter user mode This user mode entry is attempted at boot and after a hotkey switch when the administrator has closed the application being locked or has changed the appli cation name or command line 10 10 Message Explanation and or corrective action Level Registry read failure at re enter user mode The registry has to be read when switching into user mode This is because the LOG_ERROR administrator can change the set
186. ettings are also saved when a new Symbology is selected from the Symbology drop down list Symbology lok x Code ID None el Symbology l Clear M able Min po Max far IT Leading gt L code 10 _ Trailing i Barcode Data Add Prefix _ Suffix l The order in which these settings are processed are e Min Max e Code ID e Leading Trailing e Bar Code Data e Prefix Suffix Note When Enable Code ID is set to None on the Data Options tab and when All is selected in the Symbology field Enable and Strip Code ID on the Symbology panel are grayed and the user is not allowed to change them to prevent deactivating the scanner completely When All is selected in the Symbology field and the settings are changed the settings in this dialog become the defaults used unless overwritten by the settings for individual symbologies This is also true for Custom IDs where the code IDs to be stripped are specified by the user Note In Custom mode on the Data Options tab any Code IDs not specified by the user will not be stripped because they will not be recognized as Code IDs If a specific symbology s settings have been configured a star will appear next to it in the Symbology drop down box so the user can tell which symbologies have been modified from their defaults If a particular symbology has been configured the entire set of parameters from that symbologies screen are in effect for that sy
187. external power supply or is operating from the UPS bat tery and the power button is pressed the Thor VM2 is in the On mode In this mode the keypad touch screen and any attached peripherals such as a scanner function normally The display remains on until the backlight timer if enabled expires User Idle Backlight Off Mode D1 Backlight is dimmed but display is readable The Thor VM2 transitions to this mode from On after the User Idle time out period has passed without a primary even occurring System Idle Display Off Mode D2 Backlight and display are off The status LED is solid green The Thor VM2 transitions to this mode from User Idle after the System Idle timeout period has passed without a primary event occurring Suspend mode D3 All devices that are not configured as wakeup events are powered off The status LED is blinking green if external power is connected and off if external power is not connected The Thor VM2 transitions to this mode from System Idle after the Suspend timeout period has passed without a primary event occurring By default power is turned off to the USB port when the Thor VM2 is in Suspend The Thor VM2 can be configured to provide power to the USB port in Suspend using the Options page 5 74 control panel Additionally the power button can be used to enter or exit Suspend mode e Ifthe Thor VM2 is On pressing the power button immediately transitions the unit to Suspend e Ifthe Thor VM2 is
188. f these manipulations Bar Code Symbology Raw Scanner Data Resulting Data EAN 128 bbb1234567890xxx EAN 128 bbb11234567890xxx EAN 128 lt rejected gt too short EAN 13 ccc E04567890yyy EAN 13 ccc E0234567890yyy EAN 13 ccc E0yyy 12 5 lt rejected gt too long 12 5 ddd7890zzz 12 5 dddzzz 12 5 ddd45zzz Code 93 lt rejected gt disabled Code 93 lt rejected gt disabled Code 39 aaa4567890www Code 39 full ASCII aaa1234567890www Code 39 A4 lt rejected gt too short Note Rejected bar codes generate a bad scan beep In some cases the receipt of data from the scanner triggers a good scan beep from the external scanner and then the rejection of scanned bar code data by the processing causes a bad scan beep on the same data Processing Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Data Collection gt Processing tab The Processing tab contains a user configurable key delay that applies to scanned bar codes as they are input when Remote Desktop is the application with the input focus Factory Default Settings Enable buffered key output Enabled Same buffer limit characters Delay between key buffers 75 ms Note Settings on this panel have no effect when RFTerm is the application with the input focus Data Collection Main com come Data Options Processing about Buffered Key Output M Enable buffered key output Same buffer limit faz Delay between buffers be m
189. for the desired authentication be sure to check the Use MS store check box after checking the Validate server checkbox 4 The default is to use all certificates in the store If this is OK skip to the last step 5 Otherwise to select a specific certificate click on the Browse button Choose certificate x C Use full trusted store Issued By Thawte Server CA Thawte Premium Server CA Secure Server Certification Authority GTE CyberTrust Root GTE CyberTrust Global Root Select 6 Uncheck the Use full trusted store checkbox v 7 Select the desired certificate and click the Select button to return the selected certificate to the CA Cert text box 8 Click OK to exit the Credentials screen and then Commit to save the profile changes Configuring the Profile Use the instructions in this section to complete the entries on the Profile tab according to the type of wireless security used by your network The instructions that follow are the minimum required to successfully connect to a network Your system may require more parameters than are listed in these instructions Please see your system administrator for complete information about your network and its wireless security requirements To begin the configuration process On the Main tab click the Admin Login button and enter the password e If using a single profile edit the default profile with the parameters for your network S
190. g Assembly ccceeceeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeees 4 29 Procedure U Bracket ASsembly oooooconnniccccccnnnoncnnononnccnnnnnnnnnnnnncnnnennnnnnnnernnnnnnnnnnas 4 29 beten E 4 29 MGUPIING POSING INS nd dae a ee asa au Sales 4 30 Step 1 Install U Bracket to Vehicle ooooooccccnnnocccnnnonccccnnonnccnnnnnnnnnnnnarernnnannnnnnn 4 30 EE Remove RUE 4 31 Step 3 Attach Adapter Bracket 4 31 Connect EE egene eege ee ee eeler de Ee 4 32 Strain Relief Cable Camps 4 32 Connect e EE 4 33 Power Cable Ett 4 33 12 48 VDC Vehicles 10 60 VDC Direct Connechon 4 34 Power Cable Identification sei eneren ali 4 34 60 144 VDC Vehicles 50 150 VDC Power Supply Screws on Side of Lid 4 39 Power Cable Identification coomoooocccccncnononoooccccnnnnnononannnnnnnnconnnnnannnnnnncnnnnnnnnos 4 40 60 144 VDC Vehicles 50 150 VDC Power Supply Screws on Top of Lid 4 43 Power Cable ldentiicationis nia dci 4 44 VX6 VX7 Adapter Cable viii adi 4 47 Thor VX8 Thor VX9 Adapter Cable Ru 4 48 IER ln E 4 49 External AC DC Power Supply viii aia eet 4 52 Connect USB Keyboard tia A Ad a 4 53 Connect USB e EE 4 53 Connect USB EEN 4 54 Connect Serial Eege EENS EAE AKEE 4 54 Connect a Tethered Sanne ccccccccesssssstseceeeessssscceeseneessssssserssseesseeesssssssecees 4 54 Connect Headset Cables iicimasiersciiaianl seule gedet odds 4 55 Adjust Headset Microphone and Secure Cable AAA 4 55 C
191. g greater than 96VDC e For 108VDC input use a 4A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 108VDC e For 120VDC input use a 4A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 120VDC e For 132VDC input use a 3A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 132VDC e For 144VDC input use a 3A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 144VDC Note For North America a UL Listed fuse is to be used VX6 VX7 Adapter Cable An adapter cable is available to attach the Thor VM2 to a vehicle previously equipped with a VX6 VX7 DC power cable The adapter cable has a 5 pin connector to match with the VX6 VX7 power supply cable on one end and a 6 pin con nector to match to the Thor VM2 on the other end This section assumes the VX6 VX7 power cable is properly con nected to vehicle power Refer to the VX6 or VX7 Vehicle Mounting Reference Guide for details CAUTION Because the Thor supports 10 60 VDC power input verify input voltages before using this adapt er cable with an existing VX6 or VX7 power connection installation To Power Connector on Dock is e Hf TD To VX6 VX7 Power Supply Cable When this adapter cable is used there is no provision for an ignition switch input Therefore the vehicle ignition moni toring function is not available when using this cable Connect to VX6 VX7 Power Cable 1 o oO NO o Connect the cable to the Thor VM2 power
192. ght see note Automatic Brightness Control Automatic brightness control is only available on the Thor VM2 Enable automatic brightness Disabled control Low to medium light level 25 Medium to high light level 75 Screen Control v0 2 Screen Blanking Blackout IT Enable screen blanking Screen on delay ms COM Port Current Level LCD Brightness bon Automatic Brightness Control for outdoor display only Enable automatic brightness control Low to mediurn light level 9 e Medium to high light level 96 Cancel OK Screen Blanking See Screen Blanking page 4 49 for the hardware necessary for screen blanking A Do not enable Screen Blanking until the cable is properly connected to the specified COM port Screen blanking allows the Thor VM2 display to automatically be turned off whenever the vehicle is in motion When the Thor VM2 display is off due to vehicle motion the integrated keypad backlight remains on Screen blanking requires a user supplied cable properly connected as shown below To enable blanking check the Enable screen blanking checkbox The default is disabled Use the Screen on delay to specify the period of time in ms milliseconds between when the vehicle stops and the Thor VM2 screen turns on For example use the delay if the switch end of the cable is attached to the vehicle s accel erator pedal Release of the accelerator may
193. gt Exit or clicking on the X in the upper right hand corner to close the application then disconnect the ActiveSync cable Enabler Installation and Configuration Introduction This section discusses Honeywell supported features with Wavelink Avalanche Mobile Device Servers This section is split into three basic areas e Installation e User Interface e Enabler Configuration Installation To use the Wavelink Avalanche MC System the following items are required e A desktop or laptop PC on which to install the Avalanche MC Console e Adesktop or laptop PC on which to install the Avalanche Mobile Device Server this can be the same PC where the Avalanche MC Console is installed e Wavelink Avalanche MC Console 4 2 or later e A Wavelink Device License for each client device To use Avalanche Remote Control the follow additional items are required e Wavelink Remote Control plug in 2 0 or later e A Wavelink Remote Control License for each client device Installing the Enabler on Mobile Devices Supported devices have the Avalanche Enabler installation files loaded but not installed on the mobile device when it is shipped The installation files are located in the System folder on Windows devices Note If the user is NOT using Wavelink Avalanche to manage their mobile device s the Enabler should not be installed on the mobile device s Doing so results in unnecessary delays when booting the device The Avalanche Enabl
194. h 5 7 Wavelink Avalanche Enabler Optional 5 7 Internet Explore ita a A a teed anata 5 7 Start Men action od 5 8 ell Tue Le 5 8 en EE 5 8 Start FTP Server Stop FTP Server ANEREN 5 8 A a a a Sn 5 9 TS sas EE 5 9 Command Pro Paros shee deters E 5 9 EXPIOsS E 5 9 I t rnet EE 5 9 Meda PIAY Ole aa E tan Gtearecg Sap act enn omen eee neers 5 9 File ACEN 5 10 Microsoft elt Le DEE 5 10 Remote Desktop COnmmeCtion sissscceccinctevescuctenvesseteeaeecoth late detiene 5 10 Settings EE 5 10 TAS EE 5 10 Windows e 5 10 BEE EE 5 11 A ee Eege 5 11 ee UE 5 11 Expand Control Panel EE 5 11 Clear Contents of Document Folder cceceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeceeeeeteneeeeeeeenaeeees 5 11 BR ue ee EE EE 5 11 Thor VM2 OS UVC beet eege eegene el trees eatadeeenanaet te 5 13 INTRODUCTIONS e Sebeueeieh cei icibivciesin bers dd 5 13 A Eed 5 13 a LEE 5 13 ele era str o E ios ii 5 14 Accessing the BIOS Setup ninia dicas 5 14 BOLO EE 5 14 Exiting BIOS S E 5 14 Control Panel eege eet e eeneg a 5 15 PSO UI EE EE 5 17 Ee a 5 17 AIRO TO 5 17 Network Prie a a a aa EA e a a A a A 5 18 let EE 5 18 Administrati M ici 5 19 Setup a New Device resto tdi tilda 5 20 Administration Mode eee ee e i ae e a Eaa eiaa 5 20 End User Mode ie ista a e as 5 21 Passwords iia ias 5 21 End User Switching Technique cesar dia 5 21 Application Configuration D 5 22 eelere EE 5 23 O Et 5 26 OPHION EE 5 27 UE NO 5 27 APPLock OID EE 5 2
195. h On e Thor VM2 is already mounted to a dock and external power is applied to the dock Result The Thor VM2 boots when the Power button is pressed Once booted the Thor VM2 follows the AC DC power scheme with timers reset after bootup Thor VM2 is On Conditions The Thor VM2 is On but powered by the UPS battery and gets external power such as e Thor VM2 is installed on a powered dock with the dock power switch On e Thor VM2 is already mounted to a dock with the dock power switch On and truck power is applied to the dock e Thor VM2 is already mounted to a dock and the dock power switch is turned On Result The Thor VM2 continues to run and follows the AC DC power scheme with timers reset at power connection Ignition Control Mode In Ignition mode the Thor VM2 is turned On when the ignition switch is activated with no user interaction required The ignition input wire must be connected Thor VM2 is Off and Vehicle Ignition is Off Conditions The Thor VM2 is Off and vehicle ignition is Off Result The Thor VM2 remains Off regardless of external power UPS charging is disabled Conditions The Thor VM2 has external power but vehicle ignition is Off The Power button is pressed Result The Thor VM2 boots Once booted the Thor VM2 follows the Ignition Control Ignition Off power scheme with timers reset after the boot completes Thor VM2 is Off and Vehicle Ignition is Switched to On Conditions The Thor VM2 is Off and veh
196. h with the cleaner and then wipe the surface Do not use paper towels or harsh chemical based cleaning fluids since they may result in damage to the glass surface Use a clean damp lint free cloth Do not scrub optical surfaces If possible clean only those areas which are soiled Lint and particulates can be removed with clean filtered canned air Startup Help Contact Technical Assistance page 11 1 if you need more help Touch screen is not accepting stylus Press Ctrl Esc to force the Start Menu to appear Use the tab backtab and arrow keys taps or needs recalibration to move the cursor from element to element See touch screen Calibration page 5 92 Thor VM2 seems to lockup as soon There may be slight delays while the wireless client connects to the network authoriza as it is rebooted tion for voice enabled applications complete and Bluetooth relationships establish or re establish When an application begins the Thor VM2 is ready for use Hardware Overview System Hardware Antenna Connectors J CompactFlash Hard Drive LN SH It CF Slot Card d I e l SIM Slot SD Sit l Secure Digital Memory Card Serial Connector COM1 Serial Connector COM2 USB Connector CANbus Power Audio Connector Connector 802 11a b gWireless Client The Thor VM2
197. has an 802 11a b g network card that supports diversity with two internal or external antennas Power man agement for the network card is configured with the Summit Client Utility page 8 1 Central Processing Unit The CPU is a 1 6 GHz Intel Atom processor The operating system is Microsoft Windows CE 6 0 The OS image is stored on an internal CompactFlash memory card and is loaded into DRAM for execution Input Output Components The Thor VM2 supports the following I O components of the core logic e Two 9 pin RS 232 serial ports COM1 and COM2 One slot for SD memory card e CompactFlash CF memory card drive e Integrated keyboard with programmable keys e Ports available via adapter cables USB host port USB client port CANbus Audio System Memory Main system memory is 1 GB SDRAM Video Subsystem The Thor VM2 video subsystem consists of a color TFT display The video subsystem complies with the VESA VL bus standard The resolution of this display is 1024x768 pixels This resolution complies with the SVGA graphics industry stan dard The display supports screen blanking to eliminate driver distraction when the vehicle is in motion Audio Interface Speakers are located on the bottom front of the Thor VM2 A headset adapter cable provides a connection for headset operation When a headset is plugged into the adapter cable the main speakers are disabled A microphone is located at the upper right of the Thor VM2 dis
198. he LED on the wireless card is not visible to the user when the wireless card is installed in a sealed mobile device Options are On Off This parameter cannot be changed Determines if the Summit icon is displayed in the System tray Options are On Off When On the Summit Config Utility masks passwords characters on the screen are displayed as an as they are typed and when they are viewed When Off password characters are not masked Options are On Off Parameter Default Function Admin Password SUMMIT A string of up to 64 alphanumeric characters that must be entered when or Blank the Admin Login button is tapped If Hide Password is On the password is masked when typed in the Admin Password Entry dialog box The password is case sensitive This value is masked when the Admin is logged out Options are none Auth Timeout 8 seconds Specifies the number of seconds the Summit software waits for an EAP authentication request to succeed or fail If the authentication credentials are stored in the active profile and the authentication times out the association fails No error message or prompting for corrected credentials is displayed If the authentication credentials are not stored in the active profile and the authentication times out the user is again prompted to enter the cre dentials Options are An integer from 3 to 60 Certs Path System A valid directory path of up to 64 characters where WPA Cert
199. he PIN is entered suc cessfully After entering the PIN code tap the Submit button A message is displayed with either Success or the number of retries allowed before the SIM card PIN number entry is locked from further use PUK Personal Unblocking Key The PUK is a unique sequence of alpha characters displayed on the SIM card A default PUK code is not avail able After entering the PUK code tap the Submit button A message is displayed with either Success or the number of retries allowed before the SIM card PUK entry is locked from further use About This tab displays information on the Gobi 3000 radio installed in the Thor VM2 Gobi Connection Manager Home coma umts GPs Admin About Manufacturer Voice Number Serial Number FW Boot Fw Primary FW ID Version Sierra Wireless Inc Model ID Not available IMEI 80784719 MEID D3200 STSUXN 1582 HrdwrRev De090009 Technology e090009 Carrier TCMPC60xxx Region GPS D3200 STSUGN 1580 1 Jul 08 2011 18 00 00 MC8355 357480000000000 A1000000000000 30500000 UMTS Generic Global Assisted XTRA Input Panel Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Input Panel Set the current Thor VM2 keys and data input method Factory Default Settings Input Panel Input Method Keyboard Allow applications to change input panel state Enabled Options button Keys Small keys Use gestures Disabled
200. he Summit Client Utility page 8 1 The Summit Control Panel can also be accessed by double tapping the Summit icon in the taskbar or on the desktop Certs The Certs option displays a readme file containing details on how the Summit Configuration Utility SCU handles cer tificates for WPA authentication Command Prompt Start gt Programs gt Command Prompt File Edit Help sl Pocket CMD v 6 0 7a d LB Type help cmd at the command prompt to view valid Pocket PC Console commands Exit the command prompt by typing exit at the command prompt or tap File gt Close eXpress Scan The eXpress Scan page 7 15 utility allows an administrator to scan bar codes to provide the initial network and Avalanche Mobile Device Server address configuration This eliminates the need to edit radio parameters manually on the Thor VM2 eXpress Scan uses bar codes created with eXpress Config Internet Explorer Start gt Programs gt Internet Explorer This option requires a WLAN or WWAN card and an Internet Service Provider There are a few changes in the Windows CE version of Internet Explorer as it relates to the general desktop Windows PC Internet Explorer options Tap the button to access Internet Explorer Help Media Player Start gt Programs gt Media Player There are few changes in the Windows CE version of Media Player as it relates to the general desktop Windows PC Micro soft Media Player options After the Media Player app
201. hed by setting a timed delay for the first application to be launched by lowest Order number and no delay 0 seconds for all other applications Note Launch order is determined by the Order specified in the Application tab The Order value does not have to be sequential Auto Re Launch Auto Re Launch Default is Enabled When enabled for a specific application automatically re launches it subject to the specified Auto Re Launch Delay in seconds after it terminates This option allows the Administrator to disable the re launch operation AppLock cannot prevent all applications from closing When an application that AppLock cannot prevent from closing terminates perhaps because of an error condition AppLock re launches the application when this option is enabled Note If Allow Close is enabled and both Auto Re launch and Manual Launch are disabled the application cannot be restarted for the end user or by the end user after the application terminates Retries Default is O tries Retries is the number of times AppLock will try to re launch the application The retry count is reset after an application is successfully launched and controlled by AppLock Valid values are between 0 no tries and 99 tries or 1 for infinite Infinite tries ends when the application successfully launches Delay Default is O seconds no delay Delay is the amount of time AppLock waits prior to re launching an application that has terminated The
202. his Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES 003 This device complies with Industry Canada licence exempt RSS standard s Operation is subject to the following two condi tions 1 this device may not cause interference and 2 this device must accept any interference including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device Exposure of humans to RF fields RSS 102 The computers employ low gain integral antennas that do not emit RF field in excess of Health Canada limits for the general population consult Safety Code 6 obtainable from Health Canada s Web site at http www hc sc gc ca The radiated energy from the antennas connected to the wireless adapters conforms to the IC limit of the RF exposure require ment regarding IC RSS 102 Issue 4 clause 4 1 Cet appareil num rique de classe B est conforme a la norme NMB 003 Le pr sent appareil est conforme aux CNR d Industrie Canada applicables auxappareils radio exempts de licence L exploitation est autoris e aux deux conditions suivantes 1 l appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage et 2 l utilisateur de l appareil doit accepter tout brouillage adio lectrique subi m me si le brouillage est susceptible den compromettre le fonctionnement Conformit des appareils de radiocommunication aux limites d exposition humaine aux radiofr quences CNR 102 L ordinateur utilise des antennes int grales a faible gain qui n mettent pas un champ lectromagn
203. hor VM2 cannot be discovered by other Bluetooth devices when the Computer is discoverable option is disabled unchecked on the Settings panel e Other Bluetooth devices cannot be discovered if they have been set up to be Non Discoverable or Invisible e When Filtered Mode is enabled the Thor VM2 can pair with one Bluetooth scanner and one Bluetooth printer e When Filtered Mode is disabled the Thor VM2 can pair with up to four Bluetooth devices e Itis not necessary to disconnect a paired scanner and printer before a different scanner or printer is paired with the Thor VM2 e The target Bluetooth device should be as close as possible up to 32 8 ft 10 meters Line of Sight to the Thor VM2 during the pairing process Assumption The System Administrator has Discovered and Paired targeted Bluetooth devices for the Thor VM2 The Thor VM2 operating system has been upgraded to the revision level required for Bluetooth client operation An application or API is available that will accept data from serial Bluetooth devices Bluetooth Devices The Bluetooth Devices tab displays any device previously discovered and paired with the Thor VM2 Discover Tap the Discover button to locate all discoverable Bluetooth devices in the vicinity The Discovery process also queries for the unique identifier of each device discovered Discovering Bluetooth devices i Stop Button Tap S
204. ials page 8 14 for information on entering credentials Click the Credentials button e No entries except the User Certificate Filename and the CA Certificate Filename are necessary for Sign On Credentials as the user will be prompted for the User Name when connecting to the network e For Stored Credentials User Certificate Filename and the CA Certificate Filename must be entered Enter these items as directed below Credentials zl E User User Cert E et TI Es validate server Use MS store 1 Enter the Domain Username if the Domain is required otherwise enter the Username 2 Select a user certificate from the Windows certificate store Use the Browse button to locate the User Cert from the certificate store Highlight the desired certificate and press the Select button The name of the certificate is displayed in the User Cert box 3 Some versions of the SCU require a User Cert password If this entry field is present enter the password for the user certificate in the User Cert pwd box 4 If there are no user certificates in the Windows certificate store follow these instructions to Generate a User Certificate page 8 33 and Install a User Certificate page 8 37 5 See Windows Certificate Store vs Certs Path page 8 15 for more information on CA certificate storage 6 Check the Validate server checkbox Credentials zl E User User User Cert fisercert El CA Cert Full tru
205. ice name and description Review copyright notices Select a server client license from a drop down list Enable disable volume and sounds Set volume parameters and assign sound WAV files to events Set the parameters for a Summit Client Utility About Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt About The data cannot be edited by the Thor VM2 user on these panels Tab Contents Software GUID Serial Number Windows CE Version OAL Version Compile Version and Language Language indi cates localized version Hardware CPU Type Codec Type Display and DRAM memory Versions Revision level of software modules and NET Compact Framework Version Network IP Current network connection IP and MAC address Only the first 2 adapters are shown usually radio and Ac tiveSync Bluetooth MAC address is shown Software About EJ Software Hardware Versions Network IP GUID F3000000 FD00 6000 1F00 00000000001D Serial WM2C111111111 Windows CE vers Windows CE 6 0 patched 2011M08 OAL version THOR 2ENO0 00CE BIOS version 1000 EC version XX Screen MCU version 00 Compile version THOR YM2PC601Xx May 13 2013 Language ANSI 1252 Win Latin 1 OEM 437 US English only Firmware Versions The Software tab lists the firmware versions installed The BIOS EC and Screen MCU firmware versions are shown on this tab Language The Software tab displays the localized language version of the OS im
206. ich NDISLog information is stored Save File Stores the file name Run cmd Performs the selected start or stop command 5 73 Options Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Options It may be necessary to warmboot the Thor VM2 after making desired changes A pop up window indicates if a warmboot is required Communication Options on this tab configure communication options for the Thor VM2 Communication Misc Status Popup 7 Enable TCP IP Version 6 C Allow Remote Desktop Autologon Note RDP file must be saved in System folder J autolaunch TimeSync Enable TCP IP Version 6 By default IPv6 is disabled on the Thor VM2 Check this checkbox to enable IPv6 Allow Remote Desktop Autologon By default Remote Desktop Autologon is disabled Check this checkbox to enable Remote Desktop Autologon Note The RDP file must be saved in the System folder When prompted use the Save As button to save the RDP file is the System directory If the RDP file is saved in the default root folder location the RDP file will not persist across a warmboot Autolaunch TimeSync By default TimeSync does not automatically run on the Thor VM2 To enable TimeSync to run automatically on the Thor VM2 check this checkbox Synchronize with a Local Time Server By default GrabTime synchronizes via an Internet connection To synchronize with a local time server 1 Use ActiveSync t
207. icle ignition changes from Off to On Result The Thor VM2 boots Once booted the Thor VM2 follows the Ignition Control Ignition On power scheme with timers reset after the boot completes Thor VM2 is On and Vehicle Ignition is Switched to On Conditions The Thor VM2 is On and vehicle ignition changes from Off or not present to On Result The Thor VM2 continues to run and follows the Ignition Control Ignition On power scheme with timers reset at the time Ignition switched to Active An example of this case would be a Thor VM2 that is running on UPS and is then mounted on a dock that has truck power and the ignition switch is already On Thor VM2 is On and Vehicle Ignition is Switched to Off Conditions The Thor VM2 is On and vehicle ignition changes from On to Off Result The Thor VM2 follows the Ignition Control Ignition Off power scheme with timers reset at the time Ignition switched to Inactive UPS charging is disabled An example of this case would be a Thor VM2 that is running on UPS and is then mounted on a dock that has truck power and the ignition switch is already Off Auto On Mode In Auto On mode the Thor VM2 is turned On by the presence of external power with no user interaction required Ignition input is ignored when Auto On Mode is enabled Thor VM2 is Off Conditions The Thor VM2 is Off and gets external power such as e Thor VM2 is installed on a powered Quick Mount Smart Dock with the dock power switch On e Thor
208. icon is enabled by default but can be disabled on the Thor VM2 Battery control panel The UPS LED turns red when there is approximately 2 minutes of run time remaining The Status box indicates if the UPS battery is receiving external power Battery Voltage Status UPS 12 500 Y UPS Power remaining 100 Connected to external power V Battery Toolbar Icon Bluetooth Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Bluetooth Discover and manage pairing with nearby Bluetooth devices Factory Default Settings Settings page 5 32 Turn Off Bluetooth Enabled Computer is connectable Enabled Computer is discoverable Disabled Prompt if devices request to pair Enabled Continuous search Disabled Filtered Mode Enabled Printer Porton COM 7 Disabled unchecked by default in both Filtered and Non Filtered Modes The option is dimmed in Non Filtered Mode Logging Disabled Computer Friendly Name System Device Name Reconnect page 5 33 Report lost connection Enabled Report when reconnected Disabled Report failure to reconnect Enabled Clear Pairing Table on boot Disabled Auto Reconnect on Boot Enabled Auto Reconnect Enabled Bluetooth taskbar Icon state and Bluetooth device Icon states change as Bluetooth devices are discovered paired con nected and disconnected There may be audible or visual signals as paired devices re connect with the Thor VM2 e The default Bluetooth setting is On e The T
209. ificate page 8 33 To import the user certificate into the Windows certificate store seelnstall a User Certificate page 8 37 A Root CA certificate is also needed Refer to the section below Root CA Certificates Root CA certificates are required for EAP TLS PEAP GTC and PEAP MSCHAP Two options are offered for storing these certificates They may be imported into the Windows certificate store or copied into the Certs Path directory To Use the Certs Path 1 See Generate a Root CA Certificate page 8 30 and follow the instructions to download the Root Certificate to a 2 Copy the certificate to specified directory on the mobile device The default location for Certs Path is System A different location may be specified by using the Certs Path global variable Please note the location chosen for certificate storage should persist after a reboot 3 When completing the Credentials screen for the desired authentication do not check the Use MS store checkbox after checking the Validate server checkbox 4 Enter the certificate name in the CA Cert text box 5 Click OK to exit the Credentials screen and then Commit to save the profile changes To Use Windows Certificate Store 1 See Generate a Root CA Certificate page 8 30 and follow the instructions to download the Root Certificate to a 2 To import the certificate into the Windows store see Install a Root CA Certificate page 8 32 3 When completing the Credentials screen
210. ificate Au thority and User Certificates are stored on the mobile device when not using the Windows certificates store Ensure the Windows folder path exists before assigning the path in this parameter See Certificates page 8 30 for instructions on obtaining CA and User Certificates This value is masked when the Admin is logged out Options are none For example when the valid certificate is stored as My Computer Sys tem MYCERTIFICATE CER enter System in the Certs Path text box as the Windows folder path Ping Payload 32 bytes Maximum amount of data to be transmitted on a ping Options are 32 bytes 64 128 256 512 or 1024 bytes Ping Timeout ms 5000 The amount of time in milliseconds that a device will be continuously pinged The Stop Ping button can be tapped to end the ping process ahead of the ping timeout Options are Any number between 0 and 30000 ms Ping Delay ms 1000 The amount of time in milliseconds between each ping after a Start Ping button tap Options are Any number between 0 and 30000 ms Note Tap the Commit button to save changes If this panel is closed before tapping the Commit button changes are not saved Sign On vs Stored Credentials When using wireless security that requires a user name and password to be entered the Summit Client Utility offers these choices e The Username and Password may be entered on the Credentials screen If this method is selected anyone using the devi
211. ile Default Re connect SDC IP Address 100 100 100 100 Start Ping 100 100 100 200 Release Renew Diagnostics Diagnostics Output gt a Save To The Diags screen can be used for troubleshooting network traffic and radio connectivity issues Re connect Use this button to apply or reapply the current profile and attempt to associate or authenticate to the wireless LAN All activity is logged in the Diagnostic Output box on the lower part of the screen Release Renew Obtain a new IP address through release and renew All activity is logged in the Diagnostic Output box If a fixed IP address has been assigned to the radio this is also noted in the Diagnostic Output box Note that the current IP address is displayed above this button Start Ping Start a continuous ping to the IP address specified in the text box to the right of this button Once the button is clicked the ping begins and the button label changes to Stop Ping Clicking the button ends the ping The ping also ends when any other button on this screen is clicked or the user browses away from the Diags tab The results of the ping are displayed in the Diagnostic Output box Diagnostics Also attempts to re connect to the wireless LAN However this option provides more data in the Diagnostic Output box than the Re connect option This data dump includes radio state profile settings global settings and a list of broadcast SSID APs Save
212. imensions There are 4 mounting holes in the plate Use four 1 4 bolts to secure the plate to the vehicle Note Drawing not to scale 176 mm 6 99 7 O O 76mm 2 99 100mm 3 94 KS Or 200 mm 7 87 Step 2 Attach RAM Mount Ball to the Thor VM2 Quick Mount Smart Dock 1 2 3 Turn the Thor VM2 off before attaching the RAM mount ball Place the Thor VM2 face down on a stable surface If using the external keyboard mount position the Keyboard Bracket and the Size D RAM ball on the rear of the Thor VM2 dock aligning the holes on the back of the Thor VM2 dock with the holes on the bracket and the RAM ball base If not using the external keyboard mount position the RAM ball on the rear of the Thor VM2 dock aligning the holes on the back of the Thor VM2 dock with the holes on the RAM ball base Attach with four M5 screws flat washers and lock washers If using the external keyboard mount attach the Size C RAM ball to the Thor VM2 Keyboard bracket with four M5 nuts flat washers and lock washers 0 E d H H O E 0 E Step 3 Attach Thor VM2 Assembly to RAM Mount 1 Slip the Size D RAM arm over the ball on the vehicle RAM mount RAM Ball mount shown 2 Insert the ball on
213. in Suspend mode pressing the power button transitions the unit to On Shutdown Off Mode D4 The Thor VM2 shuts down when the Thor VM2 is operating on power and the UPS battery becomes critically low regardless of the current power management state The Thor VM2 remains Off until external power is applied The Thor VM2 may restart automatically when external power is applied or may require the user to press the Power button depending on installation and configuration The Thor VM2 transitions to Off mode from Suspend after the Shutdown timeout period has passed without a primary event occurring If the Thor VM2 has external power applied or a sufficiently charged UPS battery the Thor VM2 may restart automatically or may require the user to press the Power button depending on installation and configuration A Real Time Clock RTC powered by an internal battery maintains the date and time while the Thor VM2 is off Primary Events The Primary Events described below are the default behavior Primary events can be modified using the LXEPower MgrPrimaryEvents API Please refer to the CE API Programming Guide for API details User Primary Events A User Primary Event transitions the Thor VM2 to DO On mode When no user event happens for the specified time period the Thor VM2 transitions to D1 User Idle then D2 System Idle and then D3 Suspend Timeout periods are set via the Schemes tab in the Power control panel User primary even
214. ines an identifier that is at the beginning of bar code data which acts as a Code ID After a Custom Identifier is defined Symbology Settings can be defined for the identifier just like standard Code IDs Ctrl Char Mapping See Data Processing Overview page 5 40 Data Options Symbology Settings Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Data Collection gt Data Options tab gt Symbology Settings button The Symbology selected in the Symbology drop down list defines the symbology for which the data is being con figured The features available on the Symbology panel include the ability to e individually enable or disable a bar code from scanning e set the minimum and maximum size bar code to accept e strip Code ID e strip data from the beginning or end of a bar code e or based on configurable Bar Code Data add a prefix or suffix to a bar code The Code ID drop down box only filters the available symbologies in the Symbology drop down box by the selected Code ID This Code ID box does not enable or disable the Code ID as that function is controlled by the Enable Code ID box on the Data Options tab The Symbology drop down box contains all symbologies supported based on the Code ID selected above An asterisk appears in front of symbologies that have already been configured or have been modified from the default value Each time a Symbology is changed the settings are saved as soon as the ok button is tapped S
215. ing one second elapses between the CAB file loading and the slot powering up The auto launch process proceeds as follows 1 The launch utility opens the registry database and reads the list of CAB files to auto launch 2 First it looks for FileName to see if the CAB file is present If not the registry entry is ignored If it is present and the Installed flag is not set auto launch makes a copy of the CAB file since it gets deleted by installation and runs the Microsoft utility WCELOAD to install it 3 If the Installed flag is set auto launch looks for the FileCheck file If it is present the CAB file is installed and that registry entry is complete If the FileCheck file is not present memory has been lost and the utility calls WCE LOAD to reinstall the CAB file 4 Then the whole process repeats for the next entry in the registry until all registry entries are analyzed 5 To force execution every time for example for AUTOEXEC BAT use a FileCheck of dummy which will never be found forcing the item to execute 6 For persist keys specifying EXE or BAT files the executing process is started and then Launch will continue leaving the loading process to run independently For other persist keys including CAB files Launch will wait for the loading process to complete before continuing This is important for example to ensure that a CAB file is installed before the EXE files from the CAB file are run
216. ings gt Control Panel gt About gt Software tab The touch screen may require calibration however most Windows OS versions save the calibration data eliminating the need to calibrate If the Thor VM2 won t boot up after the upgrade is finished contact Technical Assistance page 11 1 for re imaging options BIOS The Microsoft Windows CE operating system is installed before shipping The default BIOS parameters are configured at that time In most cases it is unnecessary to modify the BIOS parameters Generally it is only necessary to enter the BIOS setup to change the boot order of the drives This section is not intended to detail all features of the BIOS instead it is intended to cover the most commonly used setup options CAUTION Be very careful when using this utility to modify BIOS Setup parameters The Thor VM2 may generate unex pected results when incorrect or conflicting parameter values are entered Selecting incorrect or invalid options may re quire the Thor VM2 to be returned for repairs The parameters should only be modified by Information Services personnel or the system administrator Accessing the BIOS Setup When the Embedded BIOS screen Phoenix Technologies is displayed press the Del key to enter BIOS setup Use the arrow keys to move around the screen To access and modify the BIOS on the Thor VM2 an external keyboard must be attached Boot Order To view or edit the boot order select the Boot
217. ings gt Control Panel gt Volume amp Sounds Note An application may override the control of the speaker volume Turning off sounds saves power and prolongs battery life Set volume parameters and assign sound WAV files to CE events using these options You can also select deselect sounds for key clicks and screen taps and whether each is loud or soft As the volume scrollbar is moved between Loud and Soft the Thor VM2 emits a tone each time the volume increases or decreases Volume must be enabled when you want to adjust volume settings using keypad keys Factory Default Settings Volume Events Enabled Application Enabled Notifications Enabled Volume One level below Loud Key click Disabled Screen tap Disabled Sounds Scheme LOUD Volume amp Sounds Properties zo x Volume Sounds Al Loud Enable sounds for M Events warnings beeps and system events M Applications program specific and all other sounds Y Notifications alarms appointments and reminders Enable clicks and taps for IT Key clicks O loud soft el Soft IT Screen taps O Loud O Soft Volume amp Sounds Properties zl lok B volume Sounds Event Sound ses Els Asterisk Close Program Critical Stop Default Sound Loun y Empty Recycle Bin Save As Delete e Exclamation y The volume setting is stored in the registry and is recalled at power on Note Re
218. ions where the Thor VM2 replaces a previously installed Thor VX8 or Thor VX9 Screen Blanking see page 4 49 Optional connection to blank the Thor VM2 display while the vehicle is in motion External AC DC Power Supply see page 4 52 For use when DC power is not available to power the Thor VM2 such as in an office environment See Power Supply Connector page 10 4 for connector pinout Power Cable Cautions CAUTION When routing the power cable Route power cable away from the outside of the fork truck e Choose a mounting location so that the power cable does not extend outside the vehicle and that provides sufficient clearance so that the power cable especially the dock connector end is not pressed against part of the vehicle Use the proper Strain Relief Cable Clamps page 4 32 to secure cable e The power cable is less flexible in low temperature environments Avoid sharp bends Regularly inspect power cable for damage especially in low temperature environments Contact Technical Assistance page 11 1 for replacement cable options Power Cable Routing
219. is redirected to the associated COM port The application must open the WDGO port not the COMx port as the Wedge has exclusive rights to the COM port If Output Enable is not checked the WDGO port can still be opened but any attempts to write to that port fail Default Enabled When Send Key Messages WEDGE is checked any data collection scan is converted to key strokes and sent to the active window When this checkbox is not checked the application will need to use the set of Scanner APIs to retrieve the data from the scanner driver Note that this latter method is significantly faster than using Wedge COM1 Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Data Collection gt COM1 tab Data Collection Stop Bits 1 2 Power on pin 9 5w This panel sets communication parameters for any device connected to the external port Adjust the settings and click the OK button to save the changes Any changes take effect immediately This panel does not configure the connected device Please refer to the documentation for the external connected or wireless device for information on configuring the device Note COM default values are restored after a cold boot or operating system upgrade COM1 supports 5V switchable power on Pin 9 for tethered scanners Power on Pin 9 To configure the COM port to supply power to an external scanner tethered to the COM1 port check the checkbox for Power on Pin 9 5V
220. is successful by reviewing the message below the Activate button Autoconnect When checked Autoconnect is enabled The Connection Manager automatically connect when necessary such as when Internet Explorer is launched Data Connection Test Tap the Connect button to make a temporary test connection to validate the carrier account Entries identified with an asterisk are used to configure the test connection Tap the Save Connection Data button to save the connection parameters UTMS Use the UTMS tab to configure the session parameters Gobi Connection Manager UMTS GPs Admin About Autoconnect APN C Enable User Name Disconnected Password Authentication IP Address DJ rap _ cHap Primary DNS Secondary DNS Data Connection Test Primary NetBIOS Name Server Secondary NetBIOS Name Server l Data Connection test only Save Connection Data Autoconnect When checked Autoconnect is enabled The Connection Manager automatically connects when necessary such as when Internet Explorer is launched Data Connection Test Tap the Connect button to make a temporary test connection to validate the carrier account Entries identified with an asterisk are used to configure the test connection Tap the Save Connection Data button to save the connection parameters GPS This tab displays the information available from the GPS built into the Gobi radio Gobi Connection M
221. is switched on When the vehicle is switched off more aggressive power management settings are enabled to preserve the vehicle battery charge Existing Circuitry On Vehicle Quick Mount Smart Dock Battery Main Switch A A Mi Ignition Vo Vo Cable for optional screen blanking coe or EE connection Fuse See Warning statement below Red White if present Red Black White if present SC ircular Power Black Connector Green Blue See Caution statement below CAUTION For battery powered vehicles e Red wire is connected to battery positive If there is a red wire and a red white wire twist them together and connect to battery positive e Black wire must be connected to battery negative If there is a black wire and a black white wire twist them together and connect to battery negative e Green wire must be connected to the vehicle chassis ground For internal combustion engine powered vehicles e Red wire is connected to battery positive If there is a red wire and a red white wire twist them together and connect to battery positive e Black wire must be connected to battery negative If there is a black wire and a black white wire twist them together and connect to battery negative e Green wire is connected to the vehicle chassis ground which can also be battery negat
222. ith the focus returned to the locked application Without entry of a valid password the switch into Administrator mode will not occur The password prompt is displayed if a password has been configured When the valid password is entered the Admin istration Control panel is displayed When a valid password is not entered within 30 seconds the user is returned to the System Control Panel If a password has not been configured the Administrator Control panel is displayed Application Application Filename Title Administrator Control fa OK Arguments J Internet Y menu Y Status Launch Clear 4 gt Global Key Ctri Spa y M Input Panel APLCKPNET2Cn Use the Application tab options to select the applications to launch when the device boots up in End user Mode If no application is specified when the Administrator Control Panel is closed the mobile device reboots into Administra tor mode If a password has been set but an application has not been specified the user will be prompted for the password before entering administration mode The password prompt remains on the display until a valid password is entered Option Filename Title Arguments Order Internet Launch Global Key Global Delay Input Panel ton Scroll Buttons Explanation Default is blank Move the cursor to the Filename text box and either type the application path or tap the Browse
223. iting the Registry Make a backup copy of the registry before changes are made REGLOAD EXE Double tapping a registry settings file e g REG causes RegLoad to open the file and make the indicated settings in the registry REGDUMP EXE Registry dump Saves a copy of the registry as a text file The file REG TXT is located in the root folder The Thor VM2 includes a Save User Defaults option in the Registry page 5 89 control panel This is the preferred method for saving a backup of the registry Save the registry file to the System folder on the Thor VM2 persistent storage or copy the file to a PC WARMBOOT EXE Double click this file to warm boot the computer e all RAM is preserved It automatically saves the registry before rebooting which means configuration changes are not lost WAVPLAY EXE Double tapping a sound file e g WAV causes WavPlay to open the file and run it in the background Thor VM2 Command line Utilities Command line utilities can be executed by Start gt Run gt program name PriScrn EXE Command line utility which performs a screen print and saves the file in BMP format in the System folder Tap Start gt Run and type prtscrn and tap OK or press Enter There is a 10 second delay before the screen print is made The device beeps and the screen captured file scrannnn bmp is placed in the System folder The numeric filename is incremented by 1 each time the PrtScrn function is activate
224. ive WARNING For proper and safe installation the input power cable must be connected to a fused circuit on the ve hicle If the supply connection is made directly to the battery the fuse should be installed in the positive lead within 5 inches of the battery s positive terminal The fused circuit requires a maximum time delay slow blow fuse with a current rating as noted below e For 12VDC input use a 10A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 12VDC e For 24VDC input use a 6A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 24VDC e For 36VDC input use a 4A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 36VDC e For 48VDC input use a 3A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 48VDC Note For North America a UL Listed fuse is to be used Auto On Control Wiring Diagram Auto On power mode must be selected on the Power Configuration Mode page 5 80 control panel The vehicle supply connections should be made to vehicle switched power to allow the terminal to automatically power up when vehicle power is switched on or when the power switch on the back of the dock is placed in the On position The Ignition wire is not used and should be left disconnected Existing Circuitry On Vehicle Quick Mount Smart Dock Battery Main Switch Vo Vo Cable for opti ptional screen blanking a connection Fuse See Warning statement below
225. jected bar codes generate a bad scan beep In some cases the receipt of data from the scanner triggers a good scan beep from a tethered scanner and then the rejection of scanned bar code data by the bar code processing causes a bad scan beep from the mobile device on the same data Good Scan and Bad Scan Sounds Good scan and bad scan sounds are stored in the Windows directory as SCANGOOD WAV and SCANBAD WAV These are unprotected WAV files and can be replaced by a WAV file of the user s choice By default a good scan sound on the Thor VM2 is a single beep and a bad scan sound is a double beep Wi Fi Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Wi Fi Use this option to set parameters and manage profiles for the Summit Client Utility preloaded on your Thor VM2 See the Summit Wireless Network Configuration page 8 1 for information and instruction ActiveSync Introduction Requirement ActiveSync version 4 5 or higher for Windows XP desktop laptop computers must be resident on the host desktop laptop computer Windows Mobile Device Center version 6 1 or higher is required for a Windows Vista Windows 7 desktop laptop computer ActiveSync and Windows Mobile Device Center for the PC is available from the Microsoft website Follow their instructions to locate download and install ActiveSync or Windows Mobile Device Center on your desktop com puter Note For readability in this section ActiveSync will be used in instruc
226. k To use Stored Credentials e Enter the Domain Username if the Domain is required otherwise enter the Username e Enter the password To use Automatic PAC Provisioning e No additional entries are required To use manual PAC Provisioning Enter the PAC Filename and PAC Password e The PAC file must be copied to the directory specified in the Certs Path global variable The PAC file must not be read only Ensure the correct Active Profile is selected on the Main tab and warmboot The SCU Main tab shows the device is asso ciated after the radio connects to the network Note When using Automatic PAC Provisioning once authenticated there is a file stored in the System directory with the PAC credentials If the username is changed that file must be deleted The filename is autoP 00 pac EAP TLS To use EAP TLS make sure the following profile options are used 1 Enter the SSID of the Access Point assigned to this profile 2 Set EAP Type to EAP TLS 3 Set Encryption to WPA TKIP 4 Set Auth Type to Open To use another encryption type select WPA CCKM WPA2 AES or WPA2 CCKM for encryption and complete other entries as detailed in this section Summit Client Utility fa ok x Main Profle status Diags Global Profile Default y New Rename Delete Scan Ed Radio Encryption EAP type far wea mp Hans A WEP keys PSKs Credentials Save Changes See Sign On vs Stored Credent
227. kbd The keyboard hook load failed so AppLock switches to admin mode If a pass LOG_ book d not found word is specified the password prompt is displayed and remains until a valid PROCESSING password is entered Switching to admin key If the keyboard hook initialization fails AppLock switches to admin mode Ifa LOG_ board hook initialization password is specified the password prompt is displayed and remains until a val PROCESSING failure id password is entered Switching to admin registry read failure See the explanation of the Registry read failure above AppLock is switching LOG_ into Admin mode If a password has been configured the prompt will be dis PROCESSING played and will not be dismissed until a valid password is entered Taskbar hook failure AppLock is unable to control the taskbar to prevent the locked application from LOG_ERROR re enabling it Switching to Taskbar In administration mode the taskbar is visible and enabled LOG_EX ScreenMode Switching to user mode The registry was successfully read and AppLock is starting the process to switch LOG_ to user mode PROCESSING Switching to user hotkey The system is currently in admin mode and is now switching to user mode The LOG_ press switch occurred because of a hotkey press by the administrator PROCESSING Taskbar hook OK AppLock successfully installed control of the taskbar LOG_EX Timeout looking for app After the application is launched
228. l memory Device Name Copyrights System Computer Microsoft Windows CE Processor Type intel Corp x86 Intel Version 6 00 Expansion Slots sl 2006 Microsoft Corp All rights Memory reserved This computer program is protected by U S and international copyright laws 352564 KB RAM Registered to System This screen is presented for information only The System parameters cannot be changed by the user Computer The processor type is listed The type cannot be changed by the user Total computer memory and the identification of the registered user is listed and cannot be changed by the user Memory sizes given do not include memory used up by the operating system For example a system with 128 MB may only report 99 MB memory since 29 MB is used by the operating system This is actual DRAM memory and does not include internal flash used for storage Memory System Properties General Memory Device Name Copyrights Move slider to the left for more memory to run programs Move slider to the right for more storage room Only unused RAM can be adjusted Storage tore CUCU EN AR RAE AR LAR ER CEE AL ACEO TEE Program Memory 9 mg Memory Allocated 98304KB Allocated 373196KB In Use 6092KB In Use 66120KB Move the slider to allocate more memory for programs or storage If there isn t enough space for a file increase the amount of stor
229. le is available to attach the Thor VM2 to a vehicle previously equipped with a VX8 VX9 DC power cable The adapter cable has a 6 pin connector to match the VX8 XVX9 power supply cable on one end and a 6 pin connec tor to match the Thor VM2 on the other end The cable also has bare wires for ground and ignition sense connection plus a D9 cable to connect to a COM port on the Thor VM2 dock to provide a screen blanking signal This section assumes the VX8 VX9 power cable is properly connected to vehicle power Refer to the VX8 or VX9 Vehicle Mounting Reference Guide for details l To COM port A on Dock To VX8 VX9 mm RER To Power Connector Power Cable ARBAB BBR 205 0020 on Dock To Ground and Ignition Sense Y Connect to Thor VX8 VX9 Power Cable 1 2 9 10 11 12 Connect the cable to the Thor VX8 VX9 power cable by aligning the connector pins to the power connector push down on the watertight connector and twist it to fasten securely Connect the green wire to vehicle ground For battery powered vehicles The green wire must be connected to the vehicle chassis ground For internal combustion engine powered vehicles The green wire is connected to the vehicle chassis ground which can also be battery negative If ignition control will
230. le tab which will display current network settings Avalanche Network Profile proper OK E Profile Property Value ManageNetwork no ManageWireless no When enabled the Enabler will ignore any network or wireless settings coming from the Ava lanche MC Console and use only the network settings on the Thor VM2 Selecting the Properties icon displays the Manual Settings Properties dialog applet From here the user can configure Network DNS and Wireless parameters using the displays shown below Note A reboot may be required after enabling or disabling these options Network DNS Manual Settings Properties OK A Network Joe Authentication Wireless Manual Settings Properties lok Bal Network DNS Authentication Wireless IT Manage network settings signed IP address sing IP address C Manage network settings Domain l Authentication Wireless Manual Settings Properties lok x Network DNS Authentication Wireless C Manage wireless settings SSID EE Encryption Manual Settings Properties lok x Network DNS Authentication Wireless C Manage wireless settings Type None y Inner hone z Select Encryption from the Wireless tab It is not recommend to enable Manage Wireless Settings for Summit Client devices Troubleshooting When you download a profile that is configu
231. le text Text is substituted for Control Start of Text STX Character Hat encoded text The hat encoded text is trans Carriage Re 4M lated to the equivalent hex turn value Escaped hat en The hat encoding to pass Horizontal Tab I coded text through to the application Hex encoded The hex encoded text is Carriage Re 0x0A text translated to the equivalent turn hex value Escaped hex en The hex encoding to pass Vertical Tab NOxX0A or O x0A coded text through to the application Translated Data 0x1B in the bar code is discarded 0x02 in a bar code is con verted to the text STX Value Ox0d in a bar code is converted to the value Ox0d Value 0x09 in a bar code is converted to the text I Value OxOD in a bar code is converted to a value Ox0A Value 0x0C is a bar code is converted to text OxX0A See Hat Encoding page 10 13 Bar Code Processing Examples The following table shows examples of stripping and prefix suffix configurations Symbology Enable Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Min length 1 4 Max length Strip Code ID Enabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Strip Bar Code Data 7 7 3 4 Strip Trailing 3 Prefix cc Suffix WWW XXX yyy ZZZ EE a SE CAMI CI EAN 128 1C1 EAN 13 JE0 Intriv 2 of 5 JIO Code93 Disabled Provided that the wedge is configured with the above table below are examples of scanned bar code data and results o
232. le to look for to determine if the CAB file is installed This will be the name of one of the files with path installed by the CAB file Since the CAB file installs into DRAM when memory is lost this file is lost and the CAB file must be reinstalled Order is used to force a sequence of events Order 0 is first and Order 99 is last Order must be greater than 4 for the Thor VM2 Two items which have the same order will be installed in the same pass but not in a predictable sequence There are two optional fields that may be added 1 Delay is used to add a delay after the item is loaded before the next is loaded The delay is given in seconds and defaults to 0 if not specified If the install fails or the file to be installed is not found the delay does not occur 2 PCMCIA is used to indicate that the file usually a CAB file being loaded is a radio driver and the PCMCIA slots should be started after this file is loaded By default the PCMCIA slots are off on powerup to prevent the Uniden tified PCMCIA Slot dialog from appearing Once the drivers are loaded the slot can be turned on The value in the PCMCIA field is a DWORD representing the number of seconds to wait after installing the CAB file but before activating the slot a latency to allow the thread loading the driver to finish installation The default value of O means the slot is not powered on The default values for the default radio drivers listed below is 1 mean
233. lectrical polarity is required for safe and proper installation See Wiring Diagram page 4 46 for additional wire color coding specifics The Thor VM2 DC input wires Red Red White DC and Black Black White DC and the Blue ignition input wire are galvanically isolated The Green ground input is used for electrostatic discharge ESD protection Vehicle 50 150VDC Power Connection Please review the Wiring Diagram page 4 46 before beginning power cable install The Thor VM2must be pow ered off and the power cable disconnected from the Thor VM2 The last connection must be to the vehicle power source before connecting the power cable to the Thor VM2 1 Route the cable from the Thor VM2 to the DC DC power supply Route the power cable the shortest way pos sible The cable is rated for a maximum temperature of 105 C 221 F When routing this cable it should be protected from physical damage and from surfaces that might exceed this temperature Do not expose the cable to chemicals or oil that may cause the wiring insulation to deteriorate Always route the cable so that it does not interfere with safe operation and maintenance of the vehicle 2 Cut the cable to length and strip the wire ends 3 Remove the lid from the DC DC power supply 4 Connect the stripped end of the positive wires red and red white twisted together or a single red wire to the output block See Power Cable Identification page 4 44 5 Connect the stripped end
234. lication is running click the button to access Media Player Help File Viewers The following applications are included e JETCET PDF Viewer e Office 2003 Excel Viewer e Office 2003 PowerPoint Viewer e Office 2003 Word Viewer Note The viewer applications allow viewing documents but not editing them Microsoft WordPad Start gt Programs gt Microsoft WordPad Create and edit documents and templates in WordPad using buttons and menu commands that are similar to those used in the desktop PC version of Microsoft WordPad By default WordPad files are saved as PWD files Documents can be saved in other formats e g RTF or DOC Tap the button to access WordPad Help Remote Desktop Connection Start gt Programs gt Remote Desktop There are few changes in the Windows CE version of Remote Desktop as it relates to the general desktop Windows PC Microsoft Remote Desktop options If installed Remote Desktop on the Thor VM2 can be accessed by Start gt Programs gt Remote Desktop Select a computer from the drop down list or enter a host name and tap the Connect button Tap the Options gt gt button to access the General Display Local Resources Programs and Experience tabs Tap the but ton to access Remote Desktop Connection Help Settings Start gt Settings The Settings menu option may include the following Control Panel page 5 15 All control panels Network and Dialup Shortcut to control panel Conne
235. lick the OK button then the Commit button When the device attempts to connect to the network a sign on screen is displayed Enter the Username and Password Click the OK button Summit Credentials User Password E Les 10 Verify the device is authenticated by reviewing the Status tab When the device is property configured the Status tab indicates the device is Authenticated and the method used 11 The sign on screen is displayed after a reboot Note See Configuring the Profile page 8 17 for more details If a user enters invalid credentials and clicks OK the device associates but does not authenticate The user is again prompted to enter credentials If the user clicks the Cancel button the device does not associate The user is not prompted again for credentials until e the device is rebooted e the radio is disabled then enabled e the Reconnect button on the Diags tab is clicked or e the profile is modified and the Commit button is clicked Windows Certificate Store vs Certs Path Note It is important that all dates are correct on the Thor VM2 and host computers when using any type of certificate Certificates are date sensitive and if the date is not correct authentication will fail User Certificates EAP TLS authentication requires a user certificate The user certificate must be stored in the Windows certificate store e To generate the user certificate see Generate a User Cert
236. light setting until it is changed by the user Click the checkbox to disable the keypad backlight This keypad backlight setting only applies to the integrated keypad on the Thor VM2 The keyboard backlight on an attached USB keyboard is not affected by this setting USB Powered in Suspend By default power to attached USB devices is turned off when the Thor VM2 is in Suspend mode Check this box to maintain power to attached USB devices in Suspend The external keyboard is a USB device If USB devices are not powered in Suspend the external keyboard back light turns off when the Thor VM2 enters Suspend Status Popup Options on this tab configure the Status Popup window When the Status popup window is displayed it is placed on top of the window in focus and hides any data beneath it It is closed by pressing the assigned Status User or Status Admin key sequence 5 Second Timeout 7 Admin User RFTerm SeclD s MV Admin User AIC Power M Admin V User CapsLock V Admin V User ActiveSync M Admin V User Network Status M Admin V User WLAN Radio M Admin User Battery Meter V Admin V User Bluetooth Status V Admin V User Using the Programmable Key page 5 83 control panel the System Administrator must first assign a Status User key sequence for the end user when they want to toggle the Status Popup Window on or off The System Administrator must also assign a Status Admin key se
237. ll paired Bluetooth device s Connection is inactive ES e Thor VM2 is not connected to any Bluetooth device Note When an active paired device enters Suspend Mode is turned Off or leaves the Thor VM2 Bluetooth scan range the Bluetooth connection between the paired device and the Thor VM2 is lost There may be audible or visual signals as paired devices disconnect from the Thor VM2 Bluetooth LED Legend Blue blinking slowly Bluetooth is active but not connected to a device Blue blinking medium Bluetooth is paired and connected to a device Blue blinking fast Bluetooth is discovering other Bluetooth devices Off Bluetooth hardware has been turned off or does not exist in the Thor VM2 AppLock if installed does not stop the end user from using Bluetooth applications nor does it stop authorized Bluetooth enabled devices from pairing with the Thor VM2 while AppLock is in control Bluetooth Bar Code Reader Setup Please refer to the Bluetooth scanner manufacturers User Guide it may be available on the manufacturer s web site Contact Technical Assistance page 11 1 for Bluetooth product assistance Several different types of bar code readers are supported This section describes the interaction and setup for a mobile Bluetooth laser scanner or laser imager connected to the Thor VM2 using Bluetooth functions Prerequisites e Ifthe ae VM2 has a Bluetooth address identifier bar code label affixed then Bluetoo
238. llection control panel applet e Multiple beeps may be heard during a bar code scan using a mobile Bluetooth scanner beeps from the mobile Bluetooth scanner as the bar code data is accepted rejected and other beeps from the Thor VM2 during final bar code data manipulation WWAN WWAN Wireless Wide Area Networking is available on the Thor VM2 A slot is provided for a SIM card GPS GPS Global Positioning System is available on the Thor VM2 Power Vehicle DC Power Supply Vehicle power input for the Thor VM2 dock is 10V to 60V DC and is accepted without the need to perform any manual oper ation within the Thor VM2 dock see 12 48 VDC Vehicles 10 60 VDC Direct Connection page 4 34 The dock provides a conditioned power output for the Thor VM2 By using a specified DC DC power supply input voltage of 50 150V DC can be accepted see 60 144 VDC Vehicles 50 150 VDC Power Supply Screws on Top of Lid page 4 43 or 60 144 VDC Vehicles 50 150 VDC Power Supply Screws on Top of Lid page 4 43 Power input is fused for protection and the fuse is externally accessible see Fuse page 3 4 External AC Power Supply If DC power is not available for example in an office environment an optional external Universal Input Power Supply can be used to convert AC wall power to an appropriate DC level AC to DC power input for the Thor VM2 is delivered to the Quick Mount Smart Dock via an optional external power supply and adapter cable
239. ly associate If the radio package is not sent the device loses connection to the network and manual configuration of the radio param eters is required 3 Set the Reboot setting for the OS package to Auto 4 After all packages are downloaded this may take several minutes the Remote Management Utility RMU is launched The RMU processes all the downloaded packages If the radio package was downloaded the Wireless Configuration Application WCA is launched to process the new radio settings 5 After the RMU finishes installing all the packages the device is automatically coldbooted assuming the Reboot setting was set to Auto in Step 3 6 After the Device completes the coldboot the RMU is autoinstalled by the OS and the previously downloaded packages are restored Assuming at least one package has registry settings that were restored and that package was set to reboot either auto or prompt the RMU then performs an automatic warmboot 7 After the warmboot the device is configured 8 If the device will no longer be monitored by Wavelink Avalanche you may remove the Enabler to eliminate boot up delays if desired Even if the Enabler is removed the installed packages and their configurations continue to be restored with every reboot by the RMU Version Information on Mobile Devices The VersionInfo EXE file is included in the Remote Management Utility package downloaded to the Thor VM2 It is stored in the Program Files RMU
240. m Start gt Program run RFTerm or tap the RFTerm icon on the desktop 3 Select Session gt Configure from the application menu and select the host type that you require This will depend on the type of host system that you are going to connect to i e 3270 mainframe AS 400 5250 server or VT host 4 Enter the Host Address of the host system that you wish to connect to This may either be a DNS name or an IP address of the host system 5 Update the telnet port number if your host application is configured to listen on a specific port If not just use the default telnet port 6 Select OK 7 Select Session gt Connect from the application menu or tap the Connect button on the Tool Bar Upon a successful connection you should see the host application screen displayed To change options such as Display Colors Cursor Bar Code etc refer to these sections in the RFTerm Reference Guide for complete descriptions of these and other features Cleaning the Touch Screen Note These instructions are for components made of glass If there is a removable protective film sheet on the display remove the film sheet before cleaning the screen Keep fingers and rough or sharp objects away from the bar code reader scanning aperture and the mobile device touch screen If the glass becomes soiled or smudged clean only with a standard household cleaner such as Windex without vinegar or use isopropyl alcohol Dampen the clot
241. mbology In other words either the settings for the configured symbology will be used or the default settings are used not a combination of the two If a symbology has not been configured does not have an next to it the settings for All are used which is not necessarily the default Clear Button Clicking this button will erase any programmed overrides returning to the default settings for the selected symbology If Clear is pressed when All is selected as the symbology a confirmation dialog appears S This will erase all code settings Are you sure Prefix IT Suffix If confirmed all symbologies are reset to their factory defaults and all star indications are removed from the list of Symbologies Click the Yes button or the No button Enable Min Max Enable This checkbox enables checked or disables unchecked the symbology field The scanner driver searches the beginning of the bar code data for the type of ID specified in the Data Options tab Enable Code ID field plus any custom identifiers When a code ID match is found as the scanner driver processes incoming bar code data if the symbol ogy is disabled the bar code is rejected Otherwise the other settings in the dialog are applied and the bar code is processed If the symbology is disabled all other fields on this dialog are dimmed If there are customized settings uncheck the Enable checkbox for the All symbology This re
242. mean the truck is coasting to a stop rather than stationary Configure the delay to allow time for the vehicle to coast to a stop The default value is 1000 ms Specify the COM Port to which the screen blanking cable is attached either COM1 or COM2 If a COM port is in use by another application such as DC Wedge that COM port is grayed out and cannot be selected for screen blanking To disable screen blanking uncheck the Enable screen blanking checkbox Current Level LCD brightness displays the current LCD brightness level The default brightness is 100 e LCD brightness can be manually adjusted using the Blue plus P3 or Blue plus P4 keypress sequences Any changes to brightness level using the keypresses are reflected in this section Screen Rotation Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Screen Rotation Screen Rotation v0 1 fo Degree y Ok Close The Screen Rotation panel provides options for rotating the display 0 Degree Returns screen to the default orientation 90 Degree Rotates the screen counter clockwise 90 degrees as compared to the default orientation 180 Degree Rotates the screen 180 degrees as compared to the default orientation 270 Degree Rotates the screen counter clockwise 270 degrees as compared to the default orientation To exit without changing the screen rotation tap Close Select the desired rotation and tap OK A reboot confirmation is displayed Ku Change will take effect aft
243. ministrator applet The Internet application should then be entered in the Application text box When the Internet checkbox is enabled the Menu and Status check boxes are available Enabling the Menu checkbox displays the EUIE menu which contains navigation functions like Back Forward Home Refresh etc functions that are familiar to most Internet Explorer users When the Menu checkbox is blank the EVIE menu is not displayed and Navigation functions are unavailable When the Status checkbox is enabled the status bar displayed by EUIE gives feedback to the end user when they are navigating the Internet If the standard Internet Explorer that is shipped with the mobile device is desired it should be treated like any other application This means that IEXPLORER EXE should be specified in the Application text box and the Inter net application should be entered in the command line In this case do not check the Internet checkbox Security Administrator Control E lok application Security Options Status Hot Key zzz Password CH Confirm Password paeet mmm Hotkey Specify the hotkey sequence that triggers AppLock to switch between administrator and user modes and the pass word required to enter Administrator mode The default hotkey sequence is Shift Ctrl A A 2 key keypress is an invalid keypress for a hotkey sequence Move the cursor to the Hot Key text box Enter the new ho
244. mit Client Utility fa ok x Main Profile Status f Diags Global noe Profile Default y New Rename Delete Scan Radio Encryption EAP type jPi wea TKIP LEAP Pi WEP keys PSks Credentials Save Changes Commit o See Sign On vs Stored Credentials page 8 14 for information on entering credentials To use Stored Credentials click on the Credentials button No entries are necessary for Sign On Credentials as the user will be prompted for the Username and Password when connecting to the network Credentials User Enter the Domain Username if the Domain is required otherwise enter the Username Enter the password Click OK then click the Commit button bk zm N Ensure the correct Active Profile is selected on the Main tab and warmboot The SCU Main tab shows the device is associated after the radio connects to the network EAP FAST To use EAP FAST make sure the following profile options are used 1 Enter the SSID of the Access Point assigned to this profile 2 Set EAP Type to EAP FAST 3 Set Encryption to WPA TKIP 4 Set Auth Type to Open To use another encryption type select WPA CCKM WPA2 AES or WPA2 CCKM for encryption and complete other entries as detailed in this section The SCU supports EAP FAST with automatic or manual PAC provisioning With automatic PAC provisioning the user cre dentials whether entered on the saved credentials scree
245. munication cables are available Vehicle mounting brackets are specifically designed for vehicle mount applications The vehicle mounted assembly restrains the Thor VM2 and isolates it from shock and vibration A RAM metal table stand is available to secure the Thor VM2 and dock when in an office environment for example The vehicle mount holds the Quick Mount Smart Dock and the Thor VM2 attaches to the dock The dock remains attached to the vehicle however the Thor VM2 has a quick release located on the lower rear side that allows the Thor VM2 to easily be removed from the dock The Thor VM2 can be operated for a minimum of 30 minutes from an internal UPS battery when not attached to a dock The Thor VM2 can be transferred from one dock equipped vehicle to another for easy portability The dock provides accessory attachment and conditioned power for the Thor VM2 Overhead dash and roof support pillar mounting is via a RAM Mount or U bracket accessory which includes all the hardware required for vehicle mounting Never put the Thor VM2 into the vehicle mounted assembly until the assembly is securely fastened to the vehicle Prepare for Vehicle Mounting The Thor VM2 should be secured to an area in the vehicle where it e Does not obstruct the driver s vision or safe vehicle operation e Will be protected from rain or inclement weather e Will be protected from extremely high concentrations of dust or wind blown debris e Can be easily acce
246. n Conditions The Thor VM2 is On and external power is removed such as e Thor VM2 is removed from a powered dock Dock power switch On e Thor VM2 is mounted to a dock and truck power is removed from the dock e Thor VM2 is mounted to a dock and the dock power switch is turned Off Result The Thor VM2 continues to run and follows the UPS mode power scheme with power management timers reset at the time of power removal UPS charging is disabled Programmable Key Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Programmable Key Use this control panel option to assign key functions to programmable keys available on your Thor VM2 determine applica tion launch sequences and program command Run sequences Factory Default Settings KeyMap page 5 84 Modifier Mode None LaunchApp page 5 86 App1 Empty App2 Empty App3 Empty App4 Empty App Opt EXE RunCmd page 5 86 Cmd1 Empty Cmd2 Empty Cmd3 Empty Cmd4 Empty File Parm FILE The Programmable Key panels can be used to perform the following functions es Remap a Key to a Single Key page 5 84 e Remap a Key to a Unicode Value page 5 84 Remap a Key to a Key Sequence page 5 84 e Remap a Key to a Sequence of Unicode Values page 5 84 es Remap a Key to a Special Function page 5 85 e Remap a Key to Launch an Application page 5 85 e Remap a Key to Run a Command page 5 85 Factory Default Programmable Key Values Programmable Default Programmable Default
247. n 132VDC e For 144VDC input use a 3A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 144VDC Note For North America a UL Listed fuse is to be used 60 144 VDC Vehicles 50 150 VDC Power Supply Screws on Top of Lid This option requires DC DC power supply Honeywell Part no VX89303PWRSPLY shown below Shown With Lid Attached Shown With Lid Removed e Lid is secured with screws on the top of lid Input and output connector blocks under lid e Two positive negative and ground O connections per terminal block If the DC DC power supply does not have screws in the top of the lid see 60 144 VDC Vehicles 50 150 VDC Power Supply Screws on Side of Lid page 4 39 A CAUTION For installation by trained service personnel only CAUTION The VX89303PWRSPL Y power supply is sealed per IPXX Usage in areas where moisture can affect A the power supply connections should be avoided The power supply should be mounted in a dry location within the vehicle or placed in a suitable protective enclosure d Use caution when routing the power cable See Power Cable Cautions page 4 33 A Fuse Requirements WARNING For proper and safe installation the input power cable must be connected to a fused circuit on the vehicle If the supply connection is made directly to the battery the fuse should be installed in the positive lead within 5 inches of the battery s positive terminal The fused circuit requires a maximum
248. n or the sign on screen are sent to the RADIUS server The RADIUS server must have auto provisioning enabled to send the PAC provisioning credentials to the Thor VM2 Summit Client Utility zo x Man Profle status Diags Gioba Profile Default y New Rename Delete Scan Car Radio Encryption EAP type far wea TKIP 7 ear FasT z WEP keys PSKs Credentials Save Changes For automatic PAC provisioning once a username password is authenticated the PAC information is stored on the Thor VM2 The same username password must be used to authenticate each time See the note below for more details For manual PAC provisioning the PAC filename and Password must be entered See Sign On vs Stored Credentials page 8 14 for information on entering credentials The entries on the Credentials screen are determined by the type of credentials stored or sign on and the type of PAC pro visioning automatic or manual Click on the Credentials button To use Stored Credentials click on the Credentials button No entries are necessary for Sign On Credentials with auto matic PAC provisioning as the user will be prompted for the Username and Password when connecting to the network Credentials zl E User Password PAC Filename PAC Password To use Sign On credentials Do not enter a User and Password as the user will be prompted for the Username and Password when connecting to the networ
249. n the icon opens the Gobi Connection Manager page 5 59 UPS battery charge indicator Percent of battery charge is indicated External power connected connected and UPS battery charging Current time Clicking the time display opens the Date Time page 5 56 control panel Click this icon to return to the Desktop AppLock Switchpad page 5 22 Input method keyboard input panel transcriber CapsLock active Thor VM2 OS Upgrade Introduction Depending on the size of the operating system the total time required for a successful upgrade may require several min utes The OS upgrade files are unique to your Thor VM2 physical configuration and date of manufacture OS upgrade files designed for one device configuration should not be used on a different device configuration When upgrading the OS or firmware on a Thor VM2 it is best to perform the upgrade using either Wavelink Avalanche or with an external USB keyboard attached There may be firmware and BIOS upgrades available for the Thor VM2 Contact Technical Assistance page 11 1 for upgrade information and instructions In some cases it may be necessary to upgrade firmware before upgrading the oper ating system The Thor VM2 must be connected to external power before upgrading the BIOS firmware or operating systems If the Thor VM2 is operating on UPS battery power the upgrade process does not initiate and the Thor VM2 is not upgraded Preparation e
250. nent collects the data from the varied sources and presents it to applications on your Thor VM2 in a transparent manner Note When a HID enabled USB scanner is connected to the Thor VM2 the scanned data is transmitted to the active window as keystroke messages The data bypasses the data collection wedge Any data handling to be applied to the scanned data for example strip leading or trailing characters must be programmed into the scan engine via configuration bar codes or handled by the application accepting the data Use the options on the control panels to set Thor VM2 data collection keyboard wedge parameters enable or disable allowed symbologies and assign scan key settings Assign baud rate parity stop bits and data bits for available COM ports Parameters on the Main tab and the COM tab s apply to this device only Bar code manipulation parameter settings on the Data Options page 5 44 tab are applied to the incoming data resulting from successful bar code scans received by the Thor VM2 for processing The successful bar code scan data may be sent by e a wireless Bluetooth scanner e ora tethered serial scanner Bar Code Readers The Thor VM2 can use the following external bar code readers e Tethered hand held scanners are tethered to a serial port or a USB host port on the Thor VM2 and are configured by scanning the engine specific bar codes in the scanner manufacturer s programming guide The manufacturer s guides are usually
251. nes with HSM Connect installed If desired when the installation is complete create a desktop shortcut to the HSM Connect exe file at the location indicated above If a different directory was selected during installation please substitute the appropriate directory 10 HSM Connect is now installed and ready to use Using HSM Connect 1 Power up the Thor VM2 2 Connect the Thor VM2 to the host PC using the USB connection cable Once connected the ActiveSync dialog box appears and the ActiveSync connection is automatically established Select No for partnership when prompted Dismiss any ActiveSync dialog boxes warning a partnership is not set up It is not necessary to establish a partnership to use HSM Connect However if a partnership is desired for other reasons one may be established now Double click the HSM Connect icon that was created on the PC desktop HSM Connect launches About CERDisp 6 Click the OK button to dismiss the About CERDisp dialog box either on the Thor VM2 desktop or n the HSM Connect window on the PC desktop The dialog box automatically times out and disappears after approximately 20 seconds E Windows Embedded CE 6 0 7 The Thor VM2 can now be configured from the HSM Connect window Input from the PC s mouse and keyboard are recognized as if they were attached to the Thor VM2 8 When the remote session is completed terminate the HSM Connect program by selecting File
252. ng the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures e Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna e Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver e Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help Caution Changes or modifications made to this equipment not expressly approved by Honeywell may void the FCC authoriza tion to operate this equipment FCC 5GHz Statement LAN devices are restricted to indoor use only in the band 5150 5250 MHz For the band 5600 5650 MHz no operation is permitted When using IEEE 802 11a wireless LAN this product is restricted to indoor use due to its operation in the 5 15 to 5 25 AN GHz Frequency range The FCC requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency range of 5 15 GHz to 5 25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co channel mobile satellite systems High power radar is allocated as the primary user of the 5 25 to 5 35 GHz and 5 65 to 5 85 GHz bands These radar stations can cause interference with and or damage to this device EMC Directive Requirements This is a Class B product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures Canada Industry Canada IC Notices T
253. ng tool capable of torquing to 20 inch pounds 1 10 N m Torque all screws and bolts according to the following table For these nuts Torque to 10 32 lock nuts 17 20 in lb 0 95 1 10 N m Step 1a Attach RAM Ball to Vehicle Note If you are using the RAM clamp mount please go to Step 1b Mount RAM Clamp to Vehicle page 4 23 If you are using the RAM plate mount please go to Step 1c Attach RAM Plate to Vehicle and Attach RAM Ball page 4 24 1 Determine the position for mounting the RAM ball base Be sure to position the RAM bracket to allow access to the switches and ports on the bottom of the Thor VM2 2 Attach the RAM ball base to the vehicle mounting surface using three or four 1 4 bolts not included or equivalent fasteners If the mounting kit includes cone washers use those as illustrated below IMPORTANT Mount to the most rigid surface available Mounting Dimensions Note Drill and tap holes for three 1 4 bolts Drawing not to scale 3 69 93 73 mm 2 75 69 85 mm Step 1b Mount RAM Clamp to Vehicle Note If you are using the RAM ball mount please go to Step 1a Attach RAM Ball to Vehicle page 4 22 If you are using the RAM plate mount please go to Step 1c Attach RAM Plate to Vehicle and Attach RAM Ball page 4 24 1 Determine the position for mounting the RAM clamp mount The clamp mount can be used on a beam such as on a fork lift truck up to 2 5
254. nition control the status of the vehicle ignition signal The Power Schemes are defined below The active Power Scheme depends on the user selected power configuration mode However if no external power is present the Thor VM2 uses the UPS Power Scheme regardless of user selected Power Configuration mode AC DC When AC DC has been selected for the Power Configuration mode this Power Scheme is selected Because of the presence of external power this Power Scheme has longer timeout values Ignition Control Ignition On When either Ignition Control option has been selected for the Power Configuration mode and the Ignition Switch is On this Power Scheme is selected Because of the presence of external power this Power Scheme has longer timeout values Ignition Control Ignition Off When either Ignition Control option has been selected for the Power Configuration mode and the Ignition Switch is Off this Power Scheme is selected This Power Scheme has shorter timeout values compared to Ignition On to preserve the vehicle battery Auto On When Auto On has been selected for the Power Configuration mode this Power Scheme is selected Because of the presence of external power this Power Scheme has longer timeout values UPS When any Power Configuration Mode is selected but no external power is present the UPS Power Scheme is used This Power Scheme has much shorter timeout values designed to shut down the Thor VM2 before the UPS battery is
255. nnector Direct10 60V DC input power Optional external converters for AC 90 240 VAC and extended range DC 60 150 VDC Power Switch Sealed power switch External Power Supply AC Adapter 120 240VAC to 12VDC Input Power DC Input Voltage 10 60 VDC Input Current 4 6 Amps Input Fuse 10A Time Delay 10 1 Dimensions Thor VM1 Width 10 6 26 8 cm Depth 2 1 5 3cm Weight 4 8lb 2 2kg Quick Mount Smart Dock Note The RAM ball is not included in the following measurements Length 7 1 18 0 cm Width 6 1 15 5 cm Height 2 5 6 4 cm measurement includes strain relief cable clamps Weight 3 2 Ib 1 5 kg Environmental Specifications Thor VM1 and Quick Mount Smart Dock Operating Temperature 4 F to 122 F 20 C to 50 C non condensing Storage Temperature 22 F to 140 F 30 C to 60 C non condensing ESD 8 KV air 4kV direct contact Operating Humidity Up to 90 non condensing at 104 F 40 C Water and Dust IEC 60529 compliant to IP66 ESD 15 kV Vibration MIL STD 810F composite wheeled vehicles Crash SAE J 1455 10 2 Network Card Specifications Summit 802 1 1a b g Bus Interface Wireless Frequencies varies by regulatory domain RF Data Rates RF Power Level Channels Operating Temperature Storage Temperature 32 bit SDIO Secure Digital I O 2 4 to 2 4895 GHz IEEE 802 11b 802 11g DSSS OFDM 5 15 to 5 82 GHz IEEE
256. nt below Z7 TA See Caution ow ee Se Red White if present below Vo Red Black White if present Circular Power Vo Black Connector on Dock Green DC DC Blue Power Supply not connected For battery powered vehicles GND must be connected to the vehicle chassis ground For internal combustion engine powered vehicles GND is connected to the vehicle chassis ground which can also be battery negative WARNING A For proper and safe installation the input power cable must be connected to a fused circuit on the vehicle If the supply connection is made directly to the battery the fuse should be installed in the positive lead within 5 inches of the battery s positive terminal The fused circuit requires a maximum time delay slow blow fuse with a current rating as noted below For 60VDC input use a 6A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 60VDC For 72VDC input use a 6A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 72VDC For 96VDC input use a 4A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 96VDC e For 108VDC input use a 4A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 108VDC For 120VDC input use a 4A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 120VDC For 132VDC input use a 3A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater tha
257. nto the Replacement edit control reselecting the character from the Character drop down box redisplays the default Ignore drop in the Replacement edit control Replacement The edit control where the user types the characters to be assigned as the replacement of the control character Replacements for a control character are assigned by selecting the appropriate character from the Char acter drop down box typing the replacement in the Replacement edit control according to the formats defined above and then clicking the button The assigned replacement is then added to the list box above the Assign button For example if Carriage Return is replaced by Line Feed by specifying J or Ox0A in the configuration the value Ox0d received in any scanned bar code or defined in the prefix or suffix will be replaced with the value Ox0a The Wedge then sends Ctrl J to the receiving application rather than Ctrl M List Box The list box shows all user defined control characters and their assigned replacements All replacements are enclosed in single quotes to delimit white space that has been assigned Assign Button Click this button when you want to assign the characters in the Replacement text box to the character in the Character drop down box Delete Button This button is grayed unless an entry in the list box is highlighted When an entry or entries is highlighted and the Delete button is clicked the highlighted material is dele
258. o Dito lool ito Elolcooliic ml j ee er roi hr B e alle le Dit roi t ASCII 10 14 17 Customer Support Product Service and Repair Honeywell International Inc provides service for all of its products through service centers throughout the world To obtain war ranty or non warranty service please visit www honeywellaidc com and select Support gt Contact Service and Repair to see your region s instructions on how to obtain a Return Material Authorization number RMA You should do this prior to return ing the product Technical Assistance If you need assistance installing or troubleshooting your device please contact us by using one of the methods below Knowledge Base www hsmknowledgebase com Our Knowledge Base provides thousands of immediate solutions If the Knowledge Base cannot help our Technical Support Portal see below provides an easy way to report your problem or ask your question Technical Support Portal www hsmsupportportal com The Technical Support Portal not only allows you to report your problem but it also provides immediate solutions to your techni cal issues by searching our Knowledge Base With the Portal you can submit and track your questions online and send and receive attachments Web form www hsmcontactsupport com You can contact our technical support team directly by filling out our online support form Enter your contact details and the description of the ques
259. o copy GrabTime ini from the My Device gt Windows folder on the mobile device to the host PC 2 Edit the copy of GrabTime ini on the host PC Add the local time server s domain name to the beginning of the list of servers You can optionally delete the remainder of the list 3 Copy the modified GrabTime ini file to the My Device gt System folder on the mobile device The System GrabTime ini file takes precedence over the Windows GrabTime ini file System Grabtime ini also persists after a coldboot Windows Grabtime ini does not persist Misc Options on this tab configure device specific options Note that options not available on the Thor VM2are dimmed or grayed out Communication Misc status Popup _ CapsLock 7 Touch Screen Disable M Enable Keypad Backlight IT USB Powered in Suspend CapsLock By default CapsLock is disabled after a warmboot To enable CapsLock after a warmboot click this checkbox Touch Screen Disable By default the Thor VM2 touch screen is enabled To disable the touch screen after a warmboot click this check box Note If the touch screen is disabled on a Thor VM2 you must use a USB mouse or keyboard attached to the Thor VM2 to access this tab to re enable the touch screen unless a Programmable Key page 5 83 has been assigned to enable the touch screen Enable Keypad Backlight By default the keypad backlight default setting is to follow the display back
260. o the PC using the proper connection cable If using ActiveSync select Explore If using Windows Mobile Device Center select File Management gt Browse the contents of your device An explorer window is displayed for the Thor VM2 Browse to the System HSMConnect folder Contact Customer Support page 11 1 for the necessary files if one of this folder is not present Select and copy the Setup exe and HSM Connect msi files from the Thor VM2 to the user PC Note the location chosen for the files Close the explorer dialog box Do not disconnect the Thor VM2 ActiveSync connection Execute the setup exe file that was copied to the user PC This setup program installs the HSM Connect utility i HSM Connect 1Ag o Welcome to the HSM Connect 1Ag Setup Wizard The installer will guide you through the steps required to install HSM Connect 14g on your computer WARNING This computer program is protected by copyright law and international treaties Unauthorized duplication or distribution of this program or any portion of it may result in severe civil or criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law Cancel Follow the on screen installation prompts The default installation directory depends on the PC operating system C Program Files Honeywell Inc HSM Connect version for 32 bit machines with HSM Connect installed C Program Files x86 Honeywell Inc HSM Connect version for 64 bit machi
261. oam requires full 802 11X authentication including interaction with the ACS server If the active profile is using WPA2 CCKM the global PMK Caching set ting is ignored and the client attempts to use CCKM Options are Standard OPMK Default is Off and dimmed cannot be changed ABG On How to handle antenna diversity when transmitting packets to the Ac cess Point Options are Main only use the main antenna only Aux only use the auxiliary antenna only or On use diversity or both antennas ABG On Start on Main How to handle antenna diversity when receiving packets from the Ac cess Point Options are Main Only use the main antenna only Aux Only use the auxiliary antenna only On start on Main on startup use the main an tenna or On start on Aux on startup use the auxiliary antenna 2346 If the packet size in bytes exceeds the specified number of bytes set in the fragment threshold the packet is fragmented sent as several pieces instead of as one block Use a low setting in areas where com munication is poor or where there is a great deal of wireless interfer ence This parameter cannot be changed 2347 If the packet size exceeds the specified number of bytes set in the Re quest to Send RTS threshold an RTS is sent before sending the pack et A low RTS threshold setting can be useful in areas where many client devices are associating with the Access Point This parameter cannot be changed Off T
262. obile Device Server can be disabled until needed refer to the Wavelink Avalanche Mobility Center User s Guide for details Menu Options Note Your Thor VM2 screen display may not be exactly as shown in the following menu options Contact Technical Assistance page 11 1 for version information and upgrade availability Connection page 7 6 Enter the IP Address or host name of the Mobile Device Server Set the order in which serial ports or RF connections are used to check for the presence of the Mobile Device Server Server Contact page 7 7 Setup synchronization scheduled Mobile Device Server contact suspend and reboot set tings Data page 7 8 Control when data is transferred between the device and the Mobile Device Server Preferences page 7 8 Set options for Enabler startup or shutdown and logging Display page 7 9 Set up the Windows display at startup on connect and during normal mode The settings can be adjusted by the user Taskbar page 7 10 Set options for Taskbar Execution page 7 10 Not available in this release Use AppLock instead which is resident on each device Scan Config page 7 11 This option allows the user to configure Enabler settings using a special bar code that is created by the Avalanche MC Console Scan Config not currently supported Shortcuts page 7 11 Add delete and update shortcuts to user allowable applications SaaS page 7 12 Configure the Enabler to connect
263. ocal computer store instead of in the user s certificate store Does not install the root CA s certificate You must be an administrator to generate or use a key in the loca machine store Additional Options Request Format CMC OPKCS10 Hash Algorithm SHA 1 Only used to sign request C Save request to a file Attributes Friendly Name For the Certificate Template select User Check the Mark keys as exportable and the Export keys to file checkboxes Type the full path on the local PC where the private key is to be copied Also specify the private key filename Be sure to note the name used for the private key file for example AAAUSER PVK The certificate file created later A in this process must be given the same name for example AAAUSER CER DO NOT check to use strong private key protection Make any other desired changes and click the Submit button Potential Scripting Yiolation This Web site is requesting a new certificate on your behalf You should allow only trusted Web sites to request a certificate For you Do you want to request a certificate now Yes No Potential Scripting Yiolation Saving a file into your local system could potentially violate scripting safety Do you want to create a private key user 1key pvk Yes No If any script notifications occur click the Yes button to continue the certificate request Create Private Key Password xj Key userlkey pyk
264. od is activated The check to the left of the application name indicates that the application is active If the application is listed but does not have a checkmark to the left of the application name this means the application is configured in AppLock and can be manually launched by clicking on the application name in the list Using a Stylus Tap When the mobile device enters end user mode a Switchpad icon it looks like three tiny windows one above the other is displayed in the lower right corner of the display The Switchpad is always visible on top of the application in focus However if only one application is configured in AppLock and the Input Panel is disabled the Switchpad is not visible a Switchpad When the user taps the Switchpad icon a menu is displayed showing the applications available to the user The user can tap an application name in the popup menu and the selected application is brought to the fore ground The previous application continues to run in the background Stylus taps affect the application in focus only When the user needs to use the Input Panel they tap the Keyboard option Input Panel taps affect the application in focus only Keyboard wv RFTerm EXE Y pword exe See also Manual Launch page 5 25 and Allow Close page 5 25 Using the Switch Key Sequence One switch key sequence or hotkey is defined by the administrator for the end user to use when switching between locked a
265. om The parameter value is displayed as Custom when the operating system registry has been edited to set the Summit parameter to a value that is not available from the parameter s drop down list Selecting Custom from the drop down list has no effect Selecting any other value from the drop down list will overwrite the custom value in the registry Global Parameters Parameter Roam Trigger Roam Delta Roam Period BG Channel Set DFS Channels DFS Scan Time Ad Hoc Channel Aggressive Scan CCX or CCX Features WMM Auth Server Default 65 dBm 5 dBm ABG 10 sec Full Off 120 ms ABG Optimized Type 1 Function If signal strength is less than this trigger value the client looks for a dif ferent Access Point with a stronger signal Options are 50 dBm 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 dBm or Custom page 8 11 The amount by which a different Access Point signal strength must ex ceed the current Access Point signal strength before roaming to the dif ferent Access Point is attempted Options are 5 dBm 10 15 20 25 30 35 dBm or Custom page 8 11 The amount of time after association or a roam scan with no roam that the radio collects Received Signal Strength Indication RSSI scan data before a roaming decision is made Options are 5 sec 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 seconds or Custom page 8 11 Defines the 2 4GHz channels to be scanned for
266. on Mode page 5 80 Programmable Key page 5 83 Regional and Language Settings page 5 88 Registry page 5 89 Remove Programs page 5 89 Screen Control page 5 90 Function Software hardware versions and network IP No user intervention allowed Customize the way the keyboard audio display or mouse function for users with hearing or viewing difficulties AppLock Administration utility View voltage and status of the internal UPS battery Set the parameters for Bluetooth device connections Manage digital certificates used for secure communication Wedge utility for data collected from bar code scans Set data collection device data strip ping and prefix suffix options Assign baud rate parity stop bits and data bits for COM1 and COM2 ports Assign collected data manipulation parameters Set Date Time Time Zone and Daylight Savings Connection setup for modem attached to COM port or CompactFlash slot CompactFlash slot not available for modem use on Thor VM2 Set background graphic and scheme Set touch screen and keypad backlight properties and timers Set parameters for the Wireless Wide Area Network client if installed Select the current key data input method Select custom key maps Set General Connection Security Privacy Advanced and Popups options for Internet con nectivity Set key repeat delay and key repeat rate Displays license information for installed licensed applications
267. on Preserved upon Reboot Storage Card or SD Card Yes N Windows Operating System in Secure Storage o Wavelink Avalanche Enabler Optional Note Ifthe user is NOT using Wavelink Avalanche to manage their mobile device the Enabler should not be installed on the mobile device s The following features are supported by the Wavelink Avalanche Enabler when used in conjunction with the Avalanche Manager After configuration Enabler files are installed upon initial bootup and after a hard reset Network parameter configuration is supported for e IP address DHCP or static IP e RF network SSID DNS hosts primary secondary tertiary e Subnet mask Enabler update Related Manual Using Wavelink Avalanche The Thor VM2 has the Avalanche Enabler installation files loaded but not installed on the mobile device when it is shipped The installation files are located in the System folder on CE devices The installation application must be run manually the first time Avalanche is used After the installation application is manually run a reboot is necessary for the Enabler to begin normal performance Fol lowing this reboot the Enabler will by default be an auto launch application This behavior can be modified by accessing the Server Contact tab of the Server Contact page 7 7 panel Internet Explorer Start gt Programs gt Internet Explorer There are a few changes in the Windows CE version of Internet Explorer as it r
268. onitors the NDIS interface between the Summit radio and the NDIS driver This utility creates a TXT log file Factory Default Settings Netlog page 5 72 Command options pkt_size in bytes 5000 cap_size in bytes 500000 cap file netlog Promiscuous Mode Disabled NDISLog page 5 73 Command stop file ndislog txt Netlog Use this control panel to configure the Netlog utility By configuring Netlog using the control panel Netlog remains run ning across a warmboot However please note that e Netlog first stores data to a file named netlogO cap then netlogi cap Any time the current file reaches maximum size Netlog switches to the other file If the log file is stored in the root directory any previous data is lost and a new log file started after the warmboot e If the log file is stored in System all previous data is saved across the warmboot e If Netlog is enabled across the warmboot a series of brief popups may be displayed during the boot cycle No user interaction is required Network Capture Netlog NDIsLog Command O load O unload kom pkt_size in bytes options O start O stop 500000 cap_size in bytes cap file isysteminetlog Promiscuous Mode O Enabled IfName SDCSD304G1 ready to run command Run cmd Command Command Function Specifies the option to perform See the table below for the option parameters and values load Loads and starts Netlog st
269. onnect CANDUS Cable cosida di adi tic 4 56 Install External Antenna cnn cnn nn a rnn rm a 4 56 Install Remote Antenna oocccccccnncconccicnnicinicenacinnccnnccnnnnnnnn nen nn n nn nnnn nn nn nn nn enn nn nn nnnnnnnnns 4 57 802 11 Remote Mount Antenna 4 57 WAN Remote Mount Antennza cece teen eeeee eect eee cnn cnn nn cnn nnnn nn nnrnnnnnnnnnnos 4 59 GPS Remote Mannes e eegene Zen 4 59 Apply Touch Screen Protective Film cessccecsccceeseeeeesneeseeeeeseeneseeneeseeneeseeneeeeeeeetenentes 4 60 lun VE te EE 4 60 REMOVAl TEE 4 60 Disconnect UPS Battery cvinionasii cath Ed SEENEN 4 61 PAST e DEE 4 62 Install SIM Cardin aiii 4 63 HEplaco FONO oca linia 4 64 Chapter 5 Software INTODUCTION gn eae AA AAA AO 5 1 Operating System tE AS 5 1 Windows CE Operating System cocoa o a rg Ee 5 1 General Windows CE Keyboard Ghortcuts 5 1 Save Changes to the Registry msincorioiaciniai rodri tira ia 5 2 SOMwWare LOA venir 5 2 SOW ANE Applications EE 5 2 Active Syn EE 5 2 Bluetoot SE 5 2 Honeywell RFTerm Optional AEN 5 2 E E 5 3 Software Development 5 3 Thor MM EE 5 3 AUNO FE XS eege 5 3 LAUNCH EXE and Persistent Storage ici dd 5 4 REGEDIT EXE EE 5 4 REGLOAD EXE cuisine 5 4 REGHDUMPEXE Teret a rai tanta ies 5 4 WARMBOOT EXE ocu tee ea a a E eegen 5 5 NEE 5 5 Thor VM2 Command line Utilities AEN 5 5 PASIM E 5 5 RI e DE 5 5 Desktop ICONS EE 5 5 ASIAN EE 5 6 My Device Folders init tee Satara a ee awit GE eae eh eda e
270. op or laptop PC must be running Windows XP or greater e Use the USB specific cable as shown above Connect Connect the USB cable to the PC the host and the mobile device the client The Get Connected wizard on the host PC checks COM ports to establish a connection for the first time Note USB synchronization will start automatically when the cable is connected Disconnect e Disconnect the cable from the Thor VM2 e Open the status bar icon in the lower right hand corner of the status bar Then tap the Disconnect button When the Thor VM2 loses connection e g enters Suspend Mode etc the connection to ActiveSync will be lost When the Thor VM2 resumes the ActiveSync session will automatically re connect Thor VM2 with a Disabled Touch screen A Thor VM2 touch screen can be disabled via the Misc tab of the Options page 5 74 control panel In these cases it may be easier to configure the Thor VM2 using ActiveSync and HSM Connect rather than using the Thor VM2 keypad only Reset and Loss of Host Re connection ActiveSync assigns a partnership between a Thor VM2 the client and a host computer A partnership is defined by two objects a unique computer name and a random number generated when the partnership is first created An ActiveSync partnership between a unique client can be established to two hosts When the mobile device is reset return to default settings the random number is deleted and the partn
271. or 12VDC input use a 10A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 12VDC e For 24VDC input use a 6A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 24VDC e For 36VDC input use a 4A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 36VDC e For 48VDC input use a 3A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 48VDC Note For North America a UL Listed fuse is to be used Manual Control Wiring Diagram Ignition wire must be left unconnected and AC DC power mode must be selected on the Power Configuration Mode page 5 80 control panel Existing Circuitry On Vehicle Quick Mount Smart Dock Battery Main Switch Fuse See Warning statement below A Vo Vo Cable for optional ptional screen blanking Cae connection Red White if present Red Black White if present Set ircular Power Connector Black Green Blue not connected See Caution statement below CAUTION For battery powered vehicles e Red wire is connected to battery positive If there is a red wire and a red white wire twist them together and connect to battery positive e Black wire must be connected to battery negative If there is a black wire and a black white wire twist them together and connect to battery negative e Green wire must be connected to the vehicle chassis ground
272. or pass phrase as required by the type of encryption PSK Keys Note Unsaved Changes The SCU will display a reminder if the Commit button is not clicked before an attempt is made to close or browse away from this tab Important The settings for Auth Type EAP Type and Encryption depend on the security type chosen Profile Parameters Parameter Default Explanation Edit Profile Default A string of 1 to 32 alphanumeric characters establishes the name of the Profile Options are Default or ThirdPartyConfig SSID Blank A string of up to 32 alphanumeric characters Establishes the Service Set Identifier SSID of the WLAN to which the client connects Client Name Blank A string of up to 16 characters The client name is assigned to the network card and the device using the network card The client name may be passed to networking wireless devices e g Access Points Power Save CAM Power save mode Options are Constantly Awake Mode CAM power save off Maximum power saving mode and Fast power saving mode When using power management use FAST for throughput results Tx Power Maximum Maximum setting regulates Tx power to the Max power setting for the current regula tory domain Options are Maximum 50mW 30mW 20mW 10mW 5mW or 1mW Bit Rate Auto Setting the rate to Auto will allow the Access Point to automatically negotiate the bit rate with the client device This parameter cannot be changed Auth Type
273. ord Encrypt create key failure Unable to encrypt password Exit ToUser Registry read The AppName value does not exist in the registry so user mode cannot be en failure tered Exit verify password no Exiting password verification pwd set Exit verify password re Exiting password verification sponse from dialog Found taskbar The handle to the taskbar has been found so that AppLock can disable it in user mode Getting address of key AppLock is retrieving the address of the keyboard hook board hook init procedure Getting configuration from The AppLock configuration is being read from the registry This occurs at initial registry ization and also at entry into user mode The registry must be re read at entry into user mode in case the administration changed the settings of the application being controlled Getting encrypt pwd length The length of the encrypted password is being calculated AppLock is unable to lock the application This could happen if the application Hook wndproc failure being locked encountered an error after performing its initialization and shut it self down prior to being locked by AppLock Hot key pressed Processing the hotkey and backdoor entry Hook wndproc of open app The application is open but AppLock cannot lock it failure Hot key event creation fail The Admin applet is unable to create the hotkey notification ure Level LOG_ERROR LOG_ERROR LOG_ERROR LOG_EX LOG_E
274. ore details SIM Card Installation Depending on the carrier a SIM card may be necessary for WWAN connection To install a SIM card 1 2 3 o oN o Place the Thor VM2 in Suspend Remove the Thor VM2 from the Quick Mount Smart Dock Place the Thor VM2 face down on a stable surface Use a Phillips screwdriver not supplied loosen the screws and then remove the tethered access panel with te eee This panel is on the right hand side when the Thor VM2 is face down with the top away from Install the SIM card in the slot Reattach the access panel torquing the screws to 4 to 5 inch pounds Reinstall the Thor VM2 in the dock Resume the Thor VM2 from suspend If the SIM card requires a PIN or PUK a warning message may be displayed Dismiss the warning message and enter the PIN or PUK on the Admin page 5 64 tab Activate To activate service for a CDMA carrier such as Verizon complete the necessary entries on the CDMA page 5 61 tab Home Use the Home tab to update firmware and view the status of the connection Gobi Connection Manager Home coma uwrs GPS Admin about RSSI 108dBm UMTS Home Network Status Disconnected M GPS Active Uncheck Box For Best Mobile Data Coverage Firmware Selection Update Firmware O TepWindowSize 128K Roaming Status Operator Defined Power Online Gobi 3000 Radio found To update firmware 1 Select the firmware for the desired carrier from the
275. ormation when setting up an account Gobi Connection Manager Home CDMA umrs Gps Admin About SiN 80784719 Activation Type Autoconnect Automatic O Manual Enable IMEI 357480000000000 Activate Disconnected MEID 1000000000000 Ee Service not activated Authentication PaP cap Activation Code Data Connection Test Service Programming Code Validate SPC Connect Disconnect System Identification Number l User Name Mobile Directory Number Password Data Connection test only Mobile Indentification Number Save Connection Data Activation Type There are two activation methods Automatic and Manual Automatic Activation 1 Select the Automatic radio button for Activation Type 2 Automatic activation requires an Activation Code Enter the Activation Code in the Activation Code text box 3 Tap Save Connection Data 4 Tap Activate 5 All other text boxes are grayed out as no additional entries are required for automatic activation 6 Verify the activation process is successful by reviewing the message below the Activate button Manual Activation 1 Select the Manual radio button for Activation Type 2 Enterthe Service Programming Code System Identification number Mobile Directory number and Mobile Identification Number in the appropriate text boxes The Activation Code text box is not used 3 Tap Save Connection Data 4 Tap Activate 5 Verify the activation process
276. oth Name and ID Code must be specified in order to add a custom Code ID to the Custom IDs list Buttons Add Entering data into both the Name and ID Code fields enables the Add button Click the Add button and the data is added to the next empty location in the Custom ID list Insert Click on an empty line in the Custom ID list The Add button changes to Insert Enter data into both the Name and ID Code fields and click the Insert button The data is added to the selected line in the Cus tom IDs list Edit Double click on the item to edit Its values are copied to the text boxes for editing The Add button changes to Replace When Replace is clicked the values for the current item in the list are updated Clear All When no item in the Custom IDs list is selected clicking the Clear All button clears the Custom ID list and any text written and not yet added or inserted in the Name and ID Code text boxes Remove The Clear All button text changes to a Remove button when an item in the Custom IDs list is selected Click the desired line item and then click the Remove button to delete it Line items are Removed one at atime Contents of the text box fields are cleared at the same time Control Code Replacement Examples Configuration Translation Example Example Data Control Configuration Character Ignore drop The control character is dis ESCape Ignore drop carded from the bar code da ta prefix and suffix Printab
277. ountries Intel and Atom are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries Summit Data Communications the Laird Technologies Logo the Summit logo and Connected No Matter What are trade marks of Laird Technologies Inc Wi Fi WMM Wi Fi Mutlimedia Wi Fi Protected Access WPA WPA2 and the Wi Fi CERTIFIED logo are trade marks or registered trademarks of Wi Fi Alliance The Bluetooth word mark and logos are owned by the Bluetooth SIG Inc Symbol is a registered trademark of Symbol Technologies MOTOROLA MOTO MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS and the Stylized M Logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Motorola Trademark Holdings LLC and are used under license Wavelink the Wavelink logo and tagline Wavelink Studio Avalanche Management Console Mobile Manager and Mobile Manager Enterprise are trademarks of Wavelink Corporation Kirkland RAM and RAM Mount are both trademarks of National Products Inc 1205 S Orr Street Seattle WA 98108 Qualcomm is a registered trademark of Qualcomm Incorporated Gobi is a trademark of Qualcomm Incorporated Verizon is a registered trademark of Verizon Trademark Services LLC T MOBILE is a registered trademark of Deutsche Telekom AG AT amp T is a registered trademark of AT amp T Intellectual Property SD and SDHC are trademarks or registered trademarks of SD 3C LLC in th
278. ower Connection page 4 34 and Auto On Control Wiring Diagram page 4 37 AC DC The Thor VM2 is powered on manually Due to the presence of external power longer default power management timeouts are used Ignition Control The Thor VM2 is configured to power on when the vehicle ignition is switched on When the vehicle ignition is on longer default power management timeouts are used If the vehicle ignition is turned off shorter default power management timeouts are used Auto On The Thor VM2 is designed to power on whenever external power is attached Due to the presence of external power longer default power management timeouts are used UPS The Thor VM2 uses the UPS mode whenever external power is not available Due to the absence of external power much shorter default power management timeouts are used External Connectors Power the Thor VM2 off before attaching a cable to any port serial USB Audio CAN etc The external I O connectors for the Thor VM2 are located on the right side of the Quick Mount Smart Dock when viewed from the back The Power Supply Connector page 3 8 is on the left side of the dock when viewed from the back Antenna connectors are located on the top rear of the Thor VM2 Serial Connector COM1 and COM2 Screen Blanking The COM1 and COM2 connectors are D 9 male connectors located on the back of the Quick Mount Smart Dock Power th
279. p each time the Thor VM2 is cabled to the desktop laptop Bluetooth Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Bluetooth Only installed on a Bluetooth equipped Thor VM2 The System Administrator can Discover and Pair targeted Bluetooth devices for each Thor VM2 The System Administrator can enable disable Bluetooth settings and assign a Computer Friendly name for each Thor VM2 The Bluetooth control panel can also be accessed by double tapping the Bluetooth icon in the taskbar or on the desktop Honeywell RFTerm Optional Start gt Programs gt Honeywell RFTerm RFTerm is pre loaded when ordered The application can also be accessed by double clicking the RFTerm desktop icon Avalanche The Wavelink Avalanche Enabler installation file is loaded on the Thor VM2 however the device is not configured to launch the installation file automatically The installation application must be run manually the first time Avalanche is used Follow ing installation the Wavelink Avalanche Enabler will be an auto launch application This behavior can be modified by accessing the Avalanche Update Settings panel through the Enabler Interface Software Development See Also CE API Programming Guide The CE API Programming Guide documents Honeywell specific API calls for the Thor VM2 It is intended as an addition to Mic rosoft Windows CE API documentation A Software Developers Kit SDK and additional information about software development can
280. password certificate names and other information required to authen ticate with the access point The information required depends on the EAP type Delete Deletes the profile The current active profile cannot be deleted and an error message is displayed if a delete is attempted New Creates a new profile with the default settings see Profile Parameters and prompts for a unique name If the name is not unique an error message is displayed and the new profile is not created Rename Assigns a new unique name If the new name is not unique an error message is displayed and the profile is not renamed Button Function Scan Opens a window that lists access points that are broadcasting their SSIDs Tap the Refresh button to view an updated list of APs Each AP s SSID its received signal strength indication RSSI and wheth er or not data encryption is in use true or false Sort the list by tapping on the column headers If the scan finds more than one AP with the same SSID the list displays the AP with the strongest RSSI and the least security Configure Refresh If you are logged in as an Admin tap an SSID in the list and tap the Configure button you return to the Profile window to recreate a profile for that SSID with the profile name being the same as the SSID or the SSID with a suffix such as _1 if a profile with the SSID as its name exists already He Keys Allows entry of WEP keys
281. play near the Thor VM2 emblem When a headset is plugged into the adapter cable the internal microphone is disabled Card Slots CompactFlash CF Slot The CF ATA slot is not hot swappable The Thor VM2 must be powered down to insert or remove an ATA card Since the operating system is stored on the CF ATA card the Thor VM2 cannot operate without the ATA card Secure Digital SD Slot The SD slot accepts an SD memory card The SD card is hot swappable Bluetooth EZPair The Thor VM2 contains Bluetooth version 2 0 with Enhanced Data Rate EDR up to 3 0 Mbit s over the air Bluetooth device connection or pairing can occur at distances up to 32 8 ft 10 meters Line of Sight The wireless client retains wireless connectivity while Bluetooth is active The user cannot select PIN authentication or encryption on connections from the Thor VM2 However the Thor VM2 sup ports authentication requests from pairing devices If a pairing device requests authentication or encryption the Thor VM2 displays a prompt for the PIN or passcode Maximum encryption is 128 bit Encryption is based on the length of the user s passcode Bluetooth simultaneously supports one printer as a slave Bluetooth device and one scanner either as a slave or as a mas ter Bluetooth device The LED on the Bluetooth scanner illuminates during a scanning operation e Barcode data captured by the Bluetooth scanner is manipulated by the settings in the Thor VM2 Data Co
282. point after the ignition switch of the vehicle 12 Use proper electrical and mechanical fastening means for terminating the cable Properly sized crimp type electrical terminals are an accepted method of termination Select electrical connectors sized for use with 18AWG 1mm conductors 13 Provide mechanical support for the cable by securing it to the vehicle structure at approximately one foot inter vals taking care not to over tighten and pinch conductors or penetrate the outer cable jacket 14 Connect the watertight connector end of the power cable to the Thor VM2 Quick Mount Smart Dock power connector by aligning the connector pins to the power connector push down on the watertight connector and twist it to fasten securely Flip the power switch on the back of the dock to On 15 Secure the power cable to the Thor VM2 using the Strain Relief Cable Clamps page 4 32 16 Place Thor VM2 in the Dock page 4 18 17 If using the Screen Blanking page 4 49 feature install the screen blanking box or switch 18 Press the Power Switch page 3 6 on the back of the Thor VM2 dock 19 Press the Power Button page 3 6 on the front of the Thor VM2 to turn on the Thor VM2 Once installation is complete remember to start the Thor VM2 and select the desired Power Configuration Mode to enable Auto On or Manual Control of the Thor VM2 boot up process See the Power Configuration Mode page 5 80 control panel Note Ignition control is
283. pplications This is known as the Activation key The Activation key is assigned by the Admin istrator using the Global Key parameter When the switch key sequence is pressed on the keypad the next appli cation in the AppLock configuration is moved to the foreground and the previous application moves to the background The previous application continues to run in the background End user key presses affect the appli cation in focus only See also Global Key page 5 23 Hotkey Activation hotkey The default Hotkey Activation key is Ctrl Spc The key sequence switches the focus between one application and another Data entry affects the application running in the foreground only Note that the system administrator may have assigned a different key sequence to use when switching applications Note You must use an external keyboard with the 12 key version of the Thor VM2 to use the Hotkey If an external keyboard is not attached use the Switchpad to switch between applications Application Configuration Settings gt Control Panel gt Administration The default Administrator Hotkey sequence is Shift Ctrl A Administrator mode allows access to all features on the device When the hotkey is pressed to switch into Administra tor mode a password prompt is displayed if a password has been configured A password must be entered within 30 seconds and within three tries or the password prompt is removed and the device remains in end user mode w
284. provides a client connection such as for ActiveSync to a PC 4 Secure the cables to the Thor VM2 with Strain Relief Cable Clamps page 4 32 Connect Serial Device Note Pin 9 of the desired COM port must be configured to provide 5V or RI as needed for the connected device See the Thor VM2 Reference Guide for details i Es See COM1 and COM2 Connector page 10 4 for connector pinouts 1 Seat the cable end connector firmly over the serial COM port on the Quick Mount Smart Dock 2 Turn the thumbscrews in a clockwise direction Do not over tighten 3 Secure the cables to the Thor VM2 with Strain Relief Cable Clamps page 4 32 4 Connect the other cable end to the desired serial device Connect a Tethered Scanner 1 The scanner cable is attached to eithe
285. quence to perform the same function Status popup window display options taskbar icons are assigned on the Status Popup tab E g AC Power ActiveSync WLAN radio CapsLock Network status Bluetooth status etc The default for the User and Admin status popup windows is to show all status information The 5 second timeout to remove the status popup from the display is disabled by default for the User and Admin status popup windows 5 75 Owner Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Owner Set the Thor VM2 owner details The Network ID is used when logging into a remote network Factory Default Settings Identification Name Blank Company Blank Address Blank Telephones Blank Display owner ID at power on Disabled Notes Notes Blank Display notes at power on Disabled Network ID User Name Blank Password Blank Domain Blank Owner Properties Identification Notes Network ml At Power On Name Display owner identification company Area code Phone Address work Home IT Owner Properties zl lok E Identification Notes Network 1D Notes Use the Notes field to add any additional information not included in the Identification tab 7 Display owner notes at power on Owner Properties Identification Notes Network 1D Windows CE uses this User name information to gain access to network resources Enter the Password us
286. r supply 7 Route the wiring from the DC DC power supply to the vehicle s electrical system Do not connect to vehicle power at this time 8 Strip the wire ends and connect to the input side of the DC DC power supply 9 Use looms and wire ties to secure all wiring as shown 10 Reattach the cover with the screws 11 Connect the DC DC power supply to the vehicle s electrical system as directed below For battery powered vehicles Vin is connected to battery positive Vin must be connected to battery negative GND must be connected to the vehicle chassis ground For internal combustion engine powered vehicles Vin is connected to battery positive Vin is connected to battery negative GND is connected to the vehicle chassis ground which can also be battery negative 12 While observing the Fuse Requirements See page 4 39 connect the power cable as close as possible to the actual battery terminals of the vehicle When available always connect to unswitched terminals in the vehicle fuse panel after providing proper fusing ATTENTION For uninterrupted power electrical supply connections should not be made at any point after the ignition switch of the vehicle 13 Use proper electrical and mechanical fastening means for terminating the cable Properly sized crimp type electrical terminals are an accepted method of termination Select electrical connectors sized for use with 18AWG 1mm conductors 14 Provide m
287. r the COM1 or COM2 port on the Quick Mount Smart Dock 2 Connect the serial cable for the scanner as directed above 3 When the Thor VM2 is powered on it provides power to the serial scanner 4 Configure the Data Collection DC Wedge to manipulate scanned data as desired Connect Headset Cable The CANbus Audio connector supports a headset adapter cable or a CANbus cable The Thor VM2 does not support con necting audio and CANbus simultaneously To headset To Audio Ss ak connector on dock Headphones Microphone To Audio cable See CANbus Audio Connector page 10 6 for connector pinouts 1 Seat the D15 cable end connector firmly over the CANbus Audio Connector on the Quick Mount Smart Dock 2 Tighten the thumbscrews in a clockwise direction Do not over tighten 3 Slide the cable ends together until they click shut Do not twist or bend the connectors The Thor VM2 internal microphone and speakers are automatically disabled when the headset is connected Adjust Headset Microphone and Secure Cable The headset consists of an earpiece a microphone a clothing clip and a cable 1 Do not twist the microphone boom when adjusting the microphone The microphone should be adjusted to be about two finger widths from your mouth 2 Make sure the microphone is pointed at your mouth Note the small Talk
288. ra or replacement stylus may be ordered A replaceable touch screen protective film is available when the Thor VM2 is used in an abrasive environment Contact Technical Assistance page 11 1 for availability Note Ifthe touch screen is disabled or looses calibration on a Thor VM2 you must use a USB mouse or keyboard attached to the Thor VM2 to access the control panel to re enable or recalibrate the touch screen unless a programmable key has been assigned to that function Screen Blanking Screen blanking blackout can be enabled when the vehicle is in motion See Screen Blanking page 4 49 for hardware setup and Screen Control page 5 90 for software setup to enable screen blanking Once screen blanking is enabled the display is blanked out any time when the cable sends the signal the vehicle is in motion If the cable is removed screen blanking is disabled and the display remains on Display Backlight Control The display brightness can be adjusted manually via the keypad 1 Press the Blue key to enter Blue mode 2 Press P3 to increase brightness or P4 to decrease brightness 3 Press the Blue key to exit Blue mode Vehicle Mounting and Accessory Installation Introduction The Thor VM2 is designed to be mounted to a Quick Mount Smart Dock in a vehicle with either a RAM mount or U Bracket sys tem A power cable is provided with the Thor VM2 dock An optional USB keyboard and keyboard mount is available Optional com
289. rating system is Microsoft Windows Embedded CE 6 The Thor VM2 operating system revision is dis played on the Desktop This is the default setting for the Desktop Display Background Windows CE Operating System Note For general use instruction please refer to commercially available Windows CE user s guides or the Windows CE on line Help application installed with the Thor VM2 operating system This segment assumes the system administrator is familiar with Microsoft Windows options and capabilities loaded on most standard Windows computers Therefore the sections that follow describe only those Windows capabilities that are unique to the Thor VM2 and its Windows CE environment General Windows CE Keyboard Shortcuts Use the keyboard shortcuts in the chart below to navigate with the Thor VM2 keyboard These are standard keyboard shortcuts for Windows CE applications Press these keys To CTRL C Copy CTRL X Cut CTRL V Paste CTRL Z Undo DELETE Delete SHIFT with any of the arrow keys Select more than one item in a window or on the desktop or select text within a document CTRL A Select all ALT ESC Cycle through items in the order they were opened CTRL ESC Display the Start menu ALT Underlined letter in a menu name Display the corresponding menu Underlined letter in a command name on Carry out the corresponding command an open menu ESC Cancel the current task The touch screen provides equivalent functionality
290. re you ship the Thor VM2 or Replace Front Panel page 4 64 Equipment Required The following equipment is user supplied Torquing tool capable of measuring inch pounds 2 Phillips screwdriver bit Disconnect Procedure 1 For convenience the Thor VM2 can be removed from the Quick Mount Smart Dock though it is not necessary If the Thor VM2 remains in the dock disconnect the power cable from the dock Place the Thor VM2 in Suspend by pressing the Power button Place the Thor VM2 face down on a stable surface Using a 2 Phillips bit loosen the M3 screws and then remove the tethered access panel with the SIM label This panel is on the right hand side when the Thor VM2 is face down with the top away from the user EN W A m I ova ova Iii Sz A a
291. red to manage network and wireless settings the Enabler will not apply the manage network and wireless settings to the adapter unless the global Manage wireless set tings and Manage network settings options are enabled on the Adapters page 7 12 panel Until these options are enabled the network and wireless settings are controlled by the third party software associated with these settings Status The Status panel displays the current status of the Thor VM2 network adapter selected in the drop down box Note the availability of the Windows standard Refresh button When the Windows Refresh button is tapped the signal strength signal quality and link speed are refreshed for the currently selected adapter It also searches for new adapters and may cause a slight delay to refresh the contents of the drop down menu Avalanche Update Settings Shortcuts SaaS Adapters Status Surnmit 304G Series WLAN Adapte y 2 Signal Strength Signal Quality IP Address 100 100 100 100 MAC 00 17 23 00 00 00 SSID lab BSSID 00 16 47 00 00 00 Link Speed 54 0 Mbps Link speed indicates the speed at which the signal is being sent from the adapter to the Thor VM2 Speed is depen dent on signal strength Exit The Exit option is password protected The default password is leave The password is not case sensitive Input Exit Password Do you want to Continue monitoring O Stop monitoring
292. rement You will need a torquing tool capable of torquing to 35 50 inch pounds 1 10 N m Torque all screws and bolts accord ing to the following table For these bolts Torque to 1 4 20x5 8 Bolts 50 in lb 5 6 N m M5x16mm Bolts 35 in lb 4 0 N m 1 4 Bolts user supplied 50 0 5 in Ib 5 64 56 N m Mounting Positions The adapter bracket can be mounted in a high or low position depending on viewing position as shown below o oO ar Z GC Additionally the slotted U bracket allows the Thor VM2 to be mounted vertically or tilted forward or backward for best viewing angle Step 1 Install U Bracket to Vehicle 1 Position the bracket to allow access to the switches and ports on the bottom of the Thor VM2 2 Attach the bottom mounting bracket to the vehicle mounting surface using a minimum of four 1 4 bolts or equiva lent fasteners Note 1 4 bolts and washers not included It is recommended to use lock washers and flat washers on the fasteners IMPORTANT Mount to the most rigid surface available qo G S Be 1 After the bottom bracket has been attached to a rigid surface you are ready to assemble the Thor VM2 bracket config uration Mounting Dimensions Note Drawing not to scale 14 40 in 35
293. ring When bar code data is processed the Suffix string is sent to the output buffer after the bar code data Because all stripping operations have already occurred stripping settings do not affect the suffix The suf fix is added to the output buffer for the Symbology selected from the pull down list If All is selected the suffix is added for any symbology that has not been specifically configured Note Non ASCII equivalent keys in Key Message mode are unavailable in this option Non ASCII equivalent keys include the function keys e g F1 arrow keys Page up Page down Home and End Symbologies The Thor VM2 supports only Custom IDs Ctrl Char Mapping The Ctrl Char Mapping button Control Character Mapping activates a dialog to define the operations the Data Collection Wedge performs on control characters values less than 0x20 embedded in bar codes Control Character lok E J Translate All Control Character Replacement ACKnowledge Ignore drop Carriage Return 0x0D End of Text SM Character Form Feed y Replacement fignore drop Assign Delete Control characters can be replaced with user defined text which can include hat encoded or hex encoded values In key message mode control characters can also be translated to their control code equivalent key sequences Translate All When Translate All is checked unprintable ASCII characters characters below 20H in scanned bar cod
294. rivate key file 4 After installation perform a Suspend Resume 5 Verify Installation page 8 38 Generate a Root CA Certificate Note It is important that all dates are correct on the Thor VM2 and host computers when using any type of certificate Certificates are date sensitive and if the date is not correct authentication will fail The easiest way to get the root CA certificate is to use a browser on a PC to navigate to the Certificate Authority To request the root CA certificate open a browser to http lt CA IP address gt certsrv Sign into the CA with any valid username and password Connect to 10 1 2 204 Connecting to 100 100 100 100 User name Le Password C Remember my password Microsoft Certificat Welcome Use this Web site to request a certificate for your Web browser e mail client or other program By using a certificate you can verify your identity to people you communicate with over the Web sign and encrypt messages and depending upon the type of certificate you request perform other security tasks You can also use this Web site to download a certificate authority CA certificate certificate chain or certificate revocation list CRL or to view the status of a pending request For more information about Certificate Services see Certificate Services Documentation Select a task Request a certificate View the status of a pending certificate request Download a CA certificate
295. rocessing will return a zero byte data packet which will be rejected The operation of each type of stripping is defined below Leading This strips the number of characters specified from the beginning of the collected data not including Code ID The data is stripped unconditionally This action is disabled by default Trailing This strips the number of characters specified from the end of the collected data not including Code ID The data is stripped unconditionally This action is disabled by default Code ID Strips the Code ID based on the type code ID specified in the Enable Code ID field in the Data Options tab By default Code ID stripping is enabled for every symbology meaning code IDs will be stripped unless specifically configured otherwise Bar Code Data Match List This panel is used to strip data that matches the entry in the Match list from the bar code Enter the data to be stripped in the text box and tap the Insert or Add button The entry is added to the Match list S o Add Clear All To remove an entry from the Match list highlight the entry in the list and click the Remove button Click the OK button to store any additions deletions or changes Bar Code Data Match Edit Buttons Add Entering data into the text entry box enables the Add button Click the Add button and the data is added to the next empty location in the Custom ID list Insert Click on an empty line in the C
296. rvice contract length for the Thor VM2 Information on the License Viewer tabs is unique for each Thor VM2 Note Following image is a sample screen Your License Viewer control panel may show more tabs e g RFTerm depending on the number of software applications running on the Thor VM2 that require a license License Viewer WaveLink RETerm Factory Enable Indicator alid License TE WIB Date of Manufacture 9 2 f 2013 Service Contract Indicator 29 Months SIN M2C111111111 GUID F3000000 FD00 B000 1F00 00000000001D Mixer Start gt Settings gt Conirol Panel gt Mixer The Thor VM2 has two speakers located at the bottom front of the unit and one microphone located at the top front of the unit Use the settings on these panels to adjust the master volume record gain and sidetone Factory Default Settings Output Master Volume 7 dB Input Record Gain 0 0 dB Sidetone Disabled Output Panel Tap and hold the Master Volume slider and move either left or right or tap the left and right arrows to adjust Speaker volume decibel level Tap the Test button to play a sample sound at the selected volume Input Panel Sidetone 0 0 dB Use the radio buttons to enable or disable the sidetone Tap and hold the Record Gain or Sidetone sliders and move either left or right or tap the left and right arrows to adjust the levels 5 70
297. s Enable buffered key output Default is enabled checked Click the checkbox to turn off buffered key output Same buffer limit Default is 32 ms Raise or lower this value as desired Delay between key buffers Specifies the number of milliseconds to delay after each character in the scanned bar code is processed as a key stroke This value may need to be adjusted depending on the network traffic in the environment The default value is 75 ms Valid value is from 0 to 9999 A zero value is No Delay between characters About Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Data Collection gt About tab This tab displays the Data Collection Wedge driver version installed in the Thor VM2 The version number shown in the image below is used only as an example your version number will be different Data Collection Main coma coma Data Options Processing About DCWedge Version DCWPCEX1Ay Length Based Bar Code Stripping Use this procedure to create symbology rules for two bar codes with the same symbology but with different discrete lengths This procedure is not applicable for bar codes with variable lengths falling between a maximum value and a minimum value Example For the purposes of this example the following sample bar code parameters will be used EAN 128 and Code 128 bar codes Some of the bar codes start with 00 and some start with 01 The bar codes are different lengths
298. s Donot Monitor When the device boots do not launch the Enabler application and do not attempt to connect to the Mobile Device Server e Monitor for Updates Attempt to connect to the Mobile Device Server and process any updates that are available Do not launch the Enabler application e Launch User Interface Attempt to connect to the Mobile Device Server and process any updates that are available Launch the Enabler application Display Level Shutdown Behavior of the monitor when the Enabler is exited The default is Monitor for Updates e Monitor for Updates Attempt to connect to the Mobile Device Server and process any updates that are available Do not launch the Enabler application e Exit Application Terminates the monitor requires successful password entry if a password has been configured Activity Log Log Level Use this option to control the level of detail recorded in the log file The default is No Activity Log e No Activity Log No log file is written e Critical Only critical errors written to the log files Error Communication or configuration problems are written to the log file along with critical messages Warning Possible operation problems are written to the log file along with critical and error messages e Info Operational information is written to the log file e Debug The most detailed log file Use this option to control the level of detail shown on the main Enabl
299. s 12 hex digits no colons For example LnkB0400fd002031 Create and print the label Scan the Thor VM2 Bluetooth address bar code label with the Bluetooth bar code reader The devices are paired The Bluetooth bar code reader responds with a series of beeps and LED flashes Note After scanning the Thor VM2 Bluetooth label if there is no beep and no LED flash from the Bluetooth bar code reader the devices are currently paired See Bluetooth Beep and LED Indications page 5 38 Bluetooth Beep and LED Indications Beep Type from Bluetooth Device Behavior Acknowledge label 1 beep Label rejected 2 beeps at low frequency Transmission error Beep will sound high low high low Link successful Beep will sound low medium high Link unsuccessful Beep will sound high low high low LED on Bluetooth Device Behavior Yellow LED blinks at 2 Hz Linking in progress Off Disconnected or unlinked Yellow LED blinks at 50 Hz Bluetooth transmission in progress Yellow LED blinks at the same rate as the paging beep 1 Hz Paging Green LED blinks once a second Disabled indication Upon startup if the scanner sounds a long tone this means the scanner has not passed its automatic Selftest and has entered isolation mode If the scanner is reset the sequence is repeated Contact Technical Assistance page 11 1 for assistance Bluetooth Printer Setup The Bluetooth managed device should be as close as possible in direct line of sight with the
300. s Disabled unchecked by default Boot When enabled checked all previous paired information is deleted upon any reboot sequence and no devices are reconnected When enabled checked Auto Reconnect on Boot is automatically disabled dimmed Auto Reconnect on Boot This option is Enabled checked by default All previously paired devices are recon nected upon any reboot sequence When disabled unchecked no devices are reconnected upon any reboot sequence Auto Reconnect This option is Enabled checked by default This option controls the overall mobile Bluetooth device reconnect behavior e When Auto Reconnect is disabled unchecked Auto Reconnect on Boot is automatically disabled and dimmed e When Auto Reconnect is disabled unchecked no devices are reconnected in any situation The status of Auto Reconnect on Boot is ignored and no devices are reconnected on boot The status of Clear Pairing Table on Boot controls whether the pairing table is populated on boot e When Auto Reconnect is enabled checked and Auto Reconnect on Boot is disabled unchecked devices are not reconnected on boot but are reconnected in other situations example return from out of range e When Auto Reconnect is enabled checked and Clear Pairing Table on Boot is enabled checked devices are not reconnected on boot but are reconnected in other situations example return from out of range The pairing table is cleared on boot The status
301. s directory and reboot the unit De leting AppLock exe triggers the AppLock system to reload Converted Pwd Converted password from wide to mbs LOG_EX 10 8 Message Explanation and or corrective action Could not create event The keyboard filter uses this event at the Administrator Control panel The event EVT_HOTKEYCHG could not be created If the keyboard cannot be controlled AppLock cannot process the hotkey This Could not hook keyboard failure prevents a mode switch into user mode Could not start thread Hot The keyboard filter must watch for hot key changes The watch process could KeyMon not be initiated Ctrl after L or X Processing the backdoor entry Ctrl pressed The Ctrl key has been pressed and trapped by the HotKey processing Ctrl Processing the hotkey and backdoor entry Decrypt acquire context Unable to decrypt password failure Decrypt acquired context Decryption process ok OK Decrypt create hash failure Unable to decrypt password Decrypt created hash OK Decryption process ok Decrypt failure Unable to decrypt password Decrypt import key failure Unable to decrypt password Decrypt imported key OK Decryption process ok Encrypt acquire context Unable to encrypt password failure Encrypt acquire encrypt Unable to encrypt password context failure Encrypt acquired encrypt Encrypt password process successful context OK Encrypt create hash failure Unable to encrypt passw
302. s up The user cannot unintentionally or intentionally exit the application nor can the end user execute any other applica tions Normal application exit or switching methods and all Microsoft defined Windows CE key combinations such as close X icon File Exit File Close Alt F4 Alt Tab etc are disabled The Windows CE desktop icons menu bars task bar and system trays are not visible or accessible Task Manager is not available If the end user selects File Exit or Close from the applications menu bar the menu is cleared and nothing else hap pens the application remains active Nothing happens when the end user clicks on the Close icon on the application s title bar and the application remains active Note A few applications do not follow normal procedures when closing AppLock cannot prevent this type of application from closing but is notified that the application has closed For these applications AppLock immediately restarts the application which causes the screen to flicker If this type of application is being locked SES should close all other applications before switching to end user mode to minimize the screen icker Windows accelerator keys such as Alt F4 are disabled Passwords A password must be configured If the password is not configured a new device switches into Administration mode without prompting for a password In addition to the hotkey press a mode switch occurs if inaccurate information has been configure
303. s user supplied es SIM card for desired carrier e Torquing tool capable of measuring inch pounds e 2 Phillips screwdriver bit Installation Procedure 1 For convenience the Thor VM2 can be removed from the Quick Mount Smart Dock though it is not necessary 2 Ifthe Thor VM2 remains in the dock disconnect the power cable from the dock 3 Place the Thor VM2 in Suspend by pressing the Power button 4 Place the Thor VM2 face down on a stable surface 5 Using a 2 Phillips bit loosen the M3 screws and then remove the tethered access panel with the SIM label This panel is on the right hand side when the Thor VM2 is face down with the top away from the user
304. save the change The change takes effect immediately Appearance Display Properties Background Appearance Backlight Scheme Normal Disabled EER CH Nol x Windows Standard Active Window a op D Item Dialog Box Text Desktop y There is very little change from general desktop PC Appearance options Select a scheme from the dropdown list and make changes to the parameters The default is High Contrast White for monochrome displays and Windows Stan dard for color displays Tap the Save button to save any changes renaming the scheme if desired Tap the Delete but ton to delete schemes Tap the Apply button to apply the selected scheme to the display Backlight Display Properties Ok E Background Appearance Backlight 2 To save battery life you can adjust when the backlight automatically shuts off M Automatically turn off backlight while on battery power Turn off after E seconds y of continuous idle time Y Automatically turn off backlight while on external power Turn off after fis minutes y of continuous idle time When the backlight timer expires the touch screen backlight is dimmed not turned off When both checkboxes are unchecked the backlight never turns off or dims The default value for external power varies by Power Configuration Mode page 5 80 selected and for Ignition Con trol the status of the vehicle ignition The default value is 30
305. scharge ESD protection Vehicle 10 60VDC Direct Power Connection 1 The Thor VM2 must not be mounted in the Quick Mount Smart Dock The power switch on the dock must be turned Off The power cable must be UNPLUGGED from the dock 2 While observing the Fuse Requirements see page 4 34 connect the power cable as close as possible to the actual battery terminals of the vehicle if using unswitched power 3 Use proper electrical and mechanical fastening means for terminating the cable Properly sized crimp type electrical terminals are an accepted method of termination Please select electrical connectors sized for use with 20AWG 0 81mm2 conductors 4 Refer to the wiring diagrams following this section for wire colors and connections e Ignition Control Wiring Diagram page 4 36 8 9 10 11 12 e Auto On Control Wiring Diagram page 4 37 e Manual Control Wiring Diagram page 4 38 Route the power cable the shortest way possible removing any left over cable The cable is rated for a maxi mum temperature of 105 C 221 F Therefore when routing this cable it should be protected from physical damage and from surfaces that might exceed this temperature Cable should be protected from physical damage from moving parts Do not expose the cable to chemicals or oil that may cause the wiring insulation to deteriorate Always route the cable so that it does not interfere with safe operation and maintenance of the vehicle
306. ser certificate is to use a browser on a PC to navigate to the Certificate Authority To request the user certificate open a browser to http lt CA IP address gt certsrv Sign into the CA with the username and password of the person who will be logging into the mobile device Connect to 10 1 2 204 Connecting to 100 100 100 100 User name Le Password Remember my password This process saves a user certificate and a separate private key file Windows CE equipped devices such as the Thor VM2 require the private key to be saved as a separate file rather than including the private key in the user certificate Microsoft Certificat Welcome Use this Web site to request a certificate for your Web browser e mail client or other program By using a certificate you can verify your identity to people you cormmunicate with over the Web sign and encrypt messages and depending upon the type of certificate you request perform other security tasks You can also use this Web site to download a certificate authority CA certificate certificate chain or certificate revocation list CRL or to view the status of a pending request For more information about Certificate Services see Certificate Services Documentation Select a task Request a certificate View the status of a pending certificate request Download a CA certificate certificate chain or CRL Click the Request a certificate link Microsoft C
307. sie 57 dem IP 100 100 100 200 Mac 00 02 2d 00 00 00 Signal Quality 83 This screen provides information on the radio The profile being used The status of the radio card down associated authenticated etc Client information including device name IP address and MAC address Information about the Access Point AP maintaining the connection to the network including AP name IP address and MAC address Channel currently being used for wireless traffic Bit rate in Mbit Current transmit power in mW Beacon period the time between AP beacons in kilomicroseconds one kilomicrosecond 1 024 microseconds DTIM interval A multiple of the beacon period that specifies how often the beacon contains a delivery traffic indication message DTIM The DTIM tells power saving devices a packet is waiting for them For example if DTIM 3 then every third beacon contains a DTIM Signal strength RSSI displayed in dBm and graphically Signal quality a measure of the clarity of the signal displayed in percentage and graphically There are no user entries on this screen Note After completing radio configuration it is a good idea to review this screen to verify the radio has associated no encryption WEP or authenticated LEAP any WPA as indicated above Diags Start gt Programs gt Summit gt Diags tab Summit Client Utility fa ok x Main Profile Status Diags Global Prof
308. sing Note The Data Options tab contains only those options available for one type of decoding engine The Data Options tab contains several options to control bar code processing Options include e Defining custom Code IDs e Disable processing of specified bar code symbologies e Rejecting bar code data that is too short or too long e Stripping characters including Code ID leading or trailing characters and specified bar code data strings e Replacing control characters e Adding a prefix and a suffix Main com1 com2 Data Options Processing About Enable Code ID none y Symbology Settings Ctrl Char Mapping Custom Identifiers Enable Code ID Choose an option in the Enable Code ID drop down box None Disables transmission of a Code ID The only entry in the Symbology combo box is All Custom ID Does not change the scanner s Code ID transmission setting The combo box in the Symbology con trol panel is populated with any configured Custom code IDs Buttons Symbology Settings Individually enable or disable a bar code from being scanned set the minimum and maxi mum size bar code to accept strip Code ID strip data from the beginning or end of a bar code or based on configurable Bar Code Data add a prefix or suffix to a bar code before transmission Define the operations the Wedge performs on control characters values less than 0x20 embedded in bar codes Custom Identifiers Def
309. sktop laptop computer not the mobile device Depending on the bar code length and the number of parameters selected eXpress Config generates one or more bar codes for device configuration The bar codes contain configuration parameters for the wireless client in the mobile device and may also specify the address of the Mobile Device Server Bar codes should be printed at a minimum of 600 dpi Please see Using Wavelink Avalanche for details on creating barcodes Step 2 Scan Bar Codes For each mobile device to be configured please follow these instructions Start eXpress Scan on the Thor VM2 by double clicking the eXpress Scan icon Enter the bar code password if any eXpress Scan passcode Enter Passcode Press Start before scanning the first barcode Click Start Bar code 1 must be scanned first The scanned data is displayed in the Data text box The password if any entered above is compared to the password entered when the bar codes were created eXpress Scan Remaining Scanned Scan Barcode 1 into Data field If the passwords match the bar code data is processed and the screen is updated to reflect the number of bar codes included in the set If the passwords do not match an error message is displayed The current screen can be closed using the X box in the upper right corner The password can be re entered and Bar Code 1 scanned again eXpress Scan Remaining
310. slow blow fuse with a current rating as noted below e For 12VDC input use a 10A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 12VDC e For 24VDC input use a 6A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 24VDC e For 36VDC input use a 4A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 36VDC e For 48VDC input use a 3A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 48VDC Note For North America a UL Listed fuse is to be used Power Cable Identification The DC power cable included with the dock is one of the two styles below Power cable with right angle connector and 6 wires aE Wire Color Connection Bed DC 10 60 VDC Red White DC 10 60 VDC Twist the red and red white wires together and twist the Black DC black and black white wires together before connecting to vehicle power Black White DC Green Ground Blue Ignition Input optional Power cable with straight connector and 4 wires Wire Color Connection 57 Red DC 10 60 VDC Black DC Green Ground Note Correct electrical polarity is required for safe and proper installation See the figures below for additional wire color coding specifics The Thor VM2 DC input wires Red Red White DC and Black Black White DC and the Blue ignition input wire are galvanically isolated The Green ground input is used for electrostatic di
311. ss Information control panel Using the options in the Wireless Zero Config panels setup radio and security settings There may be a slight delay before the Wireless Zero Config icon indicates the status of the connection To Switch Control to SCU 1 To switch back to SCU control select any other profile in the SCU Active Config drop down list except ThirdPar tyConfig 2 Warmboot the device Radio control is passed to the SCU Main Start gt Programs gt Summit gt Main tab Factory Default Settings Admin Login SUMMIT Active Config Profile Regulatory Domain Worldwide Summit Client Utility Main Profile Status Diags Global a gt Active Profile Default v SUMMIT Status Associated DATA COMMUNICATIONS Radio Type ABG Auto Profle on off List Admin Login Reg Domain WorldWide Driver v3 03 09 Disable Radio SCU v3 03 09 About SCU The Main tab displays information about the wireless client device including e SCU Summit Client Utility version e Driver version e Radio Type ABG is an 802 11 a b g radio e Regulatory Domain e Copyright Information can be accessed by tapping the About SCU button e Active Config profile Active Profile name e Status of the client Down Associated Authenticated etc The Active Profile can be switched without logging in to Admin mode Selecting a different profile from the drop down list does not require logging in to Adminis
312. ssed by a user seated in the driver s seat while the vehicle is not in operation Quick Start The following list outlines in a general way the process to follow when mounting the Thor VM2 in a vehicle Refer to the fol lowing sections in this document for more details 1 Install RAM Mount page 4 20 or Install U Bracket Mount page 4 29 to the vehicle Place Thor VM2 in the Dock page 4 18 Secure the optional external keyboard to either an integrated or remote mounting bracket Adjust the Thor VM2 to the best viewing angle Install Remote Antenna page 4 57 or Install External Antenna page 4 56 if necessary Connect Cables page 4 32 for any peripherals Jm mF bh Connect vehicle power e 12 48 VDC Vehicles 10 60 VDC Direct Connection page 4 34 e 60 144 VDC Vehicles 50 150 VDC Power Supply Screws on Top of Lid page 4 43 e 60 144 VDC Vehicles 50 150 VDC Power Supply Screws on Side of Lid page 4 39 e Thor VX8 Thor VX9 Adapter Cable page 4 48 e VX6 VX 7 Adapter Cable page 4 47 8 Secure all cables in Strain Relief Cable Clamps page 4 32 The Thor VM2 is ready for use Maintenance Vehicle Mounted Devices Check the vehicle mounting hardware frequently and re tighten if necessary If the vehicle mounting hardware and connections become broken loose or cracked the assembly must be taken out of service and replaced Contact Technical Assistance page 11 1 for help Cleaning Do not use
313. status messages are logged when an error occurs and is intended to be used by the administrator to determine why the specified application cannot be locked Process Processing status shows the flow control of AppLock components and is mainly intended for Customer Service when helping users troubleshoot problems with their AppLock program Extended Extended status provides more detailed information than that logged by Process Logging All All messages are displayed Tap the Refresh button after changing from one view level to another The filtered records are displayed all others are not displayed Log Note If a level higher than Error is selected the status log should be cleared frequently by the administrator In addition to the three view levels the administrator can select that all status information be logged or turn off all status information logging completely The system default is None however to reduce registry use the adminis trator may want to select None after verifying the configuration Tap the ton to clear the status information from the registry es None e Error e Processing es Extended es All Save As When the Save As button is selected a standard Save As dialog screen is displayed Specify the path and filename If the filename exists the user is prompted whether the file should be overwritten If the file does not exist it is created See Also AppLock Error Messages page 10
314. sted store E M Validate server Use MS store If using the Windows certificate store 1 Check the Use MS store checkbox The default is to use the Full Trusted Store 2 To select an individual certificate click on the Browse button 3 Uncheck the Use full trusted store checkbox 4 Select the desired certificate and click Select You are returned to the Credentials screen 5 Click OK then click Commit If using the Certs Path option 1 Leave the Use MS store box unchecked 2 Enter the certificate filename in the CA Cert text box 3 Click OK then click Commit The Thor VM2 should be authenticating the server certificate and using EAP TLS for the user authentication Ensure the correct Active Profile is selected on the Main tab and warmboot The SCU Main tab shows the device is asso ciated after the radio connects to the network See Certificates page 8 30 for information on generating a Root CA certificate or a User certificate Note The date must be properly set on the device to authenticate a certificate WPA PSK To connect using WPA PSK make sure the following profile options are used 1 Enter the SSID of the Access Point assigned to this profile 2 Set EAP Type to None 3 Set Encryption to WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK 4 Set Auth Type to Open Summit Client Utility ol x Main Profile status Diags Global Profle Default y New Rename Delete Scan E Radio Encryption EAP type Jap
315. sults in dis abling all symbologies except the customized ones Min This field specifies the minimum length that the bar code data not including Code ID must meet to be processed Any bar code scanned that is less than the number of characters specified in the Min field is rejected The default for this field is 1 Max This field specifies the maximum length that the bar code data not including Code ID can be processed Any bar code scanned that has more characters than specified in the Max field is rejected The default for this field is All 9999 If the value entered is greater than the maximum value allowed for that symbology the maximum valid length is used instead Strip Leading Trailing Control Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Data Collection gt Data Options tab gt Symbology button This group of controls determines what data is removed from the collected data before the data is buffered for the application When all values are set Code ID takes precedence over Leading and Trailing Bar Code Data stripping is performed last Stripping occurs before the Prefix and Suffix are added so does not affect them Strip 7 Leading et C Code 10 IT Trailing P Barcode Data If the total number of characters being stripped is greater than the number of characters in the collected data it becomes a zero byte data string If in addition Strip Code ID is enabled and no prefix or suffix is configured the p
316. t key sequence by first pressing the Shift state key fol lowed by a normal key The hotkey selected must be a key sequence that the application being locked does not use The hotkey sequence is intercepted by AppLock and is not passed to the application Input from the keyboard or Input Panel is accepted with the restriction that the normal key must be pressed from the keyboard when switching modes The hotkey sequence is displayed in the Hot key text box with Shift Alt and Ctrl text strings representing the shift state keys The normal keyboard key completes the hotkey sequence The hotkey must be entered via the keypad Some hotkeys cannot be entered via the Input Panel Also hotkeys entered via the SIP are not guaranteed to work properly when switching operational modes For example if the Ctrl key is pressed followed by A Ctrl A is entered in the text box If another key is pressed after a normal key press the hotkey sequence is cleared and a new hotkey sequence is started A normal key is required for the hotkey sequence and is unlike pressing the normal key during a mode switch this key can be entered from the SIP when configuring the key However when the hotkey is pressed to switch modes the normal key must be entered from the keypad it cannot be entered from the SIP Password Move the cursor to the Password text box The passwords entered in the Password and Confirm Password fields must match P
317. t meet the criteria for that symbology it is processed based on the settings for All If a code ID is not found the bar code data is processed based on the settings for All If the symbology is disabled the scan is rejected Strip leading data bytes unconditionally Strip trailing data bytes unconditionally Parse for and strip if found Data Options strings Replace any control characters with string as configured Add prefix string to output buffer If Code ID is not stripped add saved code ID from above to output buffer oo NO mF O DN Add processed data string from above to output buffer 10 Add suffix string to output buffer 11 Add a terminating NUL to the output buffer in case the data is processed as a string 12 If key output is enabled start the process to output keys If control characters are encountered e If Translate All is set key is translated to CTRL char and output e If Translate All is not set and key has a valid VK code key is output e Otherwise key is ignored not output 13 If key output is disabled a windows message is broadcast to notify listening applications that data is available The manipulated data is ready to be read by applications Factory Default Settings Main page 5 42 Device 1 Device 2 Device 3 Send Key Message WEDGE COM1 page 5 43 Baud Rate Stop Bits Parity Data Bits Power on Pin 9 COM2 page 5 43 Baud Rate Stop Bits Parity Data Bi
318. t up the Thor VM2 to send data to the printer oN O Dm P Tap Serial Device when Filtered mode is disabled to set up the Thor VM2 to communicate with a Bluetooth serial device 9 Tap Disconnect to stop pairing with the device Once disconnected tap Delete to remove the device name and data from the Thor VM2 Bluetooth Devices list The device is deleted from the list after the OK button is clicked 10 Upon successful pairing the selected device may react to indicate a successful connection The reaction may be an audio signal from the device flashing LED on the device or a dialog box is placed on the Thor VM2 display 11 Whenever the Thor VM2 is turned On all previously paired live Bluetooth devices in the vicinity are paired one at a time with the Thor VM2 If the devices cannot connect to the Thor VM2 before the re connect time out time period expires default is approximately 20 seconds for each paired device there is no indication of the continuing disconnect state if Report Failure to Reconnect is disabled Bluetooth Indicators There may be audible or visual signals as paired devices re connect with the Thor VM2 Only printers or scanners are recognized and displayed in the Bluetooth panel All other Bluetooth devices are ignored Taskbar Icon Legend Thor VM2 is connected to one or more of the targeted Bluetooth device s e Thor VM2 is ready to connect with any Bluetooth device e Thor VM2 is out of range of a
319. ta Click the Bar Code Data button Click the Add button Add the data for the match codes 12 E PA E loa See Bar Code Data Match List page 5 47 for instruction Scan a bar code and examine the result Date Time Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Date Time or Time in Desktop Taskbar Use this Thor VM2 panel to set Date Time Time Zone and assign a Daylight Savings location Factory Default Settings Time Zone GMT 08 00 Daylight Savings Enabled Date Time Properties Date Time EI march2011 gt a SM Iw LIES a e 728 1 2 3 4 5 Time Zone 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 GMT 08 00 Pacific Time US amp Canada y 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 GMT 08 00 Pacific Time US amp Canada 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 Vv Automatically adjust clock for daylight saving 27 28 29 i31 1 2 45 6 9 Apply There is very little functional change from general desktop or laptop Date Time Properties options Double tapping the time displayed in the Desktop Taskbar causes the Date Time Properties screen to appear Date and time can be set to automatically synchronize with a time server on the Communications tab of the Options control panel See Autolaunch TimeSync page 5 74 Dialing Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Dialing Set dialup properties for internal modems not supplied or supported on the Thor VM2 Factory Default Settings Location Work
320. tab By default the first device in the boot order is USB Hard Drive The second device is the Windows CE Image If a USB drive such as a thumb drive is attached to the Thor VM2 the Thor VM2 attempts to boot from the USB drive e If the USB drive contains a bootable sector the Thor VM2 boots from the USB drive e If the USB drive does not contain a bootable sector the Thor VM2 does not boot Remove the USB drive and boot the Thor VM2 again Exiting BIOS Setup To exit the BIOS setup select the Exit tab and select one of these options e Save Setting and Restart e Exit Setup without Saving Changes e Reload Factory Defaults and Restart Control Panel Start gt Settings gt Control Panel or My Device gt Control Panel link Tap the button for Help when changing Thor VM2 Control Panel options Option About page 5 17 Accessibility page 5 18 Administration page 5 19 Battery page 5 29 Bluetooth page 5 29 Certificates page 5 39 Data Collection page 5 39 Date Time page 5 56 Dialing page 5 56 Display page 5 57 Gobi Connection Manager page 5 59 Input Panel page 5 66 Internet Options page 5 67 Keyboard page 5 69 License Viewer page 5 69 Mixer page 5 70 Mouse page 5 71 Network and Dialup Connections page 5 71 Network Capture page 5 72 Options page 5 74 Owner page 5 76 Password page 5 77 PC Connection page 5 77 Power page 5 78 Power Configurati
321. tap the Bluetooth icon in the taskbar or on the desk top 2 Tap the Settings Tab 3 Change the Computer Friendly Name at the bottom of the Settings display The Bluetooth Thor VM2 default name is determined by the factory installed software version A unique name up to 32 characters should be assigned to every Thor VM2 before Bluetooth Discovery is initiated 4 Check or uncheck the Thor VM2 Bluetooth options on the Settings and Reconnect tabs 5 Tap the OK button to save your changes or the X button to discard any changes Subsequent Use Note Taskbar and Bluetooth device Icon states change as Bluetooth devices are discovered paired connected and disconnected A taskbar Bluetooth icon with a red background indicates Bluetooth is active and not paired with any device A device icon with a red background indicates a disconnected paired device 1 Tap the Bluetooth icon in the taskbar or on the desktop to open the Bluetooth EZPair application Tap the Bluetooth Devices tab Di Tap the Discover button When the Bluetooth module begins searching for in range Bluetooth devices the button name changes to Stop Tap the Stop button to cancel the Discover function at any time The discovered devices are listed in the Bluetooth Devices window Highlight a Bluetooth device in the Discovered window and double tap to open the device properties menu Tap Pair as Scanner to set up the Thor VM2 to receive scanner data Tap Pair as Printer to se
322. tatus and a navigation menu File View Help Update complete Update complete Note Some parameters and features described in this section may not be available if you are not running the latest version of the Enabler Contact Technical Assistance page 11 1 for upgrades File Menu Options Connect The Connect option under the File menu allows the user to initiate a manual connection to the Mobile Device Server The connection methods by default are wireless and COM connections Any updates available will be applied to the Thor VM2 immediately upon a successful connection Scan The Scan Configuration feature is not supported The Scan Config option under the File menu allows the Config user to configure Enabler settings using a special bar code that can be created using the Avalanche MC Console utilities Refer to the Wavelink Avalanche Mobility Center User Guide for details Settings The Settings option under the File menu allows the Thor VM2 user to access the control panel to locally configure the Enabler settings The Enabler control panel is by default password protected Input Settings Password E The default Settings password is system The password is not case sensitive Avalanche Update using File gt Settings Use these menu options to setup the Avalanche Enabler on the Thor VM2 Change the settings and save them by reboot ing before connecting to the network Alternatively the M
323. tch has a raised bump to identify the switch position even when it is hidden from view When the side of the switch with the raised bump is pressed the power switch is On If the dock is connected to external power the dock delivers power to the Thor VM2 Generally once the dock is powered On there is no need to power it off The dock power can remain On even when the Thor VM2 is not attached eee Power Button The power button is located at the lower left of the Thor VM2 If the Thor VM2 is Off pressing the power button starts the power up sequence Note This assumes that the Thor VM2 is docked in a powered Quick Mount Smart Dock or that the internal UPS battery has a sufficient charge to power the Thor VM2 If no external power is available and the UPS battery does not have a charge pressing the power button causes no action If the Thor VM2 is On pressing the power button places the unit in Suspend Power Configuration Mode The Power Configuration Mode control panel is used to select desired power configuration behavior Please refer to the Power Configuration Mode page 5 80 control panel for complete details For information on the Ignition input signal see Vehicle 10 60VDC Direct P
324. te a Root CA Certiticaie 8 30 Install a Root CA Cerificate nn a aa aiaa 8 32 Generate a User Certificate 8 33 Install a User Ceniticate sr noni Wicker ee ege der 8 37 Worthy Stalin E 8 38 Chapter 9 Key Maps Integrated Keypad irene aee a E e E a 9 1 External 95 K8y Key bard sarissa tie 9 2 Chapter 10 Specifications and Reference Material Terre Specifications seci IA ace dn ate id 10 1 TAIANA o ada 10 1 Quick Mount Smart Dock e a 10 1 DIMOENSIONS EE 10 2 A te tie eee ates otto klub a a ele a hte Bk oe e Bee 10 2 Quick Mount Smart Dock a a a a A 10 2 Environmental Specifications orina 10 2 Thor VM1 and Quick Mount Smart Dock nana nanononanananonananinos 10 2 Network Card Specifications eege eg eege techs dees de ee nee 10 3 SUMMUE BOD TAG DI WEE 10 3 Bluetooth aces bes oh tt tars honest ee hacen soca des 10 3 WWAN EE 10 3 Port and Connector PinOuts occcccconccncccnnocncnnnnnanonononaccnnnnnncnnnnonancncno nana cnn ono n arrancan ncn nn anar 10 4 Power Supply Tell Eta lada 10 4 COM1 and COM2 Connector oocccccnnnccccccnncoccnnnnnncnnnnnnanonononanonononananonononancncnn nan cano nanananes 10 4 LE ele e EE 10 5 10 a o lA o A O 10 5 CANbus Audio Connector ico ninia dida 10 6 Headset Adapter Cable necia latir pan 10 6 CANbus Y Cable rieo ii 10 7 AppLock Error Messages estais 10 8 Hat ENCOdING tetnda settee hice ence nteeaeaateeaetee 10 13 Chapter 11 Customer Support Product Service and Replied 11 1
325. ted from the list box Custom Identifiers Code IDs are defined by the user for external bar code scanners These are called custom Code IDs and are included in the Symbology drop down box in the Symbology dialog unless Enable Code ID is set to None When the custom Code ID is found in a bar code the configuration specified for the custom Code ID is applied to the bar code data When Enable Code ID is set to None custom code IDs are ignored Note When Strip Code ID is enabled the entire custom Code ID string is stripped i e treated as a Code ID The dialog box shown below allows the custom Code IDs to be configured When incoming data is checked for a custom ID code the list is compared in the order displayed in this dialog box de E Name J Add ID Code l clear All After adding changing and removing items from the Custom IDs list click the OK button to save changes and return to the Bar Code panel Parameters Name text box Name is the descriptor that is used to identify the custom Code ID Names must be unique from each other however the Name and ID Code may have the same value Name is used in the Symbology drop down box to identify the custom Code ID in a user friendly manner Both Name and ID Code must be specified in order to add a custom Code ID to the Custom IDs list ID Code text box ID Code defines the data at the beginning of a bar code that acts as an identifier the actual Code ID B
326. th hardware and software is installed e The mobile Bluetooth laser scanner laser imager battery is fully charged e The Thor VM2 is connected to AC or DC vehicle power Important The bar code numbering examples in this segment are not real and should not be created nor scanned with a Bluetooth scanner To open theEZPair program tap Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Bluetooth or tap the Bluetooth icon on the desktop or tap the Bluetooth icon in the taskbar Ln 440fd0 1020 Sa kBOO 01020 Sample Locate the bar code label similar to the one shown above attached to the Thor VM2 The label is the Bluetooth address identifier for the Thor VM2 The mobile Bluetooth scanner imager requires this information before discovering pairing connecting or discon necting can occur Important The Thor VM2 Bluetooth address identifier label should remain protected from damage rips tears spills soiling erasure etc at all times It may be required when pairing connecting and disconnecting new Bluetooth bar code readers Thor VM2 with Label If the Thor VM2 has a Bluetooth address bar code label attached follow these steps 1 Scan the Bluetooth address bar code label attached to the Thor VM2 with the Bluetooth mobile scanner 2 If this is the first time the Bluetooth scanner has scanned the Thor VM2 Bluetooth label the devices are paired See Bluetooth Beep and LED Indications page 5 38 If the devices
327. the Type pull down list to Private Keys select the certificate desired and tap OK Enter the password for the certificate if appropriate Verify Installation Tap on View to see the certificate details again Certificate Details Friendly Mame Field Private Key y Present El The private key should now say present If it does not there is a problem Possible items to check Make sure the certificate was generated with a separate private key file as shown earlier in this section If the certificate was not generated with a separate private key file generate a new certificate and follow the import process again Make sure the certificate and private key file have the same name for example AAAuser cer for the certificate and AAAuser pvk for the private key file If the file names are not the same rename the private key file and import it again Key Maps Integrated Keypad There are five integrated programmable keys located on the Thor VM2 below the display Each programmable key can be mod ified by the Orange key for a total of 10 programmable keys See Programmable Key page 5 83 to remap these keys The default values for these keys are To get this Programmable Key Press These Keys in this Order Default Key Value P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 P7 P8 Programmable key 8 P10 Programmable key 10 Orange P5 lt none gt Programmable key 2 Programmable key 3 Programmable key 4 Programma
328. the Wi Fi connection The eXpress Scan page 7 15 utility allows an administrator to scan bar codes to provide the initial network and Avalanche Mobile Device Server address configuration This eliminates the need to edit radio parame ters manually on the Thor VM2 eXpress Scan uses bar codes created with eXpress Config RFTerm is an optional terminal emulation program When RFTerm is installed this icon is displayed on the desktop A shortcut to the Remote Desktop Connection utility Avalanche shortcut Wavelink Avalanche Mobility Center Avalanche MC is a remote client manage ment system that is designed to distribute software and configuration updates to monitored devices The en abler for Wavelink Avalanche is loaded on the Thor VM2 but not installed When the enabler is installed the Avalanche icon is displayed on the desktop The demo version of Wavelink Telnet CE may be installed Contact Technical Assistance page 11 1 for licensing information When installed license details are maintained in the Wavelink tab in the License View er control panel Start button Access programs select from the Favorites listing documents last worked on change view set tings for the control panel or taskbar on line help or run programs Taskbar Su 9 01PM lgl The number and type of icons displayed are based on the device type installed options and configuration of the Thor VM2 My Device Folders Folder Descripti
329. time delay slow blow fuse with a current rating as noted below e For 60VDC input use a 6A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 60VDC e For 72VDC input use a 6A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 72VDC e For 96VDC input use a 4A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 96VDC e For 108VDC input use a 4A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 108VDC e For 120VDC input use a 4A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 120VDC e For 132VDC input use a 3A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 132VDC e For 144VDC input use a 3A slow blow fuse that has a DC voltage rating greater than 144VDC Note For North America a UL Listed fuse is to be used Power Cable Identification The DC power cable included with the dock is one of the two styles below Power cable with right angle connector and 6 wires Wire Color Connection Red 2 wires DC 10 60 VDC Black 2 wires DC Twist the red and red white wires together and twist the Green Ground black and black white wires together before connecting to vehicle power Blue Ignition Input not used Power cable with straight connector and 4 wires Wire Color Connection Red DC 10 60 VDC Black DC Green Ground Blue Ignition Input not used Note Correct e
330. tings during administration mode The read of the registry failed which means the Administration key was not found or the Ap pName value was missing or empty Registry read failure The registry read failed The registry information read when this message is LOG_ERROR logged is the application information It the Administration key cannot be opened or if the AppName value is missing or empty this error is logged The other ap plication information is not required If the AppName value is not available Ap pLock cannot switch into user mode Reset system work area The system work area is adjusted when in user mode to cover the taskbar area LOG_ERROR failure The system work area has to be adjusted to exclude the taskbar area in admin istration mode AppLock was unable to adjust this area ministrator Switching to admin hotkey The system is currently in user mode and is now switching to admin mode The LOG_ press switch occurred because of a hotkey press by the administrator PROCESSING Shift pressed The Shift key has been pressed and trapped by the HotKey processing LOG_EX Shift Processing the hotkey and backdoor entry LOG_EX Show taskbar The taskbar is now being made visible and enabled LOG_ PROCESSING Switching to admin back The system is currently in user mode and is now switching to admin mode The LOG_ door switch occurred because of the backdoor key presses were entered by the ad PROCESSING Switching to admin
331. tion problem Telephone www honeywellaidc com locations For our latest contact information please check our website at the link above Limited Warranty Honeywell International Inc HII warrants its products to be free from defects in materials and workmanship and to conform to HII s published specifications applicable to the products purchased at the time of shipment This warranty does not cover any HII product which is i improperly installed or used ii damaged by accident or negligence including failure to follow the proper maintenance service and cleaning schedule or iii damaged as a result of A modification or alteration by the purchaser or other party B excessive voltage or current supplied to or drawn from the interface connections C static electricity or electro static discharge D operation under conditions beyond the specified operating parameters or E repair or service of the prod uct by anyone other than HII or its authorized representatives This warranty shall extend from the time of shipment for the duration published by HII for the product at the time of purchase Warranty Period Any defective product must be returned at purchaser s expense during the Warranty Period to HII factory or authorized service center for inspection No product will be accepted by HII without a Return Materials Authorization which may be obtained by contacting HII In the event that the product is returned to HII or
332. tions and explanations If you have a Windows Vista or Windows 7 operating system on your desktop laptop replace ActiveSync with Windows Mobile Device Center Using Microsoft ActiveSync you can synchronize information on your desktop computer with the Thor VM2 and vice versa Synchronization compares the data on your mobile device with your desktop computer and updates both with the most recent data For example you can e Back up and restore your device data e Copy rather than synchronize files between your device and desktop computer e Control when synchronization occurs by selecting a synchronization mode For example you can synchronize continually while connected to your desktop computer or only when you choose the synchronize command By default ActiveSync does not automatically synchronize all types of information Use ActiveSync Options to specify the types of information you want to synchronize The synchronization process makes the data in the information types you select iden tical on both your desktop computer and your device When installation of ActiveSync is complete on your desktop computer the ActiveSync Setup Wizard begins and starts the fol lowing processes e connect your device to your desktop computer e setup a partnership so you can synchronize information between your device and your desktop computer and e customize your synchronization settings Because ActiveSync is already installed on your device yo
333. to a mouse e A touch on the touch screen is equivalent to a left mouse click e Many items can be moved by the drag and drop method touching the desired item moving the stylus across the screen and releasing the stylus in the desired location e A double stylus tap is equivalent to a double click A touch and hold is equivalent to a right mouse click Some applications may not support this right click method Please review documentation for the application to see if it provides for right mouse click configuration e Devices with Shift and Ctrl Keys The Shift and Ctrl keys can be used with the touch screen for multiple selection of items e To select disconnected items press the Ctrl key and then touch each item to be selected in the set Press the Ctrl key again to terminate this mode e To select a connected set of items press the Shift key then touch the first item in the series Touch the last item in the series Press the Shift key again to terminate the selection mode Save Changes to the Registry The Thor VM2 saves the registry when you e Warmboot either from the Registry control panel the warmboot command or the reboot keypress sequence e Restart from the Registry control panel e Suspend Resume Either user initiated or upon Suspend timer expiration e Shutdown The registry is saved during a controlled shutdown such as when the UPS charge reaches a critically low level and external power is not availa
334. to secure audio power and I O cables attached to the Thor VM2 dock 0 1 Determine the proper strain relief cable clamp There are three sizes of cable clamps on the Thor VM2 which should be matched to the cable to be secured For example the largest clamp on the left when viewing the back of the Thor VM2 is designed to secure the power cable 2 Remove the strain relief clamp from the Thor VM2 by turning the screw counterclockwise Put the screw aside in a safe location 3 Slide the strain relief clamp over the cable 4 Using a Phillips screwdriver and the screw that was removed refasten the clamp holding the cable to the Quick Mount Do not stretch the cable Leave enough slack in the cable to allow it to be connected and disconnected easily when needed 5 Continue in this manner until all cables are secured to the Thor VM2 dock Connect Power Power options include 12 48 VDC Vehicles 10 60 VDC Direct Connection see page 4 34 Direct connection to vehicle power 60 144 VDC Vehicles 50 150 VDC Power Supply Screws on Side of Lid see page 4 39 Requires the use of a DC DC power supply 60 144 VDC Vehicles 50 150 VDC Power Supply Screws on Top of Lid see page 4 43 Requires the use of a DC DC power supply ee VX7 Adapter Cable see page 4 47 For applications where the Thor VM2 replaces a previously installed VX6 or 7 Thor VX8 Thor VX9 Adapter Cable see page 4 48 For applicat
335. top at any time to end the Discover and Query for Unique Identifier functions Devices not paired are not shown after any reboot sequence Note When an active paired device enters Suspend Mode is turned Off or leaves the Thor VM2 Bluetooth scanning range the Bluetooth connection between the paired device and the Thor VM2 is lost There may be audible or visual signals as paired devices disconnect from the Thor VM2 Bluetooth Device List Bluetooth Devices Settings Reconnect About Last 4 Bluetooth Address r 153578 61 DA 00 15 70 44 61 DA Gi LXE Scanner 00 85 0D 00 80 25 9F 85 0D Deskjet 36 10 00 04 76 BB 36 10 Clear Discover The discovered paired devices may or may not be identified with an icon Discovered devices without an icon can be paired as a Scanner or a Printer The Bluetooth panel assigns an icon to the device name An icon with a red background indicates the device s Bluetooth connection is inactive An icon with a white background indicates the device is connected to the Thor VM2 and the device s Bluetooth connection is active Double tap a device in the list to open the device properties menu The target device does not need to be active Clear Button Deletes all devices from the Device table that are not currently paired A dialog box is presented Delete all dis connected devices Yes No Tap the Yes button to remove disconnected or deleted devices from the device
336. trator mode The profile must already exist Profiles can be created or edited after the Admin login password has been entered and accepted When the profile named ThirdPartyConfig is chosen as the active profile the Summit Client Utility passes control to Win dows Zero Config for configuration of all client and security settings for the network module The Disable Radio button can be used to disable the network card Once disabled the button label changes to Enable Radio By default the radio is enabled The Admin Login button provides access to editing wireless parameters Profile and Global may only be edited after entering the Admin Login password The password is case sensitive Auto Profile If the Auto Profile selection is not present on the Main tab an SCU upgrade is necessary to support this feature on the Thor VM2 Auto Profile allows the user to configure a list of profiles that the SCU can search when a radio connection is lost After using the Profile tab to create any desired profiles return to the Main tab To specify which profiles are to be included in Auto Profile click the List button Profile SsIDO1 C ssipO2 SsIDO3 Web The Auto Profile selection screen displays all currently configured profiles Click on the checkbox for any profiles that are to be included in Auto Profile selection then click ok to save To enable Auto Profile click the On button on the Main t
337. ts Power on Pin 9 Data Options page 5 44 Enable Code ID Symbology Settings Control Character Translate All Custom IDs Processing page 5 53 Enable buffered key output Same buffer limit Delay between buffers Disabled Disabled Disabled Enabled 9600 7 None 8 Enabled 9600 7 None 8 Enabled None All Disabled Name blank Enabled 32 75 ms Main Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Data Collection gt Main tab The parameters shown on these panels are only those that apply to the specific mobile device Device 1 disabled O com O comz O Bluetooth J Output Enable Parameter Device 1 2 3 Output Enable Send Key Messages WEDGE Main com1 Come Data Options Processing About Device 2 disabled com O comz J Output Enable M Send Key Messages WEDGE Device 3 disabled O comi O com Oo Output Enable Function Device 1 Default is Disabled Device 2 Default is COM1 Device 3 Default is Disabled The data collection device laser scanner laser imager external or wireless Default Disabled When Output Enable is enabled data is received from the scanner and processed via the wedge but an application can also open the WDGO device and write data to it An example is when a printer is connected to the same COM port as the scanner via a switch Data can be written to the WDG device and
338. ts include Any key press on the integrated keypad or external USB keyboard e Touch on the touch screen System Primary Events A System Primary Event allows the Thor VM2 to transition to D2 System Idle but the Thor VM2 does not enter D3 Suspend as long the system event occurs System primary events include e Serial data transfer USB data transfer Wake Source Events These events wake the Thor VM2 from suspend e Power button e Touch on the touch screen e External power connection AC DC Auto On Ignition Control Ignition On power modes only e USB client connection e Ignition switched from Off to On Ignition Control Ignition Off power mode only e RTC Serial port CTS control line Headset connection this is not enabled by default but can be configured to wake the Thor VM2 Events generated by these actions are not processed For example the touch screen tap that wakes the Thor VM2 is ignored The following events DO NOT wake the Thor VM2 from suspend e Bluetooth keyboard or mouse e Bluetooth connection e USB client disconnect USB host data unless enabled via API USB host connection e SDIO interrupt e Serial data e 802 11 radio e External power disconnect Power Controls Power Switch After all cables are connected the Thor VM2 can be powered on There is a power switch located on the back of the Quick Mount Smart Dock The power switch is a rocker switch The power swi
339. uence The sequence can consist of keys and Unicode values 1 Select the modifier key from the Modifier Mode options Select the key to be remapped from the Key pull down list Select Key Sequence from the Remapped Key pull down list Select the first key for the multiple key sequence from the pull down list Press the Add button to add the key to the multiple key sequence shown in the Key Sequence box oe mr o bh Repeat this steps 4 and 5 until all desired keys have been added to the key sequence If necessary use the ton to erase all entries in the Key Sequence box 7 Click OK to save the result and close the control panel Remap a Key to a Sequence of Unicode Values Up to 16 Unicode values may be specified for the key sequence The sequence can consist of keys and Unicode values ao fF oO N 8 Select the modifier key from the Modifier Mode options Select the key to be remapped from the Key pull down list Select Key Sequence from the Remapped Key pull down list Select Unicode from the Key Sequence pull down list There are two Unicode text boxes located on the lower part of this tab Enter the Unicode value in the left text box and the Unicode character is displayed in the right text box Press the Add button to add the key to the multiple key sequence shown in the Key Sequence box Repeat this steps 4 through 7 until all desired characters have been added to the key sequence If necessary use the ton to erase all
340. uick Mount Smart Dock Va IS E ka ETENE E E Fe E m S El E A AO O O UEU e aA J o PE a U U oU aa SAD PED Ee aaa E IS EH aa aaa lalala Ea ead E E e e aS Eta ee 1 Seat the keyboard cable connector over the USB connector on the Thor VM2 Quick Mount Smart Dock 2 Tighten the thumbscrews in a clockwise direction Do not over tighten 3 Secure the cable to the Thor VM2 with Strain Relief Cable Clamps page 4 32 Connect USB Host USB Host Connector D9 Connector J USB Client Connector See USB Connector page 10 5 for connector pinouts 1 Seat the D9 connector firmly over the USB Connector on the Quick Mount Smart Dock 2 Tighten the thumbscrews in a clockwise direction Do not over tighten 3 The USB host connector provides a connector for a USB device such as a USB thumb drive 4 Secure the cables to the Thor VM2 with Strain Relief Cable Clamps page 4 32 Connect USB Client USB Host Connector D9 Connector _ J USB Client Connector See USB Connector page 10 5 for connector pinouts 1 Seat the D9 connector firmly over the USB Connector on the Quick Mount Smart Dock 2 Tighten the thumbscrews in a clockwise direction Do not over tighten 3 The USB client connector
341. ummit 30AG Series WLAN Adapter y Y primary adapter V Icon on taskbar Use Avalanche Network Profile a ir Note Review the network settings configuration utilities and the default values before setting All Adapters to Enable in the Adapters applet Manage Network Settings Manage Wireless Settings Current Adapter When enabled the Enabler will control the network settings This parameter cannot be config ured from the Avalanche Mobility Center Console and is enabled by default When enabled the Enabler will control the wireless settings This parameter cannot be config ured from the Avalanche Mobility Center Console and is disabled by default For Summit clients Manage Wireless Settings should not be checked as configuration packages provide more radio configuration options Lists all network adapters currently installed on the Thor VM2 Primary Adapter Icon on taskbar Use Avalanche Net work Profile Avalanche Icon varies by Enabler version A Use Manual Set tings Properties Icon Indicates if the Enabler is to attempt to configure the primary adapter active only if there are multiple network adapters Places the Avalanche icon in the Avalanche taskbar that may optionally override the standard Windows taskbar The Enabler will apply all network settings sent to it by the Mobile Device Server Selecting the Avalanche Icon will access the Avalanche Network Profi
342. und the kbdhook dll but was unable to get the address of the initial LOG_ERROR procedure failure ization procedure For some reason the dll is corrupted Look in the Windows directory for kodhook dll If it exists delete it Also delete AppLock exe from the Windows directory and reboot the unit Deleting AppLock exe triggers the Ap pLock system to reload Address of keyboard hook AppLock successfully retrieved the address of the keyboard filter initialization LOG_EX procedure OK procedure Alt pressed The Alt key has been pressed and trapped by the HotKey processing LOG_EX Alt Processing the hotkey and backdoor entry LOG_EX Application handle search The application being locked did not complete initialization LOG_ERROR failure Application handle search The application initialized itself successfully LOG_ERROR OK Application load failure The application could not be launched by AppLock the application could not be LOG_ERROR found or is corrupted Backdoor message re The backdoor keys have been pressed The backdoor hotkeys provide a meth LOG_ ceived od for customer service to get a user back into their system without editing the PROCESSING registry or reloading the device Cannot find kbdhook dll The load of the keyboard filter failed This occurs when the dll is missing or is LOG_ERROR corrupted Look in the Windows directory for kbdhook dll If it exists delete it Also delete AppLock exe from the Window
343. ur first synchronization process begins automatically when you finish setting up your desktop computer in the ActiveSync wizard For more information about using ActiveSync on your desktop com puter open ActiveSync then open ActiveSync Help Initial Setup The initial setup of ActiveSync must be made via a USB connection When there is a Connect icon on the desktop this section can be bypassed Partnerships can only be created using USB cable connection Connect via USB The default connection type is USB Client This is the only connection option supported on the Thor VM2 To verify it is set to USB select Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt PC Connection Tap the Change button From the popup list choose USB Client This will set up the mobile device to use the USB port Tap OK and ensure the check box for Allow connection with desktop computer when device is attached is checked Tap OK to return to the Control Panel If desired any control panel windows may be closed Connect the USB cable to the PC the host and the mobile device the client as detailed below USB will start automatically when the USB cable is connected not requiring you to select Connect from the start menu When the Thor VM2 loses connection e g enters Suspend Mode etc the connection to ActiveSync will be lost When the Thor VM2 resumes the ActiveSync session will automatically re connect Cable for USB ActiveSync Connection
344. ustom ID list The Add button changes to Insert Enter data into both the Name and ID Code fields and click the Insert button The data is added to the selected line in the Custom IDs list Edit Double click on the item to edit Its values are copied to the text boxes for editing The Add button changes to Replace When Replace is clicked the values for the current item in the list are updated Clear All When no item in the Custom IDs list is selected clicking the Clear All button clears the Custom ID list and any text written and not yet added or inserted in the Name and ID Code text boxes Remove The Clear All button changes to a Remove button when an item in the Custom IDs list is se lected Click the desired line item and then click the Remove button to delete it Line items are Removed one at atime Contents of the text box fields are cleared at the same time Notes Prefix and Suffix data is always added on after stripping is complete and is not affected by any stripping settings If the stripping configuration results in a 0 length bar code a good beep will still be emitted since bar code data was read from the scanner Match List Rules The data in the match list is processed by the rules listed below Strings in the list will be searched in the order they appear in the list If the list contains ABC and AB in that order incoming data with ABC will match first and the AB will have no effect When a match
345. ver the power scheme timers never place the device in User Idle System Idle or Suspend modes even when the device is idle The Display gt Backlight setting is synchronized with the User Idle setting in the Schemes tab in the Power control panel Factory Default Settings Battery No user interaction Schemes The default power schemes are AC DC Ignition Control Ignition Control Auto On UPS Ignition On Ignition Off Device Status No user interaction Power Properties la Ok D Battery Schemes Device Status Status External e Good as y kal Zi Very Low Percentage of power left in UPS 100 Power Properties ok x Battery Schemes Device Status Power Scheme Jauto On y J Switch state to User Idle after 15 minutes y Switch state to System Idle after 60 minutes y Switch state to Suspend after 8 hows sl Switch state to Shutdown ever sl Note In Windows CE the times for state switching are cumulative 5 78 Battery Schemes Device Status Power Properties ok Device Name BKL1 High DO DSK1 High DO NDSO High DO NLDI1 High DO PMT2 High D0 SBS1 High DO SEC1 High DO SWGOBIUSBNDIS1 High DO SWI9 High D0 The default Power Scheme selected for the Thor VM2 depends on the Power Configuration Mode page 5 80 setting if external power is connected to the Thor VM2 and for ig
346. x to enable this option Tap the Settings button to view or change parameters Automatic reset is disabled by default Tap the Turn off accessibility features checkbox to enable this option and use the dropdown option to assign a timer Notification is enabled by default Sounds are emitted when turning a feature on or off Accessibility StickyKeys 5 ToggleKeys at gf Keyboard Sound Display Mouse General O Use StickykKeys Use StickyKeys if you want to use Shift Ctrl or Alt key by pressing one key at a time Settings Use ToggleKeys if you want to hear tones when pressing CapsLock NumLock and ScrollLock Settings IT Use ToggleKeys The following exceptions are due to a limitation in the Microsoft Windows CE operating system e Ifthe ToggleKeys option is selected please note that the ScrollLock key does not produce a sound as the CapsLock and NumLock keys do e If the SoundSentry option is selected please note that ScrollLock does not produce a visual warning as the CapsLock and NumLock keys do Administration Start gt Settings gt Conirol Panel gt Administration AppLock is designed to be run on certain certified Windows CE based devices only The AppLock program is installed as part of the default software load and is configured with the Administration control panel Configuration parameters are specified by the AppLock Administrator for the Thor VM2
347. xternal antenna Place the antenna over the antenna connector If only one antenna is used be sure to connect it to the Wi Fi Main connector Push down and twist the antenna base clockwise until secure Repeat for second antenna if used Install Remote Antenna Remote antennas are available for the 802 11 WLAN radio the WWAN radio and the GPS 802 11 Remote Mount Antenna A The Remote Antenna Installation Kit consists of two brackets 3 base plate and right angle cable and antenna Tools are not included The desired remote antenna bracket is mounted on the top of a forklift truck or other vehicle and cabled to the Thor VM2 inside the vehicle The Vehicle Remote Mount Antenna cannot be used by devices with an internal antenna Antenna m Yo antenna E y Bracket ao To antenna connector on computer Typical Installation Vehicle Safety Cage Mounting Bracket Antenna pS Vehicle Mounted Computer Mounting Instructions 1 a fF eo DP Attach and secure the desired mounting bracket to the highest point on the safety cage following these pre cautions e The plate must be mounted so the antenna is not damaged while the vehicle or any of its parts are moving e The antenna mounting portion of the bracket must be parall
348. y Certificates Select My Certificates from the pull down list Certificates Ki x Stores my Certificates y Lists your personal El digital certificates Import View Remove Tap the Import button Import Certificate or Key OK Bai From a File O From a Smart Card Reader ES Card Absent Make sure From a File is selected and tap OK Select a Certificate File Eil ek E sl OJ My Documents Shortcut to Office Templates Name Type Certificates y Using the explorer buttons browse to the location where you copied the certificate select the certificate desired and tap OK The certificate is now shown in the list GG OK Bal pal Certificates y Lists your personal digital certificates Import view Remove With the certificate you just imported highlighted tap View From the Field pull down menu select Private Key Certificate Details Friendly Name Private Key y e If the private key is present the process is complete e If the private key is not present import the private key To import the private key tap OK to return to the Certificates screen Tap import Select a Certificate File e 2 2 ok QJ My Documents Shortcut to Office Templates Name Type Private Keys y Using the explorer buttons browse to the location where you copied the private key file change

Thor VM2 User`s Guide (Windows CE 6.0 OS)

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents